<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"
	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"
	>

<channel>
	<title>TS Board Solutions</title>
	<atom:link href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/feed/" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" />
	<link>https://tsboardsolutions.in</link>
	<description>Telangana TS Board Textbook Solutions for Class 6th, 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th, Inter 1st &#38; 2nd Year</description>
	<lastBuildDate>Mon, 19 Oct 2026 11:09:21 +0000</lastBuildDate>
	<language>en-US</language>
	<sy:updatePeriod>
	hourly	</sy:updatePeriod>
	<sy:updateFrequency>
	1	</sy:updateFrequency>
	<generator>https://wordpress.org/?v=7.1.3</generator>

<image>
	<url>https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/cropped-TS-Board-Solutions-Logo-32x32.jpg</url>
	<title>TS Board Solutions</title>
	<link>https://tsboardsolutions.in</link>
	<width>32</width>
	<height>32</height>
</image> 
<site xmlns="com-wordpress:feed-additions:1">213359840</site>	<item>
		<title>Sequences and Series MCQ AP Inter 1st Year Maths Chapter 8</title>
		<link>https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-maths-chapter-8-mcq/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Mahesh]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 19 Oct 2026 11:09:21 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[AP Inter 1st Year]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tsboardsolutions.in/?p=20017</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Practice AP Inter 1st Year Maths Study Material Chapter 8 Sequences and Series MCQ to identify your strengths and weak areas. AP Inter 1st Year Maths Sequences and Series MCQ Question 1. Which of the following is finite sequence ? 1) 48, 24, 12, &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.. 2) 1, 2, 3, &#8230;&#8230;. 3) 2, 4, 6, 8, ... <a title="Sequences and Series MCQ AP Inter 1st Year Maths Chapter 8" class="read-more" href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-maths-chapter-8-mcq/" aria-label="Read more about Sequences and Series MCQ AP Inter 1st Year Maths Chapter 8">Read more</a>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Practice <a href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-maths-textbook-solutions/">AP Inter 1st Year Maths Study Material</a> Chapter 8 Sequences and Series MCQ to identify your strengths and weak areas.</p>
<h2>AP Inter 1st Year Maths Sequences and Series MCQ</h2>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Which of the following is finite sequence ?<br />
1) 48, 24, 12, &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;..<br />
2) 1, 2, 3, &#8230;&#8230;.<br />
3) 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;..<br />
4) 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, &#8230;&#8230;.<br />
Answer:<br />
3) 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;..</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
2, 4, 6, 8, 10 is a finite sequence.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Which of the following relation gives Fibonacci sequence ?<br />
1) a<sub>n</sub> = a<sub>n-1</sub> + a<sub>n-2</sub>, n &gt; 2<br />
2) a<sub>n-1</sub> = a<sub>n</sub> + a<sub>n-2</sub>, n &gt; 2<br />
3) a<sub>n-2</sub> = a<sub>n</sub> + a<sub>n-1</sub>, n&gt; 2<br />
4) a<sub>n</sub> = a<sub>n+1</sub> + a<sub>n-2</sub>, n &gt; 2<br />
Answer:<br />
1) a<sub>n</sub> = a<sub>n-1</sub> + a<sub>n-2</sub>, n &gt; 2</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
Relation of fibonacci sequence is a<sub>n</sub> = a<sub>n-1</sub> + a<sub>n-2</sub>, n &gt; 2</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
The first term of Fibonacci sequence is<br />
1) 0<br />
2) 1<br />
3) 2<br />
4) 3<br />
Answer:<br />
2) 1</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
The first term of fibonacci sequence is “1”.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
If a<sub>n</sub> = 4n + 6, then 15<sup>th</sup> term of the sequence is<br />
1) 6<br />
2) 10<br />
3) 60<br />
4) 66<br />
Answer:<br />
4) 66</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
a<sub>n</sub> = 4n + 6<br />
a<sub>15</sub> = 4(15) + 6<br />
= 60 + 6 = 66</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Sequences and Series MCQ AP Inter 1st Year Maths Chapter 8" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
A series can also be denoted by the symbol &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;<br />
1) πa<sub>n</sub><br />
2) Σa<sub>n</sub><br />
3) Φa<sub>n</sub><br />
4) θa<sub>n</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
2) Σa<sub>n</sub></p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
Series denoted by Σa<sub>n</sub></p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
The sum of first five terms of series 2 + 4 + 6 + &#8230;.. is<br />
1) 14<br />
2) 16<br />
3) 20<br />
4) 30<br />
Answer:<br />
4) 30</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
Given series 2 + + 6 + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;..<br />
Sum of even number S<sub>n</sub> = n(n + 1)<br />
S<sub>5</sub> = 5(5 + 1) = 5.(6) = 30</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
\(\sum_{n=1}^4\) 2n + 3 = &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.<br />
1) 5<br />
2) 12<br />
3) 21<br />
4) 32<br />
Answer:<br />
4) 32</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
\(\sum_{n=1}^4\) 2n + 3, If n = 1, 2, 3, 4; Series is 5, 7, 9, 11 &#8230;&#8230; ; S<sub>4</sub> = 5 + 7 + 9 + 11 = 32</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
If a<sub>n+1</sub> = a<sub>n</sub>. r then the sequence is called<br />
1) Arithmetic progression<br />
2) Geometric progression<br />
3) Harmonic progression<br />
4) Special progression<br />
Answer:<br />
2) Geometric progression</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
a<sub>n+1</sub> = a<sub>n</sub>. r is G.P.</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
The nth term of G.P. is ( 3 )<br />
1) a<sub>n</sub> = a + (n &#8211; 1) d<br />
2) a<sub>n</sub> = a + nd<br />
3) a<sub>n</sub> = a . r<sup>n-1</sup><br />
4) a<sub>n</sub> = ar<sup>n</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
3) a<sub>n</sub> = a . r<sup>n-1</sup></p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
n<sup>th</sup> term of G.P. is a<sub>n</sub> = a . r<sup>n-1</sup></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Sequences and Series MCQ AP Inter 1st Year Maths Chapter 8" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
If r = 1 in G.P. then the sum of first n terms is<br />
1) na<br />
2) a/n<br />
3) (n &#8211; 1) a<br />
4) (n + 1) a<br />
Answer:<br />
1) na</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
If r = 1, the sum of first n terms = na</p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
If 4, 8, 16, 32 are in G.P. then the sum upto 5th term is<br />
1) 16<br />
2) 64<br />
3) 128<br />
4) 124<br />
Answer:<br />
4) 124</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
4, 8, 16, 32, are in G.P; a = 4, r = 2<br />
S<sub>5</sub> = \(\frac{4\left(2^5-1\right)}{2-1}=\frac{4(32-1)}{1}\) = 4(31) = 124</p>
<p>Question 12.<br />
The Sum of series 1 + \(\frac{1}{2}+\frac{1}{4}\) + &#8230;&#8230;.. upto 6 terms is<br />
1) \(\frac{63}{32}\)<br />
2) \(\frac{32}{63}\)<br />
3) \(\frac{26}{53}\)<br />
4) \(\frac{53}{26}\)<br />
Answer:<br />
1) \(\frac{63}{32}\)</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
Series 1 + \(\frac{1}{2}+\frac{1}{4}\) + &#8230;&#8230;.. upto 6 terms<br />
Sum of 6 terms = \(\frac{\left(1-\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^6\right)}{1-\frac{1}{2}}\)<br />
= 2(1 &#8211; \(\frac{1}{64}\))<br />
= 2 &#8211; \(\frac{1}{32}=\frac{64-1}{32}=\frac{63}{32}\)</p>
<p>Question 13.<br />
The geometric mean of 3 and 12 is &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.<br />
1) 4<br />
2) 6<br />
3) 9<br />
4) 12<br />
Answer:<br />
2) 6</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
Geometric mean of 3 and 12 = \(\sqrt{3 \times 12}=\sqrt{36}\)<br />
= 6</p>
<p>Question 14.<br />
If A.M of two numbers is \(\frac{15}{2}\) and their G.M is 6 then the two numbers are<br />
1) 6 and 8<br />
2) 12 and 3<br />
3) 24 and 6<br />
4) 27 and 3<br />
Answer:<br />
2) 12 and 3</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
Let the two numbers be and b<br />
A.M = \(\frac{15}{2} \Rightarrow \frac{a+b}{2}=\frac{15}{2}\)<br />
⇒ a + b = 15 &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.(1)</p>
<p>G. M = 6 ⇒ \(\sqrt{\mathrm{ab}}\)<br />
⇒ ab = 36</p>
<p>a &#8211; b = \(\sqrt{(a+b)^2-4 a b}=\sqrt{225-144}=\sqrt{81}\)<br />
a &#8211; b = 9 &#8230;(2)<br />
(1) + (2) ⇒ a = 12, b = 3</p>
<p>Question 15.<br />
If A means arithmetic mean and G means geometric mean then which of the following is true ?<br />
1) A &gt; G<br />
2) A ≥ G<br />
3) G &gt; A<br />
4) G ≥ A<br />
Answer:<br />
2) A ≥ G</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
A ≥ G</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Sequences and Series MCQ AP Inter 1st Year Maths Chapter 8" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 16.<br />
The ratio of A.M. and G.M of two positive numbers a and b is 5 : 3. Then the ratio of a to b is ( 1 )<br />
1) 9 : 1<br />
2) 3 : 5<br />
3) 1 : 9<br />
4) 3 : 1<br />
Answer:<br />
\(\frac{A \cdot M}{G \cdot M}=\frac{5}{3} \Rightarrow \frac{a+b}{2 \sqrt{a b}}=\frac{5}{3}\)<br />
⇒ 9(a + b)<sup>2</sup> = 25 (4ab)<br />
⇒ 9a<sup>2</sup> + 18ab + 9b<sup>2</sup> = 100 ab<br />
⇒ 9a<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 82ab + 9b<sup>2</sup> = 0<br />
⇒ (9a &#8211; b) (a &#8211; 9b) = 0<br />
9a-b = 0<br />
9a = b<br />
\(\frac{a}{b}=\frac{1}{9}\)</p>
<p>a &#8211; 9b = 0<br />
a = 9b<br />
\(\frac{a}{b}=\frac{9}{1}\)<br />
∴ a : b = 9 : 1 (∵ a &gt; b)</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
		<post-id xmlns="com-wordpress:feed-additions:1">20017</post-id>	</item>
		<item>
		<title>AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7b Solutions</title>
		<link>https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-maths-exercise-7b-solutions/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Mahesh]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 19 Oct 2026 10:14:10 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[AP Inter 1st Year]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tsboardsolutions.in/?p=19999</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Referring to the AP Inter 1st Year Maths Study Material Chapter 7 Binomial Theorem Exercise 7b Solutions makes it easier to understand complex problems. AP Inter 1st Year Maths Binomial Theorem Solutions Exercise 7b I. Question 1. If a and b are distinct integers, prove that a &#8211; b is a factor of an &#8211; ... <a title="AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7b Solutions" class="read-more" href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-maths-exercise-7b-solutions/" aria-label="Read more about AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7b Solutions">Read more</a>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Referring to the <a href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-maths-textbook-solutions/">AP Inter 1st Year Maths Study Material</a> Chapter 7 Binomial Theorem Exercise 7b Solutions makes it easier to understand complex problems.</p>
<h2>AP Inter 1st Year Maths Binomial Theorem Solutions Exercise 7b</h2>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">I.</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
If a and b are distinct integers, prove that a &#8211; b is a factor of a<sup>n</sup> &#8211; b<sup>n</sup>, whenever n is a positive integer. [Hint : Write a<sup>n</sup> = (a &#8211; b + b)<sup>n</sup> and expand]<br />
Solution:<br />
Here, a<sup>n</sup> = (a &#8211; b + b)<sup>n</sup> = [(a &#8211; b) + b)<sup>n</sup><br />
By using Binomial theorem, the expression [(a &#8211; b) + b]<sup>n</sup> can be expanded as<br />
<sup>n</sup>C<sub>0</sub>(a- b)<sup>n</sup> b<sup>0</sup> + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>1</sub>(a- b)<sup>n-1</sup> b<sup>1</sup> + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>2</sub>(a- b)<sup>n-2</sup> b<sup>2</sup> + &#8230;. + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>n-1</sub>(a &#8211; b)b<sup>n-1</sup> + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>n</sub>(a- b)<sup>0</sup>b<sup>n</sup><br />
= (a &#8211; b)<sup>n</sup> + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>1</sub>(a &#8211; b)<sup>n-1</sup> b + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>2</sub>(a &#8211; b)<sup>n-2</sup> b<sup>n</sup> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.. + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>n-1</sub>(a &#8211; b)b<sup>n-1</sup>] + b<sup>n</sup><br />
⇒ a<sup>n</sup> = (a &#8211; b)[(a &#8211; b)<sup>n-1</sup> + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>1</sub>(a &#8211; b)<sup>n-2</sup> b + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>2</sub>(a &#8211; b)<sup>n-3</sup> b<sup>2</sup> + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>n-1</sub>b<sup>n-1</sup>] + b<sup>n</sup><br />
⇒ a<sup>n</sup> &#8211; b<sup>n</sup> = (a &#8211; b)[(a &#8211; b)<sup>n-1</sup> + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>1</sub>(a &#8211; b)<sup>n-2</sup> b + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>2</sub>(a &#8211; b)<sup>n-3</sup> b<sup>2</sup> + &#8230;&#8230;. + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>n-1</sub>b<sup>n-1</sup>]<br />
now, a &#8211; b is a factor of R.H.S, so, a &#8211; b is also a factor of L.H.S hence, a &#8211; b is a factor of a<sup>n</sup> &#8211; b<sup>n</sup>, whenever n is a positive integer.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Evaluate (√3 + √2)<sup>6</sup> &#8211; (√3 &#8211; √2)<sup>6</sup><br />
Solution:<br />
(√3 + √2)<sup>6</sup> &#8211; (√3 &#8211; √2)<sup>6</sup><br />
= <sup>6</sup>C<sub>0</sub>(√3)<sup>6</sup> + <sup>6</sup>C<sub>1</sub>(√3)<sup>5</sup>(√2) + <sup>6</sup>C<sub>2</sub>(√3)<sup>4</sup>(√2)<sup>2</sup> + <sup>6</sup>C<sub>3</sub>(√3)<sup>3</sup>(√2)<sup>3</sup> + <sup>6</sup>C<sub>4</sub>(√3)<sup>2</sup>(√2)<sup>4</sup><br />
+ <sup>6</sup>C<sub>5</sub>(√3)<sup>1</sup>(√2)<sup>5</sup> + <sup>6</sup>C<sub>6</sub>(√2)<sup>6</sup> &#8211; [<sup>6</sup>C<sub>0</sub>(√3)6 &#8211; <sup>6</sup>C<sub>1</sub>(√3 )<sup>5</sup>(√2) + <sup>6</sup>C<sub>2</sub>(√3)<sup>4</sup>(√2)<sup>2</sup> &#8211; <sup>6</sup>C<sub>3</sub>(√3)<sup>3</sup>(√2)<sup>3</sup> + <sup>6</sup>C<sub>4</sub>(√3)<sup>2</sup>(√2)<sup>4</sup> &#8211; <sup>6</sup>C<sub>5</sub>(√3)<sup>1</sup>(√2 )<sup>5</sup> + <sup>6</sup>C<sub>6</sub>(√2)<sup>6</sup>]<br />
= 2[<sup>6</sup>C<sub>1</sub>(√3)<sup>5</sup>(√2) + <sup>6</sup>C<sub>3</sub>(√3)<sup>3</sup>(√2)<sup>3</sup> + <sup>6</sup>C<sub>2</sub>(√3)<sup>1</sup>(√2)<sup>5</sup>]<br />
= 2[6 × 9√6 + 20 × 6√6 + 6 × 4√5]<br />
= 2[54 + 120 + 24]√6<br />
= 396√6</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Find the value of (a<sup>2</sup> + \(\sqrt{a^2-1}\))<sup>4</sup> + (a<sup>2</sup> &#8211; \(\sqrt{a^2-1}\))<sup>4</sup><br />
Solution:<br />
<img fetchpriority="high" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-20012" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-1.png" alt="AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7b Solutions 1" width="613" height="249" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-1.png 613w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-1-300x122.png 300w" sizes="(max-width: 613px) 100vw, 613px" /><br />
= 2(a<sup>8</sup> + 6a<sup>4</sup>(a<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 1) + (a<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 1)<sup>2</sup>]<br />
= 2[a<sup>8</sup> + 6a<sup>6</sup> &#8211; 6a<sup>4</sup> + a<sup>4</sup> + 1 &#8211; 2a<sup>2</sup>]<br />
= 2[a<sup>8</sup> + 6a<sup>6</sup> &#8211; 5a<sup>4</sup> &#8211; 2a<sup>2</sup> + 1]<br />
= 2a<sup>8</sup> + 12a<sup>6</sup> &#8211; 10a<sup>4</sup> &#8211; 4a<sup>2</sup> + 2</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">II.</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Find an approximation of (0.99)<sup>5</sup> using the first three terms of its expansion.<br />
Solution:<br />
0.99 can be written as the sum or difference of two numbers whose powers are easier to calculate and then Binomial theorem can be applied. It can be written that, 0.99 = 1 &#8211; 0.01<br />
Therefore, (0.99)<sup>5</sup> = (1 &#8211; 0.01)<sup>5</sup><br />
= <sup>5</sup>C<sub>0</sub>(-0.01)° + <sup>5</sup>C<sub>1</sub>(-0.01)<sup>1</sup> + <sup>5</sup>C<sub>2</sub> (-0.01)<sup>2</sup> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;..<br />
= 1 &#8211; 5(0.01) + 10(0.0001) + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;<br />
= 1 &#8211; 0.05 + 0.001<br />
= 0.951</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Expand (1 + \(\frac{x}{2}-\frac{2}{x}\))<sup>4</sup> using Binomial theorem,<br />
Solution:<br />
Here (1 + \(\frac{x}{2}-\frac{2}{x}\))<sup>4</sup> = [(1 + \(\frac{x}{2}\)) &#8211; \(\frac{2}{x}\)]<sup>4</sup><br />
Using Binomial theorem, the expression (1 + \(\frac{x}{2}-\frac{2}{x}\))<sup>4</sup> can be expressed as<br />
<img decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-20011" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-2.png" alt="AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7b Solutions 2" width="635" height="170" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-2.png 635w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-2-300x80.png 300w" sizes="(max-width: 635px) 100vw, 635px" /><br />
Again applying Binomial theorem, we have<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-20010" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-3.png" alt="AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7b Solutions 3" width="503" height="199" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-3.png 503w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-3-300x119.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 503px) 100vw, 503px" /></p>
<p>Now putting the value of (1 + \(\frac{x}{2}\))<sup>4</sup> and (1 + \(\frac{x}{3}\))<sup>3</sup> in (1) we have<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-20009" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-4.png" alt="AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7b Solutions 4" width="726" height="165" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-4.png 726w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-4-300x68.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 726px) 100vw, 726px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7b Solutions" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Find the expansion of (3x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 2ax + 3a<sup>2</sup>)<sup>3</sup> using binomial theorem.<br />
Solution:<br />
Here, (3x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 2ax + 3a<sup>2</sup>)<sup>3</sup> = ((3x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 2ax) + 3a<sup>2</sup>)<sup>3</sup><br />
Using Binomial theorem, the expression [(3x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 2ax) + 3a<sup>2</sup>)<sup>3</sup> can be expressed as<br />
<sup>3</sup>C0(3x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 2ax)<sup>3</sup> + <sup>3</sup>Cj(3x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 2ax)<sup>2</sup> (3a<sup>2</sup>) + <sup>3</sup>C2(3x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 2ax)<sup>1</sup> (3a<sup>2</sup>)<sup>2</sup> + <sup>3</sup>C3(3a<sup>2</sup>)<sup>3</sup> = (3x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 2ax)<sup>3</sup> + 3(9x<sup>4</sup> + 4a<sup>2</sup>x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 12ax<sup>3</sup>)(3a<sup>2</sup>) + 3(3x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 2ax) (9a<sup>4</sup>) + (27a<sup>6</sup>)<br />
= (3x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 2ax)<sup>3</sup> + 81a<sup>2</sup>x<sup>4</sup> + 36a<sup>4</sup>x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 108a<sup>3</sup>x<sup>3</sup> + 81a<sup>4</sup>x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 54a<sup>5</sup>x + 27a<sup>6</sup></p>
<p>Again applying Binomial theorem, we have<br />
(3x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 2ax)<sup>3</sup> = <sup>3</sup>C<sub>0</sub>(3x<sup>2</sup>)<sup>3</sup> + <sup>3</sup>C<sub>1</sub>(3x<sup>2</sup>)<sup>2</sup> (-2ax)<sup>1</sup> + <sup>3</sup>C<sub>2</sub>(3x<sup>2</sup>) (-2ax)<sup>2</sup> + <sup>3</sup>C<sub>3</sub>(-2ax)<sup>3</sup><br />
= 27x<sup>6</sup> &#8211; 3 × 18ax<sup>5</sup> + 3 × 12a<sup>2</sup>x<sup>4</sup> &#8211; 8a<sup>3</sup>x<sup>3</sup><br />
= 27x<sup>6</sup> &#8211; 54ax<sup>5</sup> + 36a<sup>2</sup>x<sup>4</sup> &#8211; 8a<sup>3</sup>x<sup>3</sup></p>
<p>Now putting the value of (3x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 2ax)<sup>3</sup>, we have<br />
= 27x<sup>6</sup> &#8211; 54ax<sup>5</sup> + 36a<sup>2</sup>x<sup>4</sup> &#8211; 8a<sup>3</sup>x<sup>3</sup> + 81a<sup>2</sup>x<sup>4</sup> + 36a<sup>4</sup>x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 108a<sup>3</sup>x<sup>3</sup> + 81a<sup>4</sup>x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 54a<sup>5</sup>x + 27a<sup>6</sup><br />
= 27x<sup>6</sup> &#8211; 54ax<sup>5</sup> + 117a<sup>2</sup>x<sup>4</sup> &#8211; 116a<sup>3</sup>x<sup>3</sup> + 117a<sup>4</sup>x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 54a<sup>5</sup>x + 27a<sup>6</sup></p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Prove that C<sub>0</sub> + 3.C<sub>1</sub> + 5.C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230; + (2n + 1). C<sub>n</sub> = (2n + 2). 2<sup>n-1</sup><br />
Solution:<br />
Let S = C<sub>0</sub> + 3.C<sub>1</sub> + 5.C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230; + (2n + 1).C<sub>n</sub> &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.. (1)<br />
By writing the terms in (1) in the reverse order we get<br />
S = (2n + 1). C<sub>n</sub> + (2n &#8211; 1) . C<sub>n-1</sub> + (2n &#8211; 3).C<sub>n-2</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;.. + 3.C<sub>1</sub> + 1.C<sub>0</sub><br />
= (2n + 1).C<sub>0</sub> + (2n &#8211; 1).C<sub>1</sub> + (2n &#8211; 3).C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + 3.C<sub>n-1</sub> + 1.C<sub>n</sub> &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;. (2)<br />
On adding (1) and (2), we get<br />
2S = (2n + 2).C<sub>0</sub> + (2n + 2).C<sub>1</sub> + &#8230; + (2n + 2).C<sub>n-1</sub> + (2n + 2) . C<sub>n</sub><br />
= (2n + 2) (C<sub>0</sub> + C<sub>1</sub> + C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230; + C<sub>n</sub>) = (2n + 2).2n Therefore, S = (2n + 2) 2<sup>n-1</sup></p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Prove that, for any real numbers a, d,<br />
a.C<sub>0</sub> + (a + d) . C<sub>2</sub> + (a + 2d) . C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230; + (a + nd) . C<sub>n</sub> = (2a + nd) . 2<sup>n-1</sup><br />
Solution:<br />
Let S = a.C<sub>0</sub> + (a + d) . C<sub>2</sub> + (a + 2d) . C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230; + (a + nd) . C<sub>n</sub> &#8230;.. (1)<br />
∴ S = (a + nd) . C<sub>n</sub> + [a + (n &#8211; 1) d] . C<sub>n-1</sub> + &#8230; aC<sub>0</sub><br />
⇒ S = (a + nd) . C<sub>0</sub> + [a + (n &#8211; 1)d]. + [a + (n &#8211; 2)d].C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230; + a . C<sub>n</sub> &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.. (2)<br />
(1) + (2) =&gt; 2S = (2a + nd) C<sub>0</sub> + (2a + nd) C<sub>1</sub> + (2a + nd) C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230; + (2a + nd) C<sub>n</sub><br />
= (2a + nd) (C<sub>0</sub> + C<sub>1</sub> + C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230; + C<sub>n</sub>)<br />
= (2a + nd) 2n ⇒ S = (2a + nd) 2<sub>n</sub> &#8211; 1.</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
If n is a positive integer, then prove that<br />
C<sub>0</sub> + \(\frac{C_1}{2}+\frac{C_2}{3}\) + &#8230;&#8230; + \(\frac{C_n}{n+1}=\frac{2^{n+1}-1}{n+1}\)<br />
Solution:<br />
Let S = C<sub>0</sub> + \(\frac{C_1}{2}+\frac{C_2}{3}\) + &#8230;&#8230; + \(\frac{C_n}{n+1}=\frac{2^{n+1}-1}{n+1}\)<br />
Now multiplying on both sides with (n + 1), we get<br />
(n + 1) S = (n + 1)<sup>n</sup>C<sub>0</sub> + \(\frac{1}{2}\) (n + 1)<sup>n</sup>C<sub>1</sub> + —(n + 1)<sup>n</sup>C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230; + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>n</sub><br />
= (n +1) + \(\frac{(\mathrm{n}+1) \mathrm{n}}{1 \cdot 2}+\frac{(\mathrm{n}+1) \mathrm{n}(\mathrm{n}-1)}{1 \cdot 2 \cdot 3}\) + &#8230; + 1<br />
= <sup>(n+1)</sup>C<sub>1</sub> + <sup>(n+1)</sup>C<sub>2</sub> + <sup>(n+1)</sup>C<sub>3</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + <sup>(n+1)</sup>C<sub>n+1<br />
</sub>= <sup>(n+1)</sup>C<sub>1</sub> + <sup>(n+1)</sup>C<sub>1</sub> + <sup>(n+1)</sup>C<sub>2</sub> + <sup>(n+2)</sup>C<sub>3</sub> &#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + <sup>(n+1)</sup>C<sub>n+1</sub> &#8211; <sup>(n+1)</sup>C<sub>0</sub><br />
= 2<sup>n+1</sup> -1<br />
⇒ S = \(\frac{2^{n+1}-1}{n+1}\)<br />
C<sub>0</sub> + \(\frac{C_1}{2}+\frac{C_2}{3}\) + &#8230;&#8230; + \(\frac{C_n}{n+1}=\frac{2^{n+1}-1}{n+1}\)</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
If n is a positive integer and x is any non-zero real number, then prove that<br />
C<sub>0</sub> + C<sub>1</sub>.\(\frac{x}{2}\) + C<sub>2</sub>.\(\frac{x^2}{3}\) + C<sub>3</sub>.\(\frac{x^3}{4}\) + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.. + C<sub>n</sub>.\(\frac{x^n}{n+1}=\frac{(1+x)^{n+1}-1}{(n+1) x}\)<br />
Solution:<br />
Let S ≡ C<sub>0</sub> + C<sub>1</sub>.\(\frac{x}{2}\) + C<sub>2</sub>.\(\frac{x^2}{3}\) + C<sub>3</sub>.\(\frac{x^3}{4}\) + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.. + C<sub>n</sub>.\(\frac{x^n}{n+1}\)</p>
<p>Multiplying both sides with be &#8216;x&#8217;<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-20008" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-5.png" alt="AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7b Solutions 5" width="636" height="238" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-5.png 636w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-5-300x112.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 636px) 100vw, 636px" /></p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Prove that 2.C<sub>0</sub> + 5.C<sub>1</sub> + 8.C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.. + (3n + 2) C<sub>n</sub> = (3n + 4)2<sup>n-1</sup><br />
Solution:<br />
Let S = 2.C<sub>0</sub> + 5.C<sub>1</sub> + 8.C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.. + (3n &#8211; 1) C<sub>n-1</sub> + (3n + 2) C<sub>n</sub> &#8230;&#8230;(1)<br />
S = (3n + 2) C<sub>0</sub> + (3n &#8211; 1)C<sub>1</sub> + (3n &#8211; 4) C<sub>2</sub> + + 5C<sub>n-1</sub> + 2.C<sub>n</sub> &#8230; (2)<br />
(∵ C<sub>n</sub> = C<sub>0</sub>.C<sub>n-1</sub> = Ci&#8230;)<br />
Adding (1) 86 (2) we get 2S = (3n + 4)C0 + (3n + 4)Cj + (3n + 4)C2 + &#8230; + (3n + 4) Cn = (3n + 4) (C0 + Cj + C2 + &#8230; + Cn) = (3n + 4)2n<br />
S = (3n + 4) . 2<sup>n-1</sup></p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
Prove tnat C<sub>0</sub> +2C<sub>1</sub> + 4.C<sub>2</sub> + 8.C<sub>3</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.. + 2<sup>n</sup>.C<sub>n</sub> = 3<sup>n</sup><br />
Solution:<br />
We know that,<br />
(1 + x)<sup>n</sup> = C<sub>0</sub> + C<sub>1</sub>x + C<sub>2</sub>x<sup>2</sup> + C<sub>3</sub>x<sup>2</sup> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + C<sub>n</sub>x<sup>n</sup><br />
Put x = 2 in equation (1) we get,<br />
(1 + 2)<sup>n</sup> = C<sub>0</sub> + C<sub>1</sub>(2) + C<sub>2</sub>(2)<sup>2</sup> + C<sub>3</sub>(2)<sup>3</sup> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;. + C<sub>n</sub>(2)<sup>n</sup><br />
∴ C<sub>0</sub> +2C<sub>1</sub> + 4.C<sub>2</sub> + 8.C<sub>3</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.. + 2<sup>n</sup>.C<sub>n</sub> = 3<sup>n</sup></p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
If (1 + x + x<sup>2</sup>)<sup>n</sup> = a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub>x + a<sub>2</sub>x<sup>2</sup> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + a<sub>2n</sub>x<sup>2n</sup>, then prove that<br />
i) a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub> + a<sub>2</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + a<sub>2n</sub> = 3<sup>n</sup><br />
Solution:<br />
(1 + x + x<sup>2</sup>)<sup>n</sup> = a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub>x + a<sub>2</sub>x<sup>2</sup> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + a<sub>2n</sub>x<sup>2n</sup><br />
Put x = 1 ⇒ a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub> + a<sub>2</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + a<sub>2n</sub> = (1 + 1 + 1)<sup>n</sup> = 3<sup>n</sup> &#8230;&#8230;.(1)<br />
Put x = -1 ⇒ a<sub>0</sub> &#8211; a<sub>1</sub> + a<sub>2</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;. + a<sub>2n</sub> = (1 &#8211; 1 + 1)<sup>n</sup> = 1 &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;. (2)</p>
<p>a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub> + a<sub>2</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + a<sub>2n</sub> = 3<sup>n</sup></p>
<p>ii) a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>2</sub> + a<sub>4</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + a<sub>2n</sub> = \(\frac{3^n+1}{2}\)<br />
Solution:<br />
(1) + (2) ⇒ 2(a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>2</sub> + a<sub>4</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + a<sub>2n</sub>) = 3<sup>n</sup> + 1<br />
⇒ ∴ a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>2</sub> + a<sub>4</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + a<sub>2n</sub> = \(\frac{3^n+1}{2}\)</p>
<p>iii) a<sub>1</sub> + a<sub>3</sub> + a<sub>5</sub> + &#8230;.. + a<sub>2n-1</sub> = \(\frac{3^n-1}{2}\)<br />
Solution:<br />
(1) &#8211; (2) ⇒ 2(a<sub>1</sub> + a<sub>3</sub> + a<sub>5</sub> + &#8230;.. + a<sub>2n-1</sub>) = 3<sup>n</sup> &#8211; 1<br />
⇒ ∴ a<sub>1</sub> + a<sub>3</sub> + a<sub>5</sub> + &#8230;.. + a<sub>2n-1</sub> = \(\frac{3^n-1}{2}\)</p>
<p>iv) a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>3</sub> + a<sub>6</sub> + a<sub>9</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + a<sub>2n</sub> = 3<sup>n-1</sup><br />
Solution:<br />
Put x = 1<br />
⇒ a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>3</sub> + a<sub>6</sub> + a<sub>9</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + a<sub>2n</sub> = 3<sup>n</sup> &#8230;(a)<br />
Put x = ω<br />
a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub>ω + a<sub>2</sub>ω<sup>2</sup> + a<sub>3</sub>ω<sup>3</sup> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + a<sub>2n</sub>ω<sup>2n</sup> = 0<br />
Hint: 1 + ω + ω<sup>2</sup> = 0; ω<sup>3</sup> = 1 &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;. (b)<br />
Put x = ω<sup>2</sup><br />
⇒ a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub>ω<sup>2</sup> + a<sub>2</sub>ω<sup>4</sup> + a<sub>3</sub>ω<sup>6</sup> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + a<sub>2n</sub>ω<sup>4n</sup> = 0 &#8230;..(c)<br />
Adding (a), (b), (c)<br />
∴ 3<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub>(1 + ω + ω<sup>2</sup>) + a<sub>2</sub>(1 + ω<sup>3</sup> + ω<sup>6</sup>) + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230; + a<sub>2n</sub>(1 + ω<sup>2n</sup> + ω<sup>4n</sup>) = 3<sup>n</sup><br />
⇒ 3a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub>(0) + a<sub>2</sub>(0) + 3a<sub>3</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;. = 3<sup>n</sup><br />
∴ a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>3</sub> + a<sub>6</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230; = \(\frac{3^{\mathrm{n}}}{3}\) = 3<sup>n-1</sup></p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
If P and Q Me the sum of odd terms and the sum of even terms respectively in the expansion of (x + a)<sup>n</sup> then prove that<br />
i) P<sup>2</sup> &#8211; Q<sup>2</sup> = (x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; a<sup>2</sup>)<sup>n</sup><br />
ii) 4PQ = (x + a)<sup>2n</sup> &#8211; (x &#8211; a)<sup>2n</sup><br />
Solution:<br />
We know that (x + a)<sup>n</sup> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>0</sub>x<sup>n</sup> + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>1</sub>x<sup>n-1</sup>a + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>2</sub> x<sup>n-2</sup>a<sup>2</sup> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;<br />
(x + a)<sup>n</sup> = T<sub>1</sub> + T<sub>2</sub> + T<sub>3</sub> + T<sub>4</sub> + T<sub>5</sub> + T<sub>6</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.<br />
Given that P = (T<sub>1</sub> + T<sub>3</sub> + T<sub>5</sub> + T<sub>7</sub> + &#8230;) and Q = (T<sub>2</sub> + T<sub>4</sub> + T<sub>6</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.)<br />
⇒ (x + a)<sup>n</sup> = P + Q &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;(1) and (x &#8211; a)<sup>n</sup> = P &#8211; Q &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.(2)</p>
<p>i) P<sup>2</sup> &#8211; Q<sup>2</sup> = (P + Q) (P &#8211; Q) = (x + a)<sup>n</sup> (x &#8211; a)<sup>n</sup> = [(x + a) (x &#8211; a)]<sup>n</sup> = (x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; a<sup>2</sup>)<sup>n</sup></p>
<p>ii) 4PQ = (P + Q)<sup>2</sup> &#8211; (P &#8211; Q)<sup>2</sup><br />
= [(x + a)<sup>n</sup>]<sup>2</sup> &#8211; [(x &#8211; a)<sup>n</sup>]<sup>2</sup><br />
= (x + a)<sup>2n</sup> &#8211; (x &#8211; a)<sup>2n</sup></p>
<p>Question 12.<br />
If (1 + 3x &#8211; 2x<sup>2</sup>)<sup>10</sup> = a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub>x + a<sub>2</sub>x<sup>2</sup> + &#8230; + a<sub>20</sub>x<sup>20</sup>, then prove that<br />
i) a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub> + a<sub>2</sub> + &#8230; + a<sub>20</sub> = 2<sup>10</sup><br />
ii) a<sub>0</sub> &#8211; a<sub>1</sub> + a<sub>2</sub> &#8211; a<sub>3</sub> + &#8230; + a<sub>20</sub> = 4<sup>10</sup><br />
Solution:<br />
(1 + 3x &#8211; 2x<sup>2</sup>)<sup>10</sup> = a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub>x + a<sub>2</sub>x<sup>2</sup> + &#8230; + a<sub>20</sub>x<sup>20</sup> &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.. (1)</p>
<p>i) Put x = 1 in eq. (1)<br />
(1 + 3 &#8211; 2)<sup>10</sup> = a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub> + a<sub>2</sub> + &#8230; + a<sub>20</sub><br />
∴ a<sub>0</sub> + a<sub>1</sub> + a<sub>2</sub> + &#8230; + a<sub>20</sub> = 2<sup>10</sup></p>
<p>ii) Put x = -1 in eq (1)<br />
(1 &#8211; 3 &#8211; 2)<sup>10</sup> = a<sub>0</sub> &#8211; a<sub>1</sub> + a<sub>2</sub> &#8211; a<sub>3</sub> + &#8230; + a<sub>20</sub><br />
∴ a<sub>0</sub> &#8211; a<sub>1</sub> + a<sub>2</sub> &#8211; a<sub>3</sub> + &#8230; + a<sub>20</sub> = (-4)<sup>10</sup> = 4<sup>10</sup></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7b Solutions" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 13.<br />
Show that the middle term in the expansion of (1 + x)<sup>2n</sup> is \(\frac{1 \cdot 3 \cdot 5 \ldots(2 n-1)}{n!}\) 2<sup>n</sup> . x<sup>n</sup>, where n is a positive integer.<br />
Solution:<br />
As 2n is even, the middle term of the expansion (1 + x)<sup>2n</sup> is i.e., (n + 1)<sup>th</sup> term<br />
Now T<sub>n+1</sub> = <sup>2n</sup>C<sub>n</sub> (1)<sup>2n-n</sup> (x)<sup>n</sup> = <sup>2n</sup>C<sub>n</sub> x<sup>n</sup> = \(\frac{(2 \mathrm{n})!}{\mathrm{n}!\mathrm{n}!}\)x<sup>n</sup><br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-20007" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-6.png" alt="AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7b Solutions 6" width="556" height="151" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-6.png 556w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-6-300x81.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 556px) 100vw, 556px" /></p>
<p>Question 14.<br />
The second, third and fourth terms in the binomial expansion (x + a)<sup>n</sup> are 240, 720, 1080 respectively. Find the value of x, a and n.<br />
Solution:<br />
Given expression is (a + x)<sup>n</sup>. General term T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r</sub> a<sup>n-r</sup> x<sup>r</sup><br />
T<sub>2</sub> = T<sub>1+1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>1</sub> a<sup>n-1</sup> x<sup>1</sup> = 240 &#8230; (1)<br />
T<sub>3</sub> = T<sub>2+1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>2</sub> a<sup>n-2</sup> x<sup>2</sup> = 720 &#8230; (2)<br />
T<sub>4</sub> = T<sub>3+1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>3</sub> a<sup>n-3</sup> x<sup>3</sup> = 1080 &#8230; (3)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-20006" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-7.png" alt="AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7b Solutions 7" width="612" height="184" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-7.png 612w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/AP-Inter-1st-Year-Maths-Exercise-7b-Solutions-7-300x90.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 612px) 100vw, 612px" /><br />
⇒ 4n &#8211; 8 = 3n &#8211; 3<br />
⇒ 4n &#8211; 3n = -3 + 8<br />
∴ n = 5</p>
<p>Substitute n = 5 in (4) ⇒ 4x = 6a ⇒ x = 3a/2<br />
Substitute x, n values in (1)<br />
⇒ 5 a<sup>4</sup>\(\left(\frac{3 \mathrm{a}}{2}\right)\) = 240<br />
⇒ a<sup>5</sup> = \(\frac{240 \times 2}{15}\) = 32<br />
⇒ a<sup>5</sup> = 2<sup>5</sup><br />
⇒ a = 2</p>
<p>Substitute the values of n = 5 and a = 2 in (6)<br />
⇒ x = \(\frac{3(2)}{2}\) = 3<br />
∴ a = 2, x = 3, n = 5</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
		<post-id xmlns="com-wordpress:feed-additions:1">19999</post-id>	</item>
		<item>
		<title>Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2</title>
		<link>https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-physics-chapter-2/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Srinivas]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sat, 17 Oct 2026 13:04:36 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[AP Inter 1st Year]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tsboardsolutions.in/?p=19977</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Regular practice with AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers helps students stay prepared for examinations. AP Inter 1st Year Physics 2nd Lesson Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers I. Multiple Choice Questions Question 1. The velocity of a body depends on time ... <a title="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2" class="read-more" href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-physics-chapter-2/" aria-label="Read more about Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2">Read more</a>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Regular practice with <a href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-physics-study-material/">AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material</a> Chapter 2 Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers helps students stay prepared for examinations.</p>
<h2>AP Inter 1st Year Physics 2nd Lesson Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers</h2>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">I. Multiple Choice Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
The velocity of a body depends on time according to the equation V = 10 + 2t<sup>2</sup>. The body undergoing<br />
(1) uniform acceleration<br />
(2) uniform retardation<br />
(3) non-uniform acceleration<br />
(4) zero acceleration<br />
Answer:<br />
(3) non-uniform acceleration</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Which of the following is true?<br />
(1) Speed is always equal to magnitude of velocity.<br />
(2) Speed is always greater than the magnitude of velocity.<br />
(3) Velocity is always greater than the speed.<br />
(4) Speed in general is either equal to or greater than the magnitude of velocity.<br />
Answer:<br />
(1) Speed is always equal to magnitude of velocity.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
A bullet is dropped from the same time another bullet is fired horizontally. They will hit the ground<br />
(1) one after the other<br />
(2) simultaneously<br />
(3) depends on the observer<br />
(4) depends on the velocity of the fired bullet<br />
Answer:<br />
(2) simultaneously</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
If a car is moving with a uniform velocity of 60 km/h. Then its acceleration is<br />
(1) 0km / h<sup>2</sup><br />
(2) 10km / h<sup>2</sup><br />
(3) 20km / h<sup>2</sup><br />
(4) 30km / h<sup>2</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
(1) 0km / h<sup>2</sup></p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
A ball is thrown vertically upward with an initial velocity of 50 m/s. Its maximum height is (take g = 10/s<sup>2</sup>)<br />
(1) 125m<br />
(2) 250 m<br />
(c) 500 m<br />
(d) 1000 m<br />
Answer:<br />
(1) 125m</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
A particle moves in a straight line with an initial velocity of 10m/s and a constant acceleration of 2m/s<sup>2</sup>. Its displacement after 5 seconds will be<br />
(1) 50 m<br />
(2) 75 m<br />
(3) 150 m<br />
(4) 200 m<br />
Answer:<br />
A = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\)at<sup>2</sup> (or) x = v<sub>0</sub>t + \(\frac{1}{2}[latex]at<sup>2</sup>, ∴ x = (10 × 5) + [latex]\frac{1}{2}\)(2) × 5<sup>2</sup> = 50 + 25 = 75 m</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
A body starts from rest and moves with a uniform acceleration of 2m / s<sup>2</sup>. Its velocity after 10 seconds will be<br />
(1) 5 m/s<br />
(2) 10 m/s.<br />
(3) 15 m/s<br />
(4) 20 m/s<br />
Answer:<br />
(4) 20 m/s<br />
V = u + at = 0 + (2 × 10) = 20m/s</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
For the motion with uniform velocity, the slope of the velocity-time graph is equal to<br />
(1) 1 m/s<br />
(2) zero<br />
(3) initial velocity<br />
(4) final velocity<br />
Answer:<br />
(2) zero</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
If a cyclist takes two minutes to complete half revolution on a circular path of 120 m radius, what is the average speed?<br />
(1) 1 m/s<br />
(2) 2 m/s<br />
(3) 3.14 m/s<br />
(4) 4.14 m/s<br />
Answer:<br />
(3) 3.14 m/s<br />
Average Speed = \(\frac{\text { Total distance }}{\text { Total Time }}=\frac{\pi \mathrm{r}}{2 \times 60}=\frac{3.14 \times 120}{2 \times 60}\) = 3.14 m/s</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
In a particular time, the net displacement travelled by the body is equal to<br />
(1) the area which v -1 graph encloses with displacement axis<br />
(2) the area which x -1 graph encloses with the time axis<br />
(3) the area which v -1 graph encloses with time axis<br />
(4) the area which a -1 graph encloses with displacement axis<br />
Answer:<br />
(3) the area which v -1 graph encloses with time axis</p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
A particle moves along a straight line. At a time t, the distance x of the particle from the origin given by x = 20 + 12t &#8211; t<sup>3</sup> where x is in meters and t in sec, the time taken for the particle fo coming to rest is<br />
(1) 1 s<br />
(2) 2 s<br />
(3) 4 s<br />
(4) 6 s<br />
Answer:<br />
(2) 2 s<br />
x = 20 + 12t &#8211; t<sup>3</sup>, \(\frac{d x}{d t}\) = 12 &#8211; 3t<sup>2</sup> = V, 12 &#8211; 3t<sup>2</sup> = 0 ⇒ 3t<sup>2</sup> = 12 ⇒ t<sup>2</sup> = 4, t = 2s</p>
<p>Question 12.<br />
A car travels half of the distance with speed v and the remaining distance with speed 2v. Its average speed is<br />
(1) \(\frac{4 v}{3}\)<br />
(2) \(\frac{3 v}{3}\)<br />
(3) \(\frac{v}{3}\)<br />
(4) \(\frac{2 v}{3}\)<br />
Answer:<br />
(1) \(\frac{4 v}{3}\)<br />
Average Speed = \(\frac{2 u v}{u+v}=\frac{2 \times(v)(2 v)}{v+2 v}=\frac{2 \times v \times 2}{3}=\frac{4}{3} v\)</p>
<p>Question 13.<br />
A car runs at constant speed on a circular track of radius 100 m, taking 62.8 seconds for every circular lap. The average velocity and average speed of each circular lap respectively is<br />
(1) 10 m/s, 0 m/s<br />
(2) 0m/s. 0 m/s<br />
(3) 0 m/s, 10 m/s<br />
(4) 10 m/s, 10 m/s<br />
Answer:<br />
(3) 0 m/s, 10 m/s<br />
Hint: Average Velocity = 0<br />
Average Speed = \(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{62.8}=\frac{2 \times 3.14 \times 100}{62.8}=\frac{6.28 \times 100}{62.8}\) = 10m/s</p>
<p>Question 14.<br />
The motion of the particle is given by the equation S = (2t<sup>3</sup> + 5t<sup>2</sup> + 16t + 8)m. The value of acceleration of the particle at t = 1 sec is<br />
(1) 20 m/s<sup>2</sup><br />
(2) 22 m/s<sup>2</sup><br />
(3) 24 m/s<sup>2</sup><br />
(4) 26 m/s<sup>2</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
(2) 22 m/s<sup>2</sup><br />
S = 2t<sup>3</sup> + 5t<sup>2</sup> + 16t + 8, v = \(\frac{\mathrm{ds}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = 6t<sup>2</sup> + 10t + 16; a = \(\frac{\mathrm{dv}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = 12t + 10<br />
at t = 1, a = 12 + 10 = 22m/s<sup>2</sup></p>
<p>Question 15.<br />
The ratio of distances travelled by a freely falling body in the 1<sup>st</sup>, 2<sup>nd</sup>, 3<sup>rd</sup>, 4<sup>th</sup> second<br />
(1) 1:2:3:4<br />
(2) 1:4:9:16<br />
(3) 1:3:5:7<br />
(4) 1:1:1:1<br />
Answer:<br />
(3) 1:3:5:7<br />
S<sub>n</sub> = u + \(\frac{\mathrm{a}}{2}\)(2n &#8211; 1), S<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2}\)(2(1) &#8211; 1) = \(\)<br />
S<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2}\)(2(2)- 1) = \(\frac{\mathrm{3g}}{2}\), S<sub>3</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2}\)(2(3) &#8211; 1) = \(\frac{\mathrm{5g}}{2}\) ⇒ S<sub>1 </sub>: S<sub>2</sub>: S<sub>3</sub> : S<sub>4</sub> = 1 : 3 : 5 : 7</p>
<p>Question 16.<br />
A stone falls freely under gravity. It covers distances h<sub>1</sub>, h<sub>2</sub> and h<sub>3</sub> in the first 5 seconds, the next 5 seconds and the next 5 seconds respectively. The relation between h<sub>1</sub>, h<sub>2</sub> and h<sub>3</sub> is<br />
(1) h<sub>2</sub> = 3h<sub>1</sub> and h<sub>3</sub> = 3h<sub>2</sub><br />
(2) h<sub>1</sub> = h<sub>2</sub> = h<sub>3</sub><br />
(3) h<sub>1</sub> = 2h<sub>2</sub> = 3 h<sub>3</sub><br />
(4) h<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}_2}{3}=\frac{\mathrm{h}_3}{5}\)<br />
Answer:<br />
(4) h<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}_2}{3}=\frac{\mathrm{h}_3}{5}\)<br />
h<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{1}{2}\)g(5<sup>2</sup>) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)g(25), x<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{1}{2}\)g(10<sup>2</sup>) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)g(100)<br />
h<sub>2</sub> = x<sub>1</sub> &#8211; h<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{1}{2}\)g (100 &#8211; 25) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)g(75), x<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{1}{2}\)g (15<sup>2</sup>) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)g(225)<br />
h<sub>3</sub> = x<sub>2</sub> &#8211; x<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{1}{2}\)g(225 &#8211; 100) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)g(125), h, = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}_2}{3}=\frac{\mathrm{h}_3}{5}\) (or) 1:3:5:7</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">II. Fill in the Blanks</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
________ deals with the study of motion of objects without taking into account, factors which cause the motion.<br />
Answer:<br />
Kinematics</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
The shortest path travelled by a moving object in a given time from initial to final position is called _______.<br />
Answer:<br />
displacement</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
The distance covered by a body along a semicircular path of radius r is _______ .<br />
Answer:<br />
πr</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
The slope of velocity-time graph gives _______.<br />
Answer:<br />
acceleration</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
The slope of displacement-time graph gives _______.<br />
Answer:<br />
velocity</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
The area under acceleration-time graph gives _____.<br />
Answer:<br />
change in velocity</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
The acceleration of a body moving with uniform velocity is ________.<br />
Answer:<br />
zero</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
The velocity of a body at any instant of time is called _______.<br />
Answer:<br />
instantaneous velocity</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
The value of an acceleration of a freely falling body is ________.<br />
Answer:<br />
g = 9.8 m/s<sup>2</sup>]</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
The ratio of distances travelled by a freely falling body from the rest in the first three seconds is ______.<br />
Answer:<br />
1 : 3 : 5</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">III. One Word Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
What is uniform motion ?<br />
Answer:<br />
If an object moving along a straight line covers equal displacement in equal intervals of time, said to be in uniform motion along a straight line.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
What is acceleration ?<br />
Answer:<br />
The rate of change of velocity is called acceleration.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
What is average speed ?<br />
Answer:<br />
The ratio of total distance travelled by a body to total time is called average speed.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
What is instantaneous velocity ?<br />
Answer:<br />
The velocity of a particle at a particular instant is called instantaneous velocity.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Draw position &#8211; time graph for an object at rest.<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19978" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-1.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-1" width="203" height="107" /></p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
What represents the area under the cure of velocity &#8211; time graph ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Area = v × t = displacement.</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
What is the maximum height reached by a body when it is vertically projected up with an initial velocity &#8216;u&#8217; ?<br />
Answer:<br />
H<sub>max</sub> = \(\frac{u^2}{2 g}\)</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Mention one similarity between speed and velocity.<br />
Answer:<br />
Having same units and dimensions.</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
Draw velocity-time graph for a particle moving with uniform velocity.<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19979" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-2.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-2" width="113" height="103" /></p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
What is the time taken by the body, when it is freely dropped from a height &#8220;h&#8221; ?<br />
Answer:<br />
h = \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt<sup>2</sup>; t<sup>2</sup> = \(\frac{2 h}{g} \Rightarrow t=\sqrt{\frac{2 h}{g}}\)</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">IV. Very Short Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
The states of motion and rest are relative. Explain. [dlarch &#8211; 2026]<br />
Answer:<br />
REST: If the position of a body does not change with respect to surroundings, it is said to be at &#8220;Rest&#8221;.</p>
<p>MOTION : If the position of a body changes with respect to surroundings, it is said to be in &#8220;Motion&#8221;. By definitions, rest and motion are relative with respect to surroundings.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Is it necessary that the direction of acceleration and velocity of a body should be the same? Give an example.<br />
Answer:<br />
No. For a decelerating body velocity is in forward direction and acceleration will be in opposite direction.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Is it possible for a body to have acceleration but zero velocity? Give an example.<br />
Answer:<br />
In case of vertically projected body at maximum height its velocity v = 0. But acceleration due to gravity &#8216;g&#8217; is not zero.<br />
So even though velocity v = 0 ⇒ acceleration is not zero.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Which is greater, a velocity of 72kmph or 25m/s ?<br />
Answer:<br />
V<sub>1</sub> = 72 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = 20m/s; V<sub>2</sub> = 25m/s ∴ 25m/s is greater than 72kmph.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Give an example of one-dimensional motion where a particle moving along a straight line comes to rest and moves backward.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ol>
<li>A body projected vertically upwards.</li>
<li>When the length of pendulum is high and amplitude is less then its motion is along a straight line. The pendulum will come to a stop at extreme position and moves back in forward direction (&#8216;x&#8217; + ve) periodically.</li>
</ol>
<p>Question 6.<br />
A vehicle travels half the distance L with speed Vj and the other half with speed v<sub>2</sub>. What is the average speed ?<br />
Answer:<br />
The average speed of a vehicle for the two equal parts \(\frac{\mathrm{L}}{2}, \frac{\mathrm{~L}}{2}\) is<br />
V<sub>avg</sub> = \(\frac{\text { Total distance }}{\text { Total time }}=\frac{\frac{\mathrm{L}}{2}+\frac{\mathrm{L}}{2}}{\mathrm{t}_1+\mathrm{t}_2}\)<br />
V<sub>avg</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{L}}{\left(\frac{\frac{\mathrm{~L}}{2}}{\mathrm{~V}_1}+\frac{\frac{\mathrm{L}}{2}}{\mathrm{~V}_2}\right)}=\frac{\mathrm{L}}{\frac{\mathrm{~L}}{2}\left(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~V}_1}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{~V}_2}\right)}=\frac{1}{\frac{1}{2}\left(\frac{\mathrm{~V}_1+\mathrm{V}_2}{\mathrm{~V}_1 \mathrm{~V}_2}\right)}\) (∵ t = \(\frac{\mathrm{L} / 2}{\mathrm{~V}}\)) ⇒ V<sub>avg</sub> = \(\frac{2 V_1 V_2}{V_1+V_2}\)</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
A body covers a distance of 5m along a semicircular path from its one end to another end. What is the ratio of its distance covered to its displacement ?<br />
Answer:<br />
πr = 5; r = 5/π<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19980" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-3.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-3" width="156" height="84" /><br />
\(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Displacement }}=\frac{\pi \mathrm{r}}{2 \mathrm{r}}=\frac{\pi}{2}=\frac{22}{7 \times 2}=\frac{11}{7}\)</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Displacement travelled by a body is given by S = 2t + 5t<sup>2</sup> m. What is the acceleration of that body ?<br />
Answer:<br />
S = 2t + 5t<sup>2</sup>; V = \(\frac{\mathrm{ds}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = 2 + 10t; a= \(\frac{\mathrm{dv}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = 10m/s<sup>2</sup></p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
An object falling through a fluid is observed to have an acceleration given by a = g &#8211; bv where g is the gravitational acceleration and b is a constant. After a long time it is observed to fall with a constant velocity. What would be the value of this constant velocity ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Acceleration, a- = g &#8211; bv when moving with constant velocity, a = 0 ⇒ 0 = g &#8211; bv<br />
∴ Constant velocity, v = \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{~b}}\) m/sec.</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
Under what circumstances is the relationship s = vt valid ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Body moving with uniform velocity (a = 0).</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">V. Short Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Can the equations of kinematics be used when the acceleration varies with time ? If not, what form would these equations take ?<br />
Answer:<br />
The equations of motion are 1) v =u + at 2) s = ut + 1/2at<sup>2</sup> and 3) v<sup>2</sup> &#8211; u<sup>2</sup> = 2as. All these three equations applicable to a body moves with uniform acceleration &#8216;a&#8217;.</p>
<p>No, the equations are not applicable when the acceleration varies with time.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
A particle moves in a straight line with uniform acceleration. Its velocity at time t = 0 is V<sub>1</sub> and at time t = t is v<sub>2</sub>. The average velocity of the particle in this time interval is (v<sub>1</sub> + v<sub>2</sub>) / 2. Is this correct ? Substantiate your answer.<br />
Answer:<br />
t<sub>1</sub> = 0 ⇒ u = v<sub>1</sub> ; t<sub>2</sub> = t ⇒ v = v<sub>2</sub>; Average velocity = \(\frac{u+v}{2}=\frac{v_1+v_2}{2}\)</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Can the velocity of an object be in a direction other than the direction of acceleration of the object ? If so, give an example.<br />
Answer:<br />
Yes. Velocity of a body and its acceleration may be in different directions.<br />
Ex :<br />
1) In case of vertically projected body ⇒ velocity of body is in the upward direction and acceleration is in downward direction.<br />
2) When brakes are applied the velocity of body before coming to rest is opposite to retarding acceleration.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Obtain the equation of motion x = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\)at<sup>2</sup> for constant acceleration using graphical method.<br />
Answer:<br />
The velocity &#8211; time graph of a body moving with initial velocity &#8216;u&#8217; and with uniform acceleration &#8216;a&#8217; as shown. Let V be the velocity of the body after a time t.<br />
In v &#8211; t graph, area of velocity-time graph = total displacement travelled by it. Area under velocity &#8211; time graph = area of OABCD<br />
∴ Area of Rectangular part OACD = Area of OACD + Area of ABC.<br />
A<sub>1</sub> = OA × OD = ut &#8230;..(1)<br />
Area of triangle ABC = A<sub>2</sub><br />
A<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Base × height = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × AC × (BC) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)t(u &#8211; v)<br />
But v &#8211; u = at; ∴ A<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{1}{2}\)t. at = \(\frac{1}{2}\)at<sup>2</sup><br />
∴ Total area under graph = s = A<sub>1</sub>+ A<sub>2</sub>; s(n) = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\)at<sup>2</sup>.<br />
∴ s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\)at<sup>2</sup> is graphically proved.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19981" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-4.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-4" width="234" height="213" /></p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Explain the terms the average velocity and instantaneous velocity. When are they equal?<br />
Answer:<br />
Average velocity : It is the ratio of total displacement to total time taken. It is independent of path of the body.<br />
∴ Average velocity = \(\frac{\mathrm{s}_2-\mathrm{s}_1}{\mathrm{t}_2-\mathrm{t}_1}\) (Or) V<sub>avg</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{ds}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)<br />
Velocity of a particle at a particular instant of time is known as instantaneous velocity. Here time interval is very small. V = \(\frac{\mathrm{dx}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)<br />
Only in uniform motion, instantaneous velocity = average velocity. For all other cases instantaneous velocity may differ from average velocity.</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">Problems</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
A man walks on a straight road from his home to a market 2.5 km away with a speed of km h<sup>-1</sup>. Finding the market closed, he instantly turns and walks back home with a speed of 7.5 km h<sup>-1</sup>. What is the (a) magnitude of average velocity mid (b) average speed of the man over the time interval 0 to 50 minutes ?<br />
Solution:<br />
Time taken by man to go from his home to market, t<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{\text { distance }}{\text { speed }}=\frac{2.5}{5}=\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~h}\)<br />
Time taken by man to go from market to his home, t<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{2.5}{7.5}=\frac{1}{3} h\)<br />
∴ Total time taken = t<sub>1</sub> + t<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{1}{2}+\frac{1}{3}=\frac{5}{6} h\) = 50min.<br />
In time interval 0 to 50 min,<br />
Total distance travelled = 2.5 + 2.5 = 5 km.; Total displacement = zero.</p>
<ol>
<li>Average velocity = \(\frac{\text { displacement }}{\text { time }}\) = 0</li>
<li>Average speed = \(\frac{\text { distance }}{\text { time }}=\frac{5}{5 / 6}\) = 6 km/h</li>
</ol>
<p>Question 2.<br />
A car travels the first third of a distance with a speed of 10 kmph, the second third at 20 kmph and the last third at 60 kmph. What is its mean speed over the entire distance ?<br />
Solution:<br />
Total distance = s; distance travelled, S<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{s}{3}\); velocity, v<sub>1</sub> = 10 kmph ; distance, s<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{s}{3}\) velocity, v<sub>2</sub> = 20 kmph; distance, s<sub>3</sub> = \(\frac{s}{3}\); velocity, v<sub>3</sub> = 60 kmph<br />
Average velocity = \(\frac{\text { total distance }}{\text { total time }}\)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19982" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-5.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-5" width="651" height="220" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-5.png 651w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-5-300x101.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 651px) 100vw, 651px" /></p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
A bullet moving with a speed of 150 m s<sup>-1</sup> strikes a tree and penetrates 3.5 cm before stopping. What is the magnitude of its retardation in the tree and the time taken for it to stop after striking the tree?<br />
Solution:<br />
Velocity of bullet, u = 150 m/s; Final velocity, v = 0 ; Distance travelled, s = 3.5 cm = 3.5 × 10<sup>-2</sup> m,<br />
a) Acceleration, a = \(\frac{v^2-u^2}{2 s}=\frac{0^2-150^2}{2 \times 3.50 \times 10^{-2}}=\frac{-22500}{7 \times 10^{-2}}\)<br />
= -3.214 × 10<sup>5</sup> m/sec<sup>2</sup> (-ve sign for retardation)</p>
<p>b) Time taken to stop, t = \(\frac{v-u}{a}=\frac{-150}{-3.214 \times 10^5}\) = 4.67 × 10<sup>-4</sup> sec.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
A motorist drives north for 30 min at 85 km/h and then stops for 15 min. He continues travelling north and covers 130 km in 2 hours. What is his total displacement and average velocity ?<br />
Solution:<br />
In first part:<br />
Velocity, v<sub>1</sub> = 85 kmph ; Time, t<sub>1</sub> = 30 min ; Distance travelled, s<sub>1</sub> = v<sub>1</sub> t<sub>1</sub> = 85 × \(\frac{30}{60}\) = 42.5 km</p>
<p>In second part:<br />
Distance travelled, s<sub>2</sub> = 0 ; Time, t<sub>2</sub> = 15.0 min.</p>
<p>In third part:<br />
Distance travelled, s<sub>3</sub> = 130 km ; Time, t<sub>3</sub> = 2 hours = 120 min.<br />
a) Total distance of the motorist, s = s<sub>1</sub> + s<sub>2</sub> + s<sub>3</sub> = 42.5 + 0 + 130 = 172.5 km</p>
<p>b) Total time travelled,<br />
t = t<sub>1</sub> + t<sub>2</sub> + t<sub>3</sub> = 30 + 15 + 120 = 165 minutes = 2 hrs 45 minutes = 2\(\frac{3}{4}\) hrs. = \(\frac{11}{4}\) hrs.<br />
∴ Average velocity, v<sub>avg</sub> = \(\frac{\text { total displacement }}{\text { total time }}=\frac{172.5}{(11 / 4)}\) = 62.7 kmph.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
A ball A is dropped from the top of a building and at the same time an identical ball B is thrown vertically upward from the ground. When the balls collide the speed of A is twice that of B. At what fraction of the height of the building did the collision occur ?<br />
Solution:<br />
Given at time of collision velocity of A = V<sub>A</sub> = 2 × V<sub>B</sub> (velocity of B)<br />
Let the body be dropped from a height &#8216;h&#8217;. Let the two stones collide at x from the ground.<br />
For the body dropped, s = h &#8211; x = \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt<sup>2</sup> → (1); For the body thrown up, x = ut &#8211; \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt<sup>2</sup> → (2)<br />
For the body dropped, v = u + at ⇒ V<sub>A</sub> = gt → (3)<br />
For the body thrown up, v = u &#8211; gt ⇒ V<sub>B</sub> = u &#8211; gt → (4)<br />
Given V<sub>A</sub> = 2V<sub>B</sub> ⇒ gt = 2 (u &#8211; gt) or u = \(\frac{3gt}{2}\) → (5)<br />
Divide equation (1) with equation (2)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19983" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-6.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-6" width="571" height="161" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-6.png 571w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-6-300x85.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 571px) 100vw, 571px" /><br />
∴ Fraction of height of collision = \(\frac{2}{3}\)</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Drops of water fall at regular intervals from the roof of a building of height 16 m. The first drop strikes the ground at the same moment as the fifth drop leaves the roof. Find the distances between successive drops.<br />
Solution:<br />
Height of building, h = 16 m<br />
∴ Time taken to reach the ground, t = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 h}{g}}\)<br />
∴ Time taken to fall, t = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 16}{9.8}}=\sqrt{\frac{32}{9.8}}=\sqrt{3.26}\) = 1.80<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19984" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-7.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-7" width="177" height="258" /><br />
Number of drops, n = 5<br />
∴ Number of intervals = n &#8211; 1 = 5 &#8211; 1 = 4<br />
Time interval between drops = \(\frac{1.8}{4}\) = 0.45 sec<br />
Time of travel of 1st drop, t<sub>1</sub> = 4 × 0.45 = 1.8<br />
∴ Distance travelled by<br />
1st drop, S<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt<sub>1</sub><sup>2</sup> = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 9.8 × 1.8 × 1.8 = 16 m</p>
<p>For 2nd drop, t<sub>2</sub> = 3 × 0.45 = 1.35 sec., S<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt<sub>2</sub><sup>2</sup> ;<br />
∴ S<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 9.8 × 1.35<sup>2</sup> = 4.9 × 1.822 = 8.9278 ≅ 9m</p>
<p>For 3rd drop, t<sub>3</sub> = 2 × 0.45 = 0.9 sec.<br />
Distance, S<sub>3</sub> = \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt<sub>3</sub><sup>2</sup> = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 9.8 × 0.9<sup>2</sup> = 3.97 ≅ 4m</p>
<p>For 4th drop, t<sub>4</sub> = 1 × 0.45 = 0.45 sec.<br />
Distance travelled, S<sub>4</sub> = \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt<sub>4</sub><sup>2</sup> = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 9.8 × (0.45)<sup>2</sup> ≅ 1</p>
<p>For 5 th drop, t<sub>5</sub> = 0 ⇒ S<sub>5</sub> = 0<br />
Distance between 1<sup>st</sup> and 2<sup>nd</sup> drop S<sub>1, 2</sub> = S<sub>1</sub> &#8211; S<sub>2</sub> = 16 &#8211; 9 = 7m<br />
Distance between 2<sup>nd</sup> and 3<sup>rd</sup> drop S<sub>2, 3</sub> = S<sub>2</sub> &#8211; S<sub>3</sub> = 9 &#8211; 4 = 5 m<br />
Distance between 3<sup>rd</sup> and 4<sup>th</sup> drop S<sub>3, 4</sub> = S<sub>3</sub> &#8211; S<sub>4</sub> = 4 &#8211; 1 = 3m<br />
Distance between 4<sup>th</sup> and 5<sup>th</sup> drop S<sub>4, 5</sub> = S<sub>4</sub> &#8211; S<sub>5</sub> = 1 &#8211; 0 = 1 m<br />
∴ Distances between successive drops are 7m, 5m, 3m and 1m.</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
A food packet is dropped from an aeroplane, moving with a speed of 360 kmph in a horizontal direction, from a height of 500m. Find (i) its time of descent (ii) the horizontal distance between the point at which the food packet reaches the ground and the point above which it was dropped.<br />
Solution:<br />
Velocity of plane, V = 360 kmph = 360 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = 100 m/s.<br />
Height above the ground, h = 500 m; g = 10 m/s<sup>2</sup></p>
<p>i) Time of descent, t = \(\) = 10sec.</p>
<p>ii) Horizontal distance between point of dropping and point where it reaches the ground = Range R.<br />
∴ R = u \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\mathrm{~g}}}\) = 100 \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 500}{10}}\) = 100 x 10 = 1000 m.</p>
<h3>Motion in a Straight Line Class 11 NCERT Solutions</h3>
<p>Question 1.<br />
In which of the following examples of motion, can the body be considered approximately point object.<br />
(a) a railway carriage moving without jerks between two stations.<br />
(b) a monkey sitting on the top of a man cycling smoothly on a circular track.<br />
(c) a spinning cricket ball that turns sharply on hitting the ground.<br />
(d) a tumbling beaker that has slipped off the edge of a table.<br />
Answer:<br />
(a) A railway carriage can be considered as a point object because the size of carriage is much smaller than the distance between the two stations.</p>
<p>(b) A monkey sitting on the top of the cyclist can be considered as a point object if the cyclist describes a circular path of radius which is sufficiently larger than the size of monkey.</p>
<p>(c) A spinning cricket ball cannot be considered as a point object because the size of ball is not negligible as compared to the distance through which the ball may turn on hitting the ground.<br />
Remark: The spinning motion of cricket ball is due to its size. A point mass cannot have spin motion.</p>
<p>(d) A beaker slipping off the edge of a table cannot be considered as a point object because the size of beaker is not negligible as compared to the height of the table.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
The position &#8211; time (x &#8211; t) graphs for two children A and B returning from their school O to their homes P and Q respectively as the shown in Fig.<br />
Choose the correct entries in the brackets below :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19985" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-8.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-8" width="174" height="176" /><br />
(a) (A/B) lives closer to the school than (B/A).<br />
(b) (A/B) starts from the school earlier than (B/A).<br />
(c) (A/B) walks faster than (B/A).<br />
(d) A and B reach home at the (same/different) time.<br />
(e) (A/B) overtakes (B/A) on the road (once/twice).<br />
Answer:<br />
(a) As OP &lt; OQ ; A lives closer to school than B.<br />
(b) For A, x = 0 at t = 0 and for B, x = 0 at t = t<sub>0</sub> (let)<br />
This implies that A starts from the school earlier than B.<br />
(c) The speed = slope of x &#8211; t graph. As slope of B is greater than the slope of A, therefore, B walks faster than Answer:<br />
(d) From graph, it is clear that the positions P and Q are attained at the same time, this implies that both A and B reach home at the same time.<br />
(e) x &#8211; t graphs for A and B intersect each other only once, so B overtakes A on the road once.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
A woman starts from her home at 9.00 am, walks with a speed of 5 kmh<sup>-1</sup> on a straight road upto her office 2.5 km away, stays at the office upto 5.00 pm and returns home by an auto with a speed of 25 kmh<sup>-1</sup>. Choose suitable scales and plot the x-t graph of her motion.<br />
Answer:<br />
For motion from home to office :<br />
Time to which woman leaves the office = 09.00 am<br />
Speed = 5 km/h, distance traversed, s = 2.5 km<br />
Time taken, t<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{\text { Distance traversed }}{\text { Speed }}=\frac{2.5}{5}\) = 0.5 h = 30 min.<br />
Time at which woman reaches office<br />
= 9.00 am + 0.30 = 9.30 am<br />
Stay at office : 9.30 am &#8211; 5.00 pm (position fixed)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19986" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-9.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-9" width="327" height="203" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-9.png 327w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-9-300x186.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 327px) 100vw, 327px" /><br />
For motion from office to home :<br />
Time at which she leaves office = 5.00 pm<br />
Speed of auto = 25 km/h, distance = 2.5 km<br />
Time spent, t<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Speed }}=\frac{2.5}{25}\) = 0.1 h = 0.1 × 60 min = 6 min<br />
Time at which she reaches home = 5.06 pm<br />
The position-time (x &#8211; t) graph of motion of woman is as shown in the Fig.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
A drunkard walking in a narrow lane takes 5 steps forward and 3 steps backward, followed again by 5 steps forward and 3 steps backward, and so on. Each step is 1 m long and requires 1 s. Plot the x &#8211; t graph of his motion. Determine graphically and otherwise how long the drunkard takes to fall in a pit 13 m away from the start.<br />
Answer:<br />
The drunkard takes 5 steps forward and 3 steps backward. Each step is of 1 m length and takes 1 second. Therefore, the displacement of drunkard as a function of time is as shown below.</p>
<table border="2">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>t (seconds)</td>
<td>0</td>
<td>5</td>
<td>8</td>
<td>13</td>
<td>16</td>
<td>21</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>29</td>
<td>32</td>
<td>37</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>x (m)</td>
<td>0</td>
<td>5</td>
<td>5 &#8211; 3 = 2</td>
<td>2 + 5 = 7</td>
<td>7 &#8211; 3 = 4</td>
<td>4 + 5 = 9</td>
<td>9 &#8211; 3 = 6</td>
<td>6 + 5 = 11</td>
<td>11 &#8211; 3 = 8</td>
<td>8 + 5 = 13</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19987" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-10.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-10" width="408" height="262" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-10.png 408w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-10-300x193.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 408px) 100vw, 408px" /><br />
The position &#8211; time graph of motion of drunkard is as shown in the Fig.<br />
From graph, it is clear that the drunkard will fall into the pit 37 seconds after the beginning.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
A car moving along a straight highway with a speed of 126 kmir1 is brought to a stop within a distance of 200 m. What is the retardation of the car (assumed uniform); and how long does it take for the car to stop ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Initial speed of car, u = 126 km/h<br />
1 km/h = \(\frac{1000 \mathrm{~m}}{3600 \mathrm{~s}}=\frac{5}{18}\) m/s ; u = 126 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = 35 m/s<br />
Final speed of car, v = 0, Distance traversed, s = 200 m<br />
Using the formula v<sup>2</sup> = u<sup>2</sup> + 2as, we get<br />
0 = (35)<sup>2</sup> + 2a × 200 ⇒ -400a = (35)<sup>2</sup> ⇒ a = \(\frac{(35)^2}{400}\) = -3.06 ms<sup>-2</sup><br />
Retardation of Car = 3.06 ms<sup>-2</sup><br />
If t is the time taken, then formula v = u + at gives<br />
0 = 35 &#8211; 3.06 t ⇒ 3.06t = 35 ⇒ t = \(\frac{35}{3.06}\) = 11.4 s</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
A player throws a ball upwards with an initial speed of 29.4 ms1.<br />
(a) What is the direction of acceleration during the upward motion of the ball ?<br />
(b) What are the velocity and acceleration of the ball at the highest point of its motion ?<br />
(c) Choose the x = 0 m and t = 0 s to be the location and time of the ball at its highest point, vertically downward direction to be the positive direction of x-axis and give the signs of position, velocity and acceleration of the ball during its upward and downward motion.<br />
(d) To what height does the ball rise and after how long does the ball return to the player’s hands ?[Take g = 9.8 ms<sup>-2</sup> and neglect air resistance].<br />
Answer:<br />
(a) The ball moves under gravity throughout its motion. The acceleration due to gravity is always directed vertically downward. So, the direction of acceleration during the upward motion of the ball is vertically downward.<br />
(b) At the highest point of motion, the velocity of ball is zero and the acceleration is 9.8 ms<sup>-2</sup> directed vertically downward.<br />
(c) As the ball remains between highest point and earth, so during upward and downward motion of ball, x &gt; 0 (or x is positive).<br />
During vertically upward direction v is negative (v &lt; 0) and during vertically downward direction v is positive (v &gt; 0).<br />
Acceleration is always g = + 9.8 ms<sup>-2</sup> (positive).<br />
(d) Using formula v<sup>2</sup> = u<sup>2</sup> + 2as, we have<br />
a = + g = 9.8 ms<sup>-2</sup>, s = &#8211; H, v = 0 (at highest point)<br />
u = &#8211; 29.4 ms<sup>-1</sup> (given)<br />
0 = (-29.4)<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 2 × 9.8 × H ⇒ H = \(\frac{(29.4)^2}{2 \times 9.8}\) m = 44.1 m<br />
Also from relation, s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\)at<sup>2</sup>,<br />
we have s = 0, u = -29.4 m/s, a = 98m/s<sup>2</sup><br />
0 = -29.4 t + \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 9.8t<sup>2</sup> or \(\frac{1}{2}\) 9.8t<sup>2</sup> = 29.4 t ⇒ t = \(\frac{29.4}{4.9}\) = 6s.<br />
∴ Height, (H) = 44.1m and time taken (t) = 6s.</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Read each statement below carefully and state with reasons and examples, if it is true or false.<br />
A particle in one-dimensional motion<br />
(a) with zero speed at an instant may have non-zero acceleration at that instant.<br />
(b) with zero speed may have non-zero velocity,<br />
(c) with constant speed must have zero acceleration,<br />
(d) with positive value of acceleration must be speeding up.<br />
Answer:<br />
(a) True; at highest point of particle thrown in vertically upward direction, the speed is zero but acceleration is g = 9.8 ms<sup>-2</sup> vertically downward.<br />
(b) False; because velocity = speed + direction. As speed is zero, velocity must be zero.<br />
(c) True; as v = constant; acceleration a = \(\frac{d v}{d t}\) = 0<br />
(d) False, when a body is thrown upward its speed decreases, but gravitational acceleration is downward (assumed positive direction).<br />
However, if body continues to move along a straight line on a smooth horizontal surface, then positive acceleration will necessarily imply speeding up.</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
A ball is dropped from a height of 90 m on a floor. At each collision with the floor, the ball loses one-tenth of its speed. Plot the speed-time graph of its motion between t = 0 to 12 s.<br />
Answer:<br />
Let t<sub>1</sub> be the time taken by the ball to hit the floor.<br />
Given, u = 0, h = 90 m, g = 9.8 m/s<sup>2</sup><br />
Formula, h = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt<sup>2</sup> gives<br />
90 = 0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)9.8t<sub>1</sub><sup>2</sup> ⇒ t<sub>1</sub><sup>2</sup> = \(\frac{90}{4.9}=\frac{900}{49}\) ⇒ t<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{30}{7}\) = 4.3 s.<br />
The speed of the ball when it hits the floor first time is given by<br />
v<sub>1</sub> = u + gt<sub>1</sub> = 0 + 9.8 × \(\frac{30}{7}\) = 42 m/s<br />
Now the ball bounces upward after collision. As the ball loses one-tenth of speed during collision, therefore, upward speed of ball just after collision<br />
v<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{9}{10}\) × 42 = 37.8 m/s<br />
The ball now starts moving upward with retardation g = 9.8 m/s<sup>2</sup>. The speed of ball at any instant t will be (u<sup>1</sup> = v<sub>2</sub> = 37.8 m/s).<br />
∴ v = u<sup>1</sup> &#8211; gt = 37.8 &#8211; 9.8 t<br />
The speed of ball becomes zero at highest point after time t<sub>2</sub><sup>1</sup> is given by<br />
0 = 37.8 &#8211; 9.8 t<sub>2</sub><sup>1</sup> ⇒ t<sub>2</sub><sup>1</sup> = \(\frac{37.8}{9.8}\) = 3.85 s<br />
Now the ball begins to fall downward and attains a speed of 37.8 m/s just before collision with the floor. As time of ascent = time of descent.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19988" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-11.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-11" width="326" height="222" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-11.png 326w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-11-300x204.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 326px) 100vw, 326px" /><br />
∴ Time taken by ball to hit the floor<br />
t<sub>2</sub><sup>11</sup> = 3.85 s<br />
Total time upto this instant<br />
T = t<sub>2</sub> + t<sub>2</sub><sup>1</sup> + t<sub>2</sub><sup>11</sup> = 4.3 + 3.85 + 3.85 = 12 s<br />
The speed of ball just after second collision<br />
v<sub>3</sub> = \(\frac{9}{10}\) × 37.8 ≅ 34m/s<br />
The graph of speed and time is as shown in the Fig.<br />
Remark: Speed is never negative.</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
Explain clearly, with examples, the distinction between<br />
a) magnitude of displacement (sometimes called distance) over an interval of time and the total length of the path covered by a particle over the same interval.<br />
b) magnitude of average velocity over an interval of time, and the average speed over the same interval. [Average speed of a particle over an interval of time is defined as the total paths length divided by the time interval].<br />
Show in both (a) and (b) that the second quantity is either greater than or equal to the first. When is the equality sign true ? [For simplicity, consider one-dimensional motion only].<br />
Answer:<br />
For simplicity we suppose one-dimensional motion, where an object traverses from A to B and then returns back in total time t where AB = s.<br />
(a) Displacement = 0 and total path length = AB + AB = 2s.<br />
(b) Average velocity = \(\frac{\text { Displacement }}{\text { Time }}=\frac{0}{t}\) = 0<br />
Average speed = \(\frac{\text { Total path length }}{\text { Time }}=\frac{2 \mathrm{~s}}{\mathrm{t}}\)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19989" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-12.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-12" width="256" height="60" /><br />
In both the cases (a) and (b), the second quantity (i.e., total path length and speed) turns out to be greater than the first (i.e., magnitude of displacement and velocity respectively). However, if the motion takes place along a straight line without change in direction, then equality sign will be true.<br />
That is then, magnitude of displacement = Total path length<br />
(i.e., motion along a straight line in one direction) and magnitude of velocity = Speed.</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
A man walks on a straight road from his home to a market 2.5 km away with a speed of 5 kmh<sup>-1</sup>. Finding the market closed, he instantly turns and walks back home with a speed of 7.5 kmh &#8216;. What is the<br />
(a) Magnitude of average velocity, and<br />
(b) The average speed of the man over the interval of time<br />
(i) 0 to 30 min,<br />
(ii) 0 to 50 min,<br />
(iii) 0 to 40 min ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Distance of market from home = 2.5 km; Speed of man from home to market = 5 km/h<br />
Time taken by man to reach market, t =Speed of man, while returning from the market = 7.5 km/h<br />
∴ Time taken by man to return the home, t<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Speed }}=\frac{2.5}{5}=\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{~h}\) = 20 min<br />
Speed of man, while returning from the market = 7.5 km/h<br />
Time taken by man to return the home, t<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{2.5}{7.5}=\frac{1}{3} h\) = 20 min<br />
Total time of man returning to his home = 30 min + 20 min = 50 min</p>
<p>(i) Over the interval 0 to 30 min :<br />
During this time, man goes from home to market; therefore, displacement, s = 2.5 km<br />
Average velocity = \(\frac{\text { Displacement }}{\text { Time }}=\frac{2.5}{1 / 2}\) = 5km/h<br />
Average speed = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Time }}=\frac{2.5}{1 / 2}\) = 5 km/h<br />
Clearly, during motion along a straight line (without turn), the average speed and average velocity are equal in magnitude.</p>
<p>(ii) Over the interval 0 to 50 min :<br />
In 50 min the man goes from home to market and returns back to home.<br />
Net displacement = zero<br />
Average velocity = \(\frac{\text { Net displacement }}{\text { Total time }}=\frac{0}{50}\)<br />
Average speed = \(\frac{\text { Total distance }}{\text { Total time }}=\frac{2.5 \mathrm{~km}+2.5 \mathrm{~km}}{(50 \mathrm{~min})}+\frac{5 \mathrm{~km}}{50 \times \frac{1}{60} \mathrm{~h}}\) = 6 km/h.</p>
<p>(iii) Over the interval 0 to 40 min :<br />
During first 30 min man goes from home to market covering a distance of 2.5 km; in next 10 min the man is in path from market to home and covers a distance<br />
= (75 km/h) × \(\left(\frac{10}{60} h\right)\) = 1.25 km<br />
Displacement = 2.5 &#8211; 1.25 = 1.25 km<br />
Distance = 2.5 + 1.25 = 3.75 km<br />
Average velocity = \(\frac{\text { Displacement }}{\text { Time }}=\frac{1.25}{40 \times \frac{1}{60} \mathrm{~h}}\) = 1.875 km/h<br />
Average speed = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Time }}=\frac{3.75 \mathrm{~km}}{40 \times \frac{1}{60} \mathrm{~h}}\) = 5.625 km/h</p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
In problems 9 and 10, we have carefully distinguished between average speed and magnitude of average velocity. No such distinction is necessary when we consider instantaneous speed and magnitude of velocity. The instantaneous speed is always equal to the magnitude of instantaneous velocity. Why ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Instantaneous velocity, v = \(\frac{\mathrm{ds}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)<br />
Where ds is infinitesimal displacement in infinitesimal time interval.<br />
For infinitesimal interval of time there is no change in direction so the magnitude of displacement is equal to the length of the path; hence magnitude of instantaneous velocity = instantaneous speed.</p>
<p>Question 12.<br />
Look at the graphs (a) to (d) carefully and state, with reasons, which of these cannot possibly represent one-dimensional motion of a particle.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19990" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-13.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-13" width="451" height="119" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-13.png 451w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-13-300x79.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 451px) 100vw, 451px" /><br />
Answer:<br />
(a) It does not represent one-dimensional motion because according to this graph particle has two positions at the same time, which is impossible.</p>
<p>(b) It does not represent one dimensional motion because according to this graph the particle have equal positive and negative velocity at the same time, which is impossible.</p>
<p>(c) It cannot represent one-dimensional motion because according to graph speed is negative at certain instants, which is impossible (speed can never be negative).</p>
<p>(d) It cannot represent one-dimensional motion because according to this graph after a certain time the total path length begins to decrease with increase of time, which is impossible (total path length will always increase with increase of time).</p>
<p>Question 13.<br />
Fig. shows the x &#8211; t graph of one-dimensional motion of a particle. Is it correct to say from the graph that the particle moves in a straight line for t &lt; 0 and on a parabolic path for t &gt; 0 ? If not suggest a suitable physical context for this graph.<br />
Answer:<br />
For t &lt; 0, the particle is at rest; since, its position remains at x = 0. For t &gt; 0, x &#8211; t graph is parabolic, it is possible if motion of particle is uniformly accelerated since x = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\)at<sup>2</sup><br />
If u = 0, x = \(\frac{1}{2}\)at<sup>2</sup> or x ∝ t<sup>2</sup> (parabola)</p>
<p>Thus, it is not correct to say that the particle moves in a straight line for t &lt; 0, because during t &lt; 0, the particle does not move at all. However, for t &gt; 0, the trajectory is parabolic which is possible if particle moves along a straight line with uniform acceleration. It is again not correct to say that particle moves on parabolic path for t &gt; 0.</p>
<p>Physical context: The graph may represent the motion of a particle released from the top of a hill or tower.</p>
<p>Question 14.<br />
Suggest a suitable physical situation for each of the following graphs.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19991" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-14.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-14" width="575" height="267" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-14.png 575w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-14-300x139.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 575px) 100vw, 575px" /></p>
<p>Answer:<br />
(a) The given x &#8211; t graph shows that initially x = 0, then ball gains constant velocity which then reverses in direction and finally its velocity becomes zero.<br />
Physical situation : The ball is initially at rest on a smooth floor. It is kicked and given a constant velocity. Then, it strikes a wall, rebounds with reduced speed and strikes the opposite wall which stops it.</p>
<p>(b) The given velocity &#8211; time graph (v &#8211; t) shows that the velocity changes sign again and again with the passage of time and each time, it loses some speed.<br />
Physical situation : A ball thrown up with some initial velocity rebounding from the floor with reduced speed after each collision.</p>
<p>(c) The given a &#8211; t graph shows that initially acceleration of object is zero. It gains acceleration for a very short duration and immediately it is decelerated and again, its acceleration is zero.<br />
Physical situation: A cricket ball moving with a uniform speed is hit back with a bat for a very short duration.</p>
<p>Question 15.<br />
Fig. gives the x &#8211; t plot of a particle executing one-dimensional simple harmonic motion. Give the signs of position velocity and acceleration variables of the particle at t = 0.3 s, 1.2 s and &#8211; 1.2 s.<br />
Answer:<br />
Position is positive when particle is above t &#8211; axis and negative if particle is below t &#8211; axis. Velocity is positive, when x increases with increase of time and velocity is negative when x decreases with increase of time. Acceleration is positive when the slope of x &#8211; t curve increases and negative when slope of x &#8211; t curve decreases.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19992" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-15.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-15" width="298" height="147" /><br />
At 0.3 s, x is negative, v is negative and a is positive.<br />
At 1.2 s, x is positive, v is positive and a is negative.<br />
At &#8211; 1.2 s, x is negative, v is positive and a is positive.</p>
<p>Question 16.<br />
Fig. shows x &#8211; t plot of a particle in one-dimensional motion. Three different equal intervals of time are shown. In which interval is the average speed greatest, and in which is it the least ? Give the sign of average velocity for each interval.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19993" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-16.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-16" width="277" height="166" /><br />
Answer:<br />
The average speed inx-t graph is equal to the slope of line joining the initial and final points in that interval. From the graph the slope is greatest in interval 3 and least in interval 2. Therefore, average speed is greatest in interval 3 and average speed is least in interval 2. Slope is positive in intervals 1 and 2 and negative in interval 3, so the average velocity is positive during intervals 1 and 2 and negative during interval 3.</p>
<p>Question 17.<br />
Fig. shows a speed &#8211; time graph of a particle in motion along a constant direction. Three equal intervals of time are shown. In which intervals is the average acceleration greatest in magnitude ? In which interval is the average speed greatest ? Choosing the positive direction as the constant direction of motion, give the signs of v and a in the three intervals. What are the accelerations at the points A, B, C and D ?<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19994" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-17.png" alt="Motion in a Straight Line Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 2-17" width="304" height="266" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-17.png 304w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Motion-in-a-Straight-Line-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-2-17-300x263.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 304px) 100vw, 304px" /><br />
Answer:<br />
The average acceleration is given by the slope of line joining the two points onv-f graph for given interval of time. From the graph, out of three intervals the slope is maximum in interval (2) but it is negative. Therefore, the magnitude of average acceleration is greatest in interval 2.<br />
Average speed in a given interval = \(\frac{v_1+v_2}{2}\)<br />
From the graph, it is clear that the magnitudes of v<sub>1</sub> and v<sub>2</sub> are maximum in interval 3, so average speed is maximum in interval 3.</p>
<p>Signs of v: The speed v is always positive. Therefore, it is positive in all the three intervals.<br />
Signs of a: In interval T slope at v -1 graph is positive, therefore, acceleration is positive. In interval 2, the slope of v &#8211; t graph is negative, therefore, the acceleration is negative. In interval 3, the slope of v &#8211; t graph is positive, therefore, the acceleration is positive.</p>
<p>The instantaneous acceleration is equal to the slope of tangent on v &#8211; t graph at given instant. The tangents drawn on given v &#8211; t curve at points A, B, C and D are parallel to time axis, so slope is zero.<br />
Hence, acceleration at points A, B, C and D are zero.</p>
<p>Question 18.<br />
A police van moving on a highway with a speed of 30 km/h fires a bullet at a thief’s car speeding away in the same direction with a speed of 192 km/h, if the muzzle speed of the bullet is 150 m/s, with what speed does the bullet hit the thief’s car ?<br />
(Note : Obtain that speed which is relevant for damaging thief&#8217;s car ?)<br />
Answer:<br />
Let v<sub>p</sub> be the velocity of police van, v<sub>T</sub> be the velocity of thief’s car and u<sub>BP</sub> the muzzle velocity of bullet. Muzzle velocity means the velocity with respect to gun (or police van).<br />
Given, v<sub>P</sub> = 30 km/h = 30 × \(\frac{1100 \mathrm{~m}}{(60 \times 60) \mathrm{s}}=\frac{25}{3} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)<br />
v<sub>T</sub> = 192 km/h = 192 x \(\frac{1100 \mathrm{~m}}{(60 \times 60) \mathrm{s}}=\frac{160}{3} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)<br />
u<sub>B</sub> = 150 m/s<br />
All velocities are in same direction, therefore, if u<sub>B</sub> is the velocity of bullet with respect to earth, the velocity of bullet with respect to police van<br />
u<sub>BP</sub> = u<sub>B</sub> + v<sub>P</sub> = 150 + \(\frac{25}{3}=\frac{475}{3}\)m/s<br />
Relative velocity of bullet with respect to thief’s car<br />
u<sub>BT</sub> = u<sub>B</sub> &#8211; v<sub>T</sub> = \(\frac{475}{3}-\frac{160}{3}=\frac{315}{3}\)= 105 m/s.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
		<post-id xmlns="com-wordpress:feed-additions:1">19977</post-id>	</item>
		<item>
		<title>Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6</title>
		<link>https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-chemistry-chapter-6/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Srinivas]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sat, 17 Oct 2026 11:39:02 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[AP Inter 1st Year]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tsboardsolutions.in/?p=19934</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Regular practice with AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 6 Equilibrium Questions and Answers helps students stay prepared for examinations. AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry 6th Lesson Equilibrium Questions and Answers I. Multiple Choice Questions Question 1. The pH of a solution of hydrochloric acid is 4. The molarity of the solution is ... <a title="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" class="read-more" href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-chemistry-chapter-6/" aria-label="Read more about Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6">Read more</a>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Regular practice with <a href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-chemistry-study-material/">AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Study Material</a> Chapter 6 Equilibrium Questions and Answers helps students stay prepared for examinations.</p>
<h2>AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry 6th Lesson Equilibrium Questions and Answers</h2>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">I. Multiple Choice Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
The pH of a solution of hydrochloric acid is 4. The molarity of the solution is :<br />
1) 4.0 M<br />
2) 0.4 M<br />
3) 0.0001 M<br />
4) 0.04 M<br />
Answer:<br />
3) 0.0001 M<br />
If [H<sup>+</sup>] = 0.0001M (Molarity), then<br />
pH = -log<sub>10</sub> [H<sup>+</sup>] = -log 0.0001 = -log 10<sup>-4</sup> = 4.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
The strong conjugate base in the following is<br />
1) NO<sub>3</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
2) Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
3) SO<sub>4</sub><sup>2-</sup><br />
4) CH<sub>3</sub>COO<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
4) CH<sub>3</sub>COO<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
Strong conjugate base is CH<sub>3</sub>COO<sup>&#8211;</sup>, which is obtaining from weak acid.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
When NH<sub>4</sub>Cl is added to NH<sub>4</sub>OH solution the dissociation of ammonium hydroxide is reduced. It is due to<br />
1) common ion effect<br />
2) hydrolysis<br />
3) oxidation<br />
4) reduction<br />
Answer:<br />
1) common ion effect<br />
Due to common ion effect dissociation of NH<sub>4</sub>OH is reduced.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
The following reaction is at equilibrium.<br />
Fe<sup>3+</sup><sub>(aq)</sub> + SCN<sup>&#8211;</sup><sub>(aq)</sub> ⇌ [Fe(SCN)]<sup>2+</sup><sub>(aq)</sub><br />
In the above reaction, colour intensity of red colour can be increased by<br />
l) addition of oxalic acid which reacts with Fe<sup>3+</sup> ions.<br />
2) addition of Hg<sup>2+</sup> ions which reacts with SCN<sup>&#8211;</sup> ions.<br />
3) addition of KSCN.<br />
4) red colour intensity cannot be changed.<br />
Answer:<br />
3) addition of KSCN.<br />
\(\mathrm{Fe}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+3}+\mathrm{SCN}_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{-} \rightleftharpoons[\mathrm{Fe}(\mathrm{SCN})]_{(\mathrm{aq})}^{+2}\)<br />
on adding KSCN colour intensity of red colour increased.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
K<sub>sp</sub> of a sparingly soluble salt AB<sub>2</sub> is 4 × 10<sup>-12</sup>. The solubility of the salt is<br />
1) 2 × 10<sup>-6</sup>M<br />
2) 4 × 10<sup>-4</sup>M<br />
3) 1 × 10<sup>-12</sup><br />
4) 1 × 10<sup>-4</sup>M<br />
Solution:<br />
4) 1 × 10<sup>-4</sup>M<br />
For AB<sub>2</sub> type of salt, K<sub>sp</sub> = 4s<sup>3</sup> ⇒ s<sup>2</sup> = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{sp}}}{4}\)<br />
⇒ s = \(\sqrt[3]{\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{sp}}}{4}}=\sqrt[3]{\frac{4 \times 10^{-12}}{4}}\) = 10<sup>-4</sup>m</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
An aqueous solution of ammonia consists of<br />
1) H<sup>+</sup> only<br />
2) OH<sup>&#8211;</sup> only<br />
3) NH<sub>4</sub><sup>+</sup> only<br />
4) NH<sub>4</sub><sup>+</sup> and OH<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
Aqueous solution of ammonia contains NH<sub>4</sub><sup>+</sup> and OH<sup>&#8211;</sup> ions.<br />
NH<sub>4</sub>OH<sub>(aq)</sub> → NH<sub>4</sub><sup>+</sup> + OH<sup>&#8211;</sup></p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
The pH of a 0.05 M of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> solution is<br />
1) 0.05<br />
2) 1<br />
3) -1<br />
4) 1.3010<br />
Answer:<br />
2) 1<br />
For 0.05M of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub><br />
[H<sup>+</sup>] = 2 × 0.05(Di basic H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub>) = 0.1<br />
pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sup>+</sup>] = -log 0.1 = -log 10<sup>-1</sup> = 1</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
If the molar solubility of Zirconium phosphate Zr<sub>3</sub>(PO<sub>4</sub>)<sub>4</sub> is &#8216;S&#8217;. Solubility product K<sub>sp</sub> of Zirconium phosphate is<br />
1) 6912 (S)<sup>5</sup><br />
2) 6912 (S)<sup>7</sup><br />
3) 108 (S)<sup>7</sup><br />
4) 27 (S)<sup>5</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
2) 6912 (S)<sup>7</sup><br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19935" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-1.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 1" width="483" height="79" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-1.png 483w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-1-300x49.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 483px) 100vw, 483px" /></p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
For a reversible reaction, if the concentration of reactants is increased, the equilibrium constant of the reaction<br />
1) Increases<br />
2) Remains constant<br />
3) Decreases<br />
4) Depends on amount of reactant<br />
Answer:<br />
Equilibrium constant remains constant on increasing the concentration of reactants.</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
The pK<sub>a</sub> of acetic acid and pK<sub>b</sub> of ammonium hydroxide are 4.76 and 4.75 respectively.<br />
1) 6.098<br />
2) 7.005<br />
3) 8<br />
4) 5.0<br />
Answer:<br />
2) 7.005<br />
CH<sub>3</sub>COONH<sub>4</sub> is the salt formed by weak acid and weak base<br />
∴ pH = 7 + — (PK<sub>a</sub> &#8211; PK<sub>b</sub>) = 7 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) (4.76 &#8211; 4.78) = 7 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 0.01 = 7.005</p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
Which among the following salt solutions is basic in nature?<br />
1) Ammonium chloride<br />
2) Ammonium sulphate<br />
3) Ammonium nitrate<br />
4) Sodium acetate<br />
Answer:<br />
4) Sodium acetate<br />
Sodium acetate is the salt obtained from sodium hydroxide (Strong base) and acetic acid (weak acid). So aq. CH<sub>3</sub>COONa is in basic nature.</p>
<p>Question 12.<br />
Observe the following equilibrium at T (Kelvin)<br />
H<sub>2(g)</sub> + I<sub>2(g)</sub> ⇌ HI<sub>(g)</sub><br />
Which one of the following does not disturb the above equilibrium at constant volume?<br />
1) Addition of H<sub>2(g)</sub><br />
2) Removal of HI<sub>(g)</sub><br />
3) Addition of I<sub>2(g)</sub><br />
4) Addition of He<sub>(g)</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
4) Addition of He<sub>(g)</sub><br />
He is a Noble gas, it is chemically inert, so by adding inertgas the equilibrium does not disturbed.</p>
<p>Question 13.<br />
Solution of 0.1 N NH<sub>4</sub>OH and 0.1 N NH<sub>4</sub>Cl has pH 9.25. Find out pK<sub>b</sub> of NH<sub>4</sub>OH.<br />
1) 9.25<br />
2) 4.75<br />
3) 3.75<br />
4) 8.25<br />
Solution:<br />
2) 4.75<br />
P<sup>OH</sup> = PK<sub>b</sub> + log \(\frac{[\text { salt }]}{[\text { base }]}\) (basic buffer)<br />
pH + P<sup>OH</sup> = 14 ⇒ P<sup>OH</sup> = 14 &#8211; 9.25 = 4.75<br />
4.75 = PK<sub>b</sub> + log \(\frac{0.1}{0.1}\) ⇒ PK<sub>b</sub> = 4.75</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 14.<br />
For the following process, the expression for the K<sub>c</sub><br />
Ni<sub>(s)</sub> + 4CO<sub>(g)</sub> ⇌ Ni(CO)<sub>4(g)</sub><br />
1) K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{Ni}(\mathrm{CO})_4\right]^2}{[\mathrm{Ni}][\mathrm{CO}]^4}\)<br />
2) K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{Ni}(\mathrm{CO})_4\right]}{[\mathrm{CO}]^4}\)<br />
3) K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{[\mathrm{Ni}][\mathrm{CO}]^4}{\left[\mathrm{Ni}(\mathrm{CO})_4\right]^{2-}}\)<br />
4) K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{[\mathrm{CO}]^4}{\left[\mathrm{Ni}(\mathrm{CO})_4\right]^2}\)<br />
Answer:<br />
2) K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{Ni}(\mathrm{CO})_4\right]}{[\mathrm{CO}]^4}\)<br />
K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\text { Molar concentrations of products }(\mathrm{g})}{\text { Molar concentrations of reactants }(\mathrm{g})}\) ⇒ K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{Ni}(\mathrm{CO})_4\right]}{[\mathrm{CO}]^4}\)</p>
<p>Question 15.<br />
K<sub>1</sub> and K<sub>2</sub> are equilibrium constants for reactions (i) &amp; (ii). Then the relation between<br />
K<sub>1</sub> and K<sub>2</sub><br />
(i) H<sub>2(g)</sub> + I<sub>2(g)</sub> ⇌ 2HI(g)<br />
(ii) HI<sub>(g)</sub> ⇌ 1/2 H<sub>2(g)</sub> + 1/2 I<sub>2(g)</sub><br />
1) K<sub>1</sub> = K<sub>2</sub><sup>2</sup><br />
2) K<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~K}_2}\)<br />
3) K<sub>1</sub> = K<sub>2</sub><sup>0</sup><br />
4) K<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{1}{K_2^2}\)<br />
Solution:<br />
4) K<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{1}{K_2^2}\)<br />
H<sub>2(g)</sub> + I<sub>2(g)</sub> ⇌ 2HI(g) &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; (1)<br />
HI<sub>(g)</sub> ⇌ \(\frac{1}{2}\) H<sub>2(g)</sub> + \(\frac{1}{2}\) I<sub>2(g)</sub> &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; (2)<br />
K<sub>1</sub> = Equilibrium constant<br />
K<sub>2</sub> = Equilibrium constant<br />
K<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\mathrm{~K}_1}}\) [eq.(2) is reverse reaction and halved]<br />
Squaring on both sides, \(\mathrm{K}_2^2=\frac{1}{\mathrm{~K}_1}\)<br />
⇒ K<sub>1</sub> = \(\frac{1}{K_2^2}\)</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">II. Fill in the Blanks</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Acidity of BF<sub>3</sub> can be explained on the basis of __________ theory of acids and bases.<br />
Answer:<br />
Lewis acid base theory</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
The nature of aqueous solution of ammonium chloride (NH<sub>4</sub>Cl) is ______.<br />
Answer:<br />
NH<sub>4</sub>Cl is the salt of weak base (NH<sub>4</sub>OH) and strong acid (HCl).<br />
So aq. solution of NH<sub>4</sub>Cl is acidic.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
K<sub>p</sub> for the following equation: ______.<br />
CaCO<sub>3(s)</sub> ⇌ CaO<sub>(s)</sub> + CO<sub>2(g)</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
K<sub>p</sub> = P<sub>CO<sub>2</sub></sub></p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
The molarity of pure water is ______.<br />
Answer:<br />
Molarity of pure water is = 55.5.M<br />
M = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}}{\mathrm{GMW}} \times \frac{1000}{\mathrm{~V}(\mathrm{ml})}=\frac{1000}{18} \times \frac{1000}{1000}\) = 55.5 M</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
If K is in the range of ________ appreciable concentrations of both reactants and products are present.<br />
Answer:<br />
10<sup>-3</sup> to 10<sup>3</sup></p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">III. One Word Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
What is a bronsted base?<br />
Answer:<br />
The substance which can accept a proton is said to be bronsted base. Eg : Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup>, HCO<sub>3</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup>.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
What is Lewis acid?<br />
Answer:<br />
Lewis acid is the substance which can accept a pair of electrons and form a coordinate covalent bond. Eg : BF<sub>3</sub>, H<sup>+</sup>.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
What is the value of K<sub>w</sub> at 25°C? What are its units ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Ionic product of water K<sub>w</sub> = 1 × 10<sup>-14</sup> ; Units are mole<sup>2</sup>/lit<sup>2</sup>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
What is conjugate acid-base pair?<br />
Answer:<br />
An acid-base pair which differ by proton (H<sup>+</sup>) is called a conjugate acid base pair.<br />
Eg : HCl and Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup>.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Write the relation between Gibbs energy and equilibrium constant.<br />
Answer:<br />
∆G° : &#8211; 2.303 RT log K<sub>c</sub><br />
R = gas constant ; T= temperature ; K<sub>c</sub> = Equilibrium constant</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">IV. Very Short Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
State law of chemical equilibrium.<br />
Answer:<br />
The ratio of product of molar concentrations of products to the product of molar concentrations of reactants is a constant value. This constant is called equilibrium constant and this is called law of chemical equilibrium.<br />
Eg : aA + bB ⇌ cc + dD (or) Equilibrium constant (K<sub>c</sub>) = \(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]^{\mathrm{c}}[\mathrm{D}]^{\mathrm{d}}}{[\mathrm{~A}]^{\mathrm{a}}[\mathrm{~B}]^{\mathrm{b}}}\)<br />
Eg : H<sub>2(g)</sub> + I<sub>2(g)</sub> ⇌ (K<sub>c</sub>) = \(\frac{[\mathrm{HI}]^2}{\left[\mathrm{H}_2\right]\left[\mathrm{I}_2\right]}\)</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
What is homogeneous equilibrium? Give two examples.<br />
Answer:<br />
The equilibrium in which all the substances are present in the same phase is known as homogeneous equilibrium.<br />
Eg: N<sub>2</sub> (g) + 3H<sub>2</sub> (g) ⇌ 2NH<sub>3</sub> (g)<br />
CH<sub>3</sub>COOH (l) + C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>5</sub>OH (l) ⇌ CH<sub>3</sub>COO C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>5</sub> (l) + H<sub>2</sub>O (l)</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
What is heterogeneous equilibrium? Give two examples.<br />
Answer:<br />
The equilibrium in which the substances involved are present in different phases is called heterogeneous equilibrium.<br />
CaCO<sub>3</sub> (s) ⇌ CO(s) + CO<sub>2</sub> (g) and H<sub>2</sub>O (l) ⇌ H<sub>2</sub>O (g)</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
What is meant by dynamic equilibrium?<br />
Answer:<br />
A state in a reversible reaction where the forward and backward reaction continue to takes place with same rate is known as dynamic equilibrium.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Give two chemical equilibrium reactions for which K<sub>p</sub> &gt; K<sub>c</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
In order that K<sub>p</sub> &gt; K<sub>c</sub>, ∆n should be +ve<br />
1) PCl<sub>5</sub> (g) ⇌ PCl<sub>3</sub> (g) + Cl<sub>2</sub>(g); ∆n = (2 &#8211; 1)<br />
2) N<sub>2</sub>O<sub>4</sub>(g) ⇌ 2NO<sub>2</sub> (g) ; ∆n = (2 &#8211; 1)</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Give two chemical equilibrium reactions for which K<sub>p</sub> &lt;K<sub>c</sub>.<br />
Answer:<br />
In order that K<sub>p</sub> &lt;K<sub>c</sub>, ∆n should be -ve<br />
1) N<sub>2</sub> (g) + 3H<sub>2</sub> (g) ⇌ 2NH<sub>3</sub>(g) ; ∆n = (2 &#8211; 4)<br />
2) 2SO<sub>2</sub> (g) + O<sub>2</sub> (g) ⇌ 2SO<sub>3</sub>(g) ; ∆n = (2 &#8211; 3)</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Write the equations for the conversion of K<sub>c</sub> to K<sub>p</sub> for the following reaction<br />
CO<sub>(g)</sub> + H<sub>2</sub>O<sub>(g)</sub> ⇌ CO<sub>2(g)</sub> + H<sub>2(g)</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
CO<sub>(g)</sub> + H<sub>2</sub>O<sub>(g)</sub> ⇌ CO<sub>2(g)</sub> + H<sub>2(g)</sub><br />
K<sub>p</sub> = K<sub>c</sub> (RT)<sup>∆n</sup><br />
∆n = (1+1) &#8211; (1 + 1) = O<br />
K<sub>p</sub> = K<sub>p</sub> (RT)<br />
K<sub>p</sub> = K<sub>c</sub></p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
What are the factors which influence the chemical equilibrium?<br />
Answer:<br />
Molar concentration, temperature and pressure influence the equilibrium.</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
What is meant by ionic product of water?<br />
Answer:<br />
The product of concentration of H<sup>+</sup> and OH<sup>&#8211;</sup> ions in aqueous solution (or) in pure water is called ionic product of water.</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
Give two examples of salts whose aqueous solutions are acidic.<br />
Answer:<br />
NH<sub>4</sub>Cl (Ammonium Chloride); Cu<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> (copper sulphate) and (NH<sub>4</sub>)<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> (Ammonium sulphate) .<br />
These aqueous solutions are acidic in nature.</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">V. Short Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Derive the relation between K<sub>p</sub> and K<sub>c</sub> for the equilibrium reaction.<br />
N<sub>2(g)</sub> + 3H<sub>2(g)</sub> ⇌ 2NH<sub>3(g)</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
N<sub>2(g)</sub> + 3H<sub>2(g)</sub> ⇌ 2NH<sub>3(g)</sub><br />
K<sub>c</sub> = \(=\frac{\left[\mathrm{NH}_3\right]^2}{\left[\mathrm{~N}_2\right]\left[\mathrm{H}_2\right]^3}\) ; K<sub>p</sub> = \(\frac{P_{\mathrm{NH}_3}^2}{P_{\mathrm{N}_2} \times \mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{H}_2}^3}\)<br />
Partial pressures of P<sub>N<sub>2</sub></sub>, P<sub>H<sub>2</sub></sub> and P<sub>NH<sub>3</sub></sub> can be written as<br />
P<sub>N<sub>2</sub></sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{N}_2} \mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{~V}}\) = C<sub>N<sub>2</sub></sub>RT ; P<sub>H<sub>2</sub></sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{H}_2} \mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{~V}}\) = C<sub>H<sub>2</sub></sub>RT and P<sub>NH<sub>3</sub></sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{NH}_3} \mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{~V}}\) = C<sub>NH<sub>3</sub></sub><br />
Substituting these values in K<sub>p</sub> equation, K<sub>p</sub> = \(\frac{\left(\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{NH}_3}\right)^2}{\left(\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{N}_2}\right)\left(\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{H}_2}\right)^3}\) × [RT]<sup>-2</sup><br />
∴ K<sub>p</sub> = K<sub>c</sub>[RT]<sup>-2</sup> [∵ \(\frac{\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{NH}_3}^2}{\left(\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{N}_2}\right)\left(\mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{H}_2}\right)^3}\) = K<sub>c</sub>]</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
State Le Chateliers&#8217;s Principle. Discuss the application of Le Chatelier&#8217;s principle for the industrial synthesis of Ammonia by Haber&#8217;s process.<br />
Answer:<br />
Le Chatelier&#8217;s principle : If a chemical reaction at equilibrium is subjected to a change in temperature, pressure or concentration that govern the chemical equilibrium, the equilibrium position shifts in the direction in which the change is reduced or nullified.<br />
Application of Le Chatelier&#8217;s principle to by Haber&#8217;s process :<br />
N<sub>2(g)</sub> + 3H<sub>2(g)</sub> ⇌ 2NH<sub>3(g)</sub>; ∆H = -92 kJ</p>
<p>Effect of pressure :<br />
Increase of external pressure on the reaction at equilibrium favours the reaction in the direction in which the volume or the number of molecules decreases.<br />
In the above reaction of formation of ammonia forward reaction involves decrease in volume or number of molecules. So high pressure is favourable for the formation of ammonia. Hence ammonia is manufactured at 200 atm pressure.</p>
<p>Effect of temperature :<br />
In a reversible reaction, if the forward reaction is exothermic, the backward reaction will be endothermic.<br />
High temperature favours the endothermic reaction while low temperature favours the exothermic reaction.</p>
<ul>
<li>Since the formation of ammonia is exothermic reaction, low temperature is favourable for the manufacture of ammonia.</li>
<li>But at low temperature, the reaction is slow. So an optimum temperature of about 725 &#8211; 775 K is used.</li>
</ul>
<p>Effect of catalyst:</p>
<ul>
<li>To increase the rate of formation of ammonia iron powder mixed with molybdenum powder is used as catalyst.</li>
<li>Molybdenum acts as promoter to iron catalyst.</li>
</ul>
<p>Effect of concentration :</p>
<ul>
<li>Increase in concentrations of reactants increases the rate of forward reaction.</li>
<li>Removal of the products from reaction mixture decreases the rate of backward reaction.</li>
<li>So more ammonia can be obtained by increasing the concentration of N<sub>2</sub> and H<sub>2</sub> and removing the NH<sub>3</sub> formed at regular intervals.</li>
<li>Optimum conditions for the synthesis of ammonia are<br />
Pressure = 200 atm<br />
Temperature = 725 &#8211; 775 K<br />
Catalyst = Fe<br />
Promoter = Mo</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 3.<br />
State Le Chateliers&#8217;s Principle. Discuss the application of Le Chatelier&#8217;s principle for the manufacture of SO<sub>3</sub> by contact process.<br />
Answer:<br />
Le Chatelier&#8217;s principle : If a chemical reaction at equilibrium is subjected to a change in temperature, pressure or concentration that govern the chemical equilibrium, the equilibrium position shifts in the direction in which the change is reduced or nullified.</p>
<p>Application of Le Chatelier&#8217;s principle by contact process :<br />
2SO<sub>2(g)</sub> + O<sub>2(g)</sub> ⇌ 2SO<sub>3(g)</sub> + Heat; ∆H = -189 kJ</p>
<p>Effect of pressure :</p>
<ul>
<li>Increase of external pressure on the reaction at equilibrium favours the reaction in the direction in which the volume or the number of molecules decreases.</li>
<li>Formation of SO<sub>3</sub> in the above reaction involves decrease in volume.</li>
<li>According to Le Chatelier&#8217;s principle high pressure is favourable for the formation of SO<sub>3</sub>.</li>
<li>So, SO<sub>3</sub> is prepared at a pressure of 1.5 to 1.7 atmospheres.</li>
</ul>
<p>Effect of temperature :</p>
<ul>
<li>In a reversible reaction if the forward reaction is exothermic, the backward reaction is endothermic.</li>
<li>High temperatures are favourable for the endothermic reaction, while the low temperatures are favourable for the exothermic reactions.</li>
<li>Since the formation of SO<sub>3</sub> is exothermic reaction, low temperatures are favourable. So, SO<sub>3</sub> is prepared at a temperature of about 673 K.<br />
Effect of catalyst: To increase the rate of formation of SO<sub>3</sub> catalyst like V<sub>2</sub>O<sub>5</sub> or platinised asbestos is used.</li>
</ul>
<p>Effect of concentration :</p>
<ul>
<li>Increase in the concentration of the reactants, increase the rate of forward reaction.</li>
<li>Removal of products from reaction mixture decreases the rate of backward reaction.</li>
<li>So more SO<sub>3</sub> can be obtained by increasing the concentrations of SO<sub>2</sub> and O<sub>2</sub> and by removing, the SO<sub>3</sub> is formed at regular intervals.<br />
Optimum conditions for the synthesis of ammonia are<br />
Pressure : 1.5 &#8211; 1.7 atmospheres Temperature : 673 K<br />
Catalyst: V<sub>2</sub>O<sub>5</sub> (Vanadium pentoxide) or Platinised asbestos.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
The species H<sub>2</sub>O, HCO<sub>3</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup>, HSO<sub>4</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup> and NH<sub>3</sub> can act as both bronsted acids and bases. Give the corresponding conjugate acid and base for each of them.<br />
Answer:</p>
<table border="2">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="84"><strong>Substance</strong></td>
<td width="133"><strong>Conjugate Acid</strong></td>
<td width="136"><strong>Conjugate base</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="84">H<sub>2</sub>O</td>
<td width="133">H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup></td>
<td width="136">OH<sup>&#8211;</sup></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="84">HCO<sub>3</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup></td>
<td width="133">H<sub>2</sub>CO<sub>3</sub></td>
<td width="136">CO<sub>3</sub><sup>-2</sup></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="84">HSO<sub>4</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup></td>
<td width="133">H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub></td>
<td width="136">SO<sub>4</sub><sup>2</sup></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="84">NH<sub>3</sub></td>
<td width="133">NH<sub>4</sub><sup>+</sup></td>
<td width="136">NH<sub>2</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Write notes on<br />
(i) Common ion effect.<br />
(ii) Solubility product<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Common ion Effect : The decrease in the dissociation of the aq. solution of weak electrolyte by adding another strong electrolyte having one common ion is called common ion effect. Eg : To the saturated solution of AgCl, electrolyte NaCl is added to decrease the dissociation.<br />
ii) Solubility Product (K<sub>sp</sub>) : The solubility product is the product of molar equilibrium concentrations of cation and anion at a particular temperature in a saturated solution of sparingly soluble salt.<br />
Applying the concept at equilibrium, A<sub>x</sub>B<sub>y</sub>(s) ⇌ xA<sup>y+</sup> + yB<sup>x-</sup><br />
Applying the concept at equilibrium, K<sub>sp</sub> = [A<sup>y+</sup>]<sup>x</sup> [B<sup>x-</sup>]<sup>y</sup><br />
AgCl ⇌ Ag<sup>+</sup> + Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
K<sub>sp</sub> = [Ag<sup>+</sup>] [Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup>]<br />
⇒ K<sub>sp</sub> = s × s [where s is the solubility]<br />
⇒ K<sub>sp</sub> = s<sup>2</sup><br />
Solubility s = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{sp}}}\)</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Explain the concept of Bronsted-Lowry acids and bases. Illustrate with suitable examples.<br />
Answer:<br />
Bronsted &#8211; Lowry theory : Any substance that can lose a proton or protons is an acid.<br />
Eg : HCl, H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub>, H<sub>3</sub>PO<sub>4</sub>, CH<sub>3</sub>COOH.</p>
<ul>
<li>Any substance that can gain a proton or protons is a base. Eg : NH<sub>3</sub>, H<sub>2</sub>O, OH<sup>&#8211;</sup> etc.</li>
<li>When an acid react with base neutralization takes place. As per Bronsted &#8211; Lowry theory proton transfer from an acid to a base is called neutralization.<br />
Eg : HCl + H<sub>2</sub>O ⇌ H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup> + Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup></li>
<li>The above reaction is reversible. In this reaction,
<ol>
<li>HCl donates proton to water. So it is a bronsted acid.</li>
<li>H<sub>2</sub>O gains the proton. So it is a bronsted base.</li>
<li>H<sub>2</sub>O<sup>+</sup> donates a proton to Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup>. So it is bronsted acid.</li>
<li>Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup> can gain a proton. So it is a bronsted base.</li>
</ol>
</li>
<li>The acid base pair which differ by a single proton is said to be conjugate acid-base pair.</li>
<li>In the above reaction HCl &amp; Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup> and H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup> and H<sub>2</sub>O are conjugate acid-base pairs.</li>
<li>Every bronsted acid has its conjugate base and every bronsted base has a conjugate protonic acid.</li>
<li>According to bronsted &#8211; Lowry theory greater the tendency to donate proton stronger is the acid. Higher the tendency of the base to accept protons, stronger is the base.</li>
<li>In the above reaction, HCl gives proton easily than H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>. So HCl is stronger acid than H20. H20 accepts the proton more easily than Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup>. So H<sub>2</sub>O is a stronger base than NH<sub>3</sub></li>
<li>In all acid &#8211; base reactions, the reaction takes place in the direction of formation of weaker acid and a weaker base.</li>
<li>A stronger acid has a weaker conjugate base and a stronger base has a weaker conjugate acid.</li>
</ul>
<p>Advantages of Bronsted &#8211; Lowry theory :</p>
<ul>
<li>This theory explains the behaviour of acids and bases in both aqueous and non-aqueous solvents.</li>
<li>It explains the behaviour of NH<sub>3</sub>, CaO, etc. as bases and CO<sub>2</sub>, SO<sub>2</sub>, etc. as acids.</li>
</ul>
<p>Drawbacks of Bronsted &#8211; Lowry theory :</p>
<ul>
<li>Proton donation or acceptance happens only in the presence of other substances.</li>
<li>It could not explain the behaviour of electron deficient molecules like AlCl<sub>3</sub>, BCl<sub>3</sub>, etc. as acids.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Explain Lewis acids and bases with suitable examples. Classify the following species into Lewis acids and Lewis bases.<br />
a) OH<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
b) F<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
c) H<sup>+</sup><br />
d) BCl<sub>3</sub>.<br />
Answer:<br />
Lewis acid : The substance which can accept an electron pair to form a coordinate covalent bond is called Lewis acid.<br />
Types of Lewis acids :<br />
1) All +vely charged metal ions or cations act as Lewis acids.<br />
Eg : Ag<sup>+</sup>, CO<sup>+3</sup>, Cu<sup>+2</sup>, Fe<sup>+3</sup>, etc.<br />
2) Electron deficient compounds whose central atom has an incomplete octet, possessing an empty orbital acts as Lewis acid. Eg : BF<sub>3</sub>, BCl<sub>3</sub>, AlCl<sub>3</sub>, FeCl<sub>3</sub>.<br />
3) Compounds in which central atom has vacant&#8217;d&#8217; orbitals and which can expand its octet. Eg : SiF<sub>4</sub>, SnCl<sub>4</sub>, SF<sub>4</sub>, TeF<sub>4</sub>, FeCl<sub>3</sub>.<br />
4) Molecules having multiple bonds between atoms of different electronegativities.<br />
Eg : CO<sub>2</sub>, SO<sub>2</sub>, SO<sub>3</sub>, NO<sub>2</sub>, Cl<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub>, P<sub>4</sub>O<sub>10</sub>.<br />
5) Elements with an electron sextet. Eg : S, O.</p>
<p>Lewis base : The substance which donates electron pair to form a coordinate covalent bond is called Lewis base.<br />
Types of Lewis bases :<br />
1) All anions will act as Lewis bases. Eg : Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup>, OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>, CN<sup>&#8211;</sup>, NH<sub>2</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup>, F<sup>&#8211;</sup>, SCN<sup>&#8211;</sup>.<br />
2) Molecules with one or two lone pairs on the central atom.<br />
Eg : H<sub>2</sub>O, NH<sub>3</sub>, R &#8211; OH, R &#8211; NH<sub>2</sub>,<br />
R-O-R, C<sub>5</sub>H<sub>5</sub>N.<br />
3) Molecules with multiple bonds. Eg : CO, NO, HC ☰ CH, H<sub>2</sub>C ☰ CH<sub>2</sub><br />
a) OH<sup>&#8211;</sup> is Lewis base, b) F<sup>&#8211;</sup> is Lewis base, c) H<sup>+</sup> is Lewis acid, d) BCl<sub>3</sub> is Lewis acid.</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Calculate the pH of<br />
a. 10<sup>-3</sup> M of HCl<br />
b. 10<sup>-3</sup> M of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> [log 2 = 0.3010]<br />
Solution:<br />
a) 10<sup>-3</sup>M of HCl [H<sup>+</sup>] = 10<sup>-3</sup>M<br />
pH = &#8211; log [H<sup>+</sup>] = &#8211; Log 10<sup>-3</sup> = 3 log 10 = 3</p>
<p>b) 10<sup>-3</sup> M of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub><br />
[H<sup>+</sup>] = 2 × 10<sup>-3</sup><br />
pH = -log [H<sup>+</sup>] = -log 2 × 10<sup>-3</sup> = &#8211; log 2 &#8211; log 10<sup>-3</sup><br />
= &#8211; log 2 + 3 log 10 = -log 2 + 3<br />
= 3 &#8211; log 2<br />
= 3 &#8211; 0.3010 = 2.6990</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
Calculate the pH for<br />
a. 0.001 M of NaOH<br />
b. 0.01 M of Ca(OH)<sub>2</sub><br />
Solution:<br />
a) 0.001 M of NaOH<br />
[OH<sup>+</sup>] = 0.001M<br />
P<sup>OH</sup> = -log [OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = &#8211; log 10<sup>-3</sup> = 3 log 10 = 3<br />
pH + POH =14<br />
pH = 14 &#8211; 3 = 11.<br />
∴ pH = 11</p>
<p>b) 0.01 M of Ca(OH)<sub>2</sub><br />
[OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = 0.01 × 2 = 2 × 10<sup>-2</sup><br />
P<sup>OH</sup> = &#8211; log [OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>]<br />
= &#8211; log 2 × 10<sup>-2</sup><br />
= &#8211; log 2 &#8211; log 10<sup>-2</sup> = &#8211; log2 + 2 log 10<br />
= 2 &#8211; log2 = 2 &#8211; 0.3010 = 1.6990<br />
pH + P<sup>OH</sup> = 14<br />
pH = 14 &#8211; 1.699 = 12.3010</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
The pH of 0.1M solution of weak mono protic acid is 4.0. Calculate its [H<sup>+</sup>] and K<sub>a</sub>.<br />
Solution:<br />
HA ⇌ H<sup>+</sup> + A<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
pH = 4 ; [H<sup>+</sup>] = 10<sup>-4</sup><br />
K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{c \alpha^2}{1-\alpha}=\frac{(0.1)\left(10^{-4}\right)^2}{1}\) [Neglecting α in the denominator]<br />
K<sub>a</sub> = 10<sup>-7</sup></p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
One litre of buffer solution contains 0.1 mole of acetic acid and 1 mole of sodium acetate. Find its pH if pK<sub>a</sub> of CH<sub>3</sub>COOH is 4.8.<br />
Solution:<br />
Henderson&#8217;s Equation, pH = PK<sub>a</sub> + log \(\frac{[\text { Salt }]}{[\text { Acid }]}\)<br />
Given [Salt] = 1M; [Acid] = 0.1M; PK<sub>a</sub> = 4.8<br />
= 4.8 + log \(\frac{1}{0.1}\)<br />
= 4.8 + log 10<br />
= 4.8 +1 = 5.8</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">VI. Long Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
What are equilibrium processes? Explain equilibrium in Physical and Chemical processes with examples.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>In a reversible process, a state will be attained such that the rate of forward reaction is equal to the rate of backward reaction.</li>
<li>Such a state is known as equilibrium state.</li>
<li>Equilibrium processes are of two types. They are</li>
</ul>
<p>1. Physical equilibrium process : In such a process, equilibrium occurs in a phase transformation process.<br />
Ex: Solid ⇌ Liquid<br />
Solid ⇌ Vapour<br />
Vapour ⇌ Liquid</p>
<p>2. Chemical equilibrium process: If there exists an equilibrium in between reactants and products, such reactions are said to be chemical equilibrium process.<br />
1) N<sub>2</sub>(g) + 3H<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2 NH<sub>3</sub>(g)<br />
2) 2SO<sub>2</sub>(g) + O<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2SO<sub>3</sub>(g)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
What is meant by dynamic equilibrium? Explain with suitable examples.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>In a reversible process, a state will be attained such that the rate of forward reaction is equal to the rate of backward reaction. Such a state is known as equilibrium state.</li>
<li>At equilibrium we find no change in the concentration of either reactants (or) products then we may feel that the reaction has stopped. But actually the reaction will be going on. Such a state of reaction is called dynamic equilibrium.</li>
</ul>
<p>Equilibrium processes are of two types. They are :<br />
1. Physical equilibrium process : In such a process, equilibrium occurs in a phase transformation process.<br />
Ex : Solid ⇌ liquid<br />
Solid ⇌ vapour<br />
Vapour ⇌ liquid</p>
<p>2. Chemical equilibrium process: If there exists an equilibrium in between reactants and products, such reactions are said to be chemical equilibrium process.<br />
1) N<sub>2</sub>(g) + 3H<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2 NH<sub>3</sub>(g)<br />
2) 2SO<sub>2</sub>(g) + O<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2SO<sub>3</sub>(g)</p>
<p>The forward and backward reactions of a reversible reaction continuously takes place with equal rates simultaneously at the equilibrium stage also. Hence the equilibrium is called dynamic equilibrium.</p>
<p>At this stage, the reaction appears to be stopped.</p>
<p>All chemical equilibrium processes are dynamic equilibriums in nature.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
What are the important features of equilibrium constant? Discuss any two applications of equilibrium constant.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>The equilibrium constant has a definite value for every chemical reaction at a particular temperature. The value of equilibrium constant is independent of initial concentrations of reacting species.</li>
<li>The value of equilibrium constant K changes with change in temperature.</li>
<li>For a reversible reaction, the equilibrium constant for the backward reaction is inverse of the equilibrium constant for the forward reaction.</li>
<li>The equilibrium constant is independent of the presence of catalyst.</li>
<li>The equilibrium constant is expressed in terms of concentration, it has different units for different reactions.</li>
<li>When addition of two equilibria leads to another equilibrium then the product of their equilibrium constants gives the equilibrium constant of the resultant equilibrium.<br />
Eg : N<sub>2</sub> + O<sub>2</sub> ⇌ 2NO ; K<sub>1</sub><br />
2NO + O<sub>2</sub> + O<sub>2</sub> ⇌ 2NO<sub>2</sub>; K<sub>2</sub><br />
N<sub>2</sub> + 2O<sub>2</sub> ⇌ 2NO<sub>2</sub>; K<sub>3</sub><br />
K = K<sub>1</sub> × K<sub>2</sub> × K<sub>3</sub></li>
</ul>
<p>Applications of equilibrium constant:<br />
i) Predicting of extent of reaction: The magnitude of equilibrium constant tells us about the extent to which the reactants are converted into the products before the equilibrium is attained.</p>
<p>ii) Predicting the direction of the reaction : From the knowledge of equilibrium con¬stant it is possible to predict the direction in which the net reaction is taking place at a given concentrations or partial pressures of reactants and products.</p>
<ul>
<li>If Q<sub>c</sub> &gt; K<sub>c</sub> the reaction taking place in backward direction is more.</li>
<li>If Q<sub>c</sub> &lt; K<sub>c</sub> the reaction taking place in forward direction is more.</li>
<li>If Q<sub>c</sub> = K<sub>c</sub> the reaction is at equilibrium. No reaction taking place.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 4.<br />
What is Le Chatelier&#8217;s principle? Discuss briefly the factors which can influence the equilibrium.<br />
Answer:<br />
Le Chatelier&#8217;s principle : If a chemical reaction at equilibrium is subjected to a change in temperature, pressure or concentration that govern the chemical equilibrium, the equilibrium position shifts in the direction in which the change is reduced or nullified.<br />
1) Effect of pressure : ,</p>
<ul>
<li>Pressure is inversely proportional to volume.</li>
<li>When pressure is increased the equilibrium shifts in such a direction where the decrease in volume is observed.</li>
<li>Similarly when pressure is decreased, the equilibrium shifts in such a direction where increase in volume is observed. This is applicable exclusively for gaseous reactions.</li>
</ul>
<p>2) Effect of temperature :</p>
<ul>
<li>When temperature is increased, equilibrium shift in such a direction where the temperature change is nullified or equilibrium shifts towards the direction in which temperature is decreased or heat is absorbed. That is endothermic reaction is favoured.</li>
<li>When temperature is decreased equilibrium shifts in such a direction where temperature is increased or heat is liberated. That is exothermic reaction is favoured.</li>
</ul>
<p>3) Effect of concentration :</p>
<ul>
<li>Increase in concentration of the reactants favours forward reaction and decrease in concentration of the reactants favours the backward reaction.</li>
<li>When products are added to the equilibrium reaction the concentration of the products increases and reaction proceeds in backward direction.</li>
<li>Removal of products leads to decrease in concentration of the products and leads to forward reaction.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Describe the effect of:<br />
a) addition of H<sub>2</sub><br />
b) addition of CH<sub>3</sub>OH<br />
c) removal of CO<br />
d) removal of CH<sub>3</sub>OH on the equilibrium of the reaction 2H<sub>2</sub> (g) + CO (g) ⇌ CH<sub>3</sub>OH (g)<br />
Answer:<br />
a) According to Le Chatelier&#8217;s principle increase in the concentration of reactant increase the forward reaction.<br />
So the addition of H<sub>2</sub> results in the formation of more amount of CH<sub>3</sub>OH.</p>
<p>b) According to Le Chatelier&#8217;s principle increase in the concentration of the product, shift the equilibrium in the backward direction. So the addition of CH<sub>3</sub>OH (product) results in the decrease in concentration and CH<sub>3</sub>OH and increase in the concentration of H<sub>2</sub> and CO.</p>
<p>c) According to Le Chatelier&#8217;s principle the decrease in the concentration of reactant equilibrium shift in the backward direction. So removal of CO (reactant) the equilibrium shift in the backward direction. So formation of CH<sub>3</sub>OH decreases.</p>
<p>d) According to Le Chatelier&#8217;s principle the decrease in concentration of product shifts the equilibrium in the forward direction. So the removal of CH<sub>3</sub>OH (product) shift the equilibrium in the forward direction. Thus more amount of CH<sub>3</sub>OH is formed.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
What is degree of ionization in respect of weak acids and weak bases? Derive the relationship between degree of ionization (α) and ionization constant (K<sub>a</sub>) for the weak acid HX.<br />
Answer:<br />
Degree of ionization : It can be defined as the fraction of acid (a) base that undergoes ionization per one mole of acid or base. For strong acids or bases degree of ionization (a) is equal to &#8216;1&#8217;.<br />
Let&#8217;s consider a weak acid HX with concentration &#8216;c&#8217;. It undergoes partial ionization.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19936" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-2.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 2" width="466" height="95" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-2.png 466w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-2-300x61.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 466px) 100vw, 466px" /><br />
where α is degree of ionization<br />
Ionization constant K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{X}^{-}\right]}{[\mathrm{HX}]}\)<br />
⇒ K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{(\mathrm{c} \alpha)(\mathrm{c} \alpha)}{\mathrm{c}(1-\alpha)}\) for weak acids α &lt; &lt; 1, so α is negligible.<br />
⇒ K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{c^2 \alpha^2}{c}\) ⇒ α = \(\sqrt{\frac{K_a}{c}}\)</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Define pH. What is buffer solution? Derive Henderson &#8211; Hasselbalch equation for calculating the pH of an acid buffer solution.<br />
Answer:<br />
The pH of a solution may be defined as negative logarithm of the activity of hydrogen ion [H<sup>+</sup>]<br />
pH = &#8211; log [H<sup>+</sup>]<br />
Buffer solution : A buffer solution is the solution which can resist the change in pH on<br />
addition of small amount of acid or base. The ability of a solution to resist change in pH on<br />
addition of small amount of acid or base is called buffer solution.<br />
Henderson &#8211; Hasselbalch equation :<br />
HA + H<sub>2</sub> ⇌ H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup> + A<sup>&#8211;</sup> Partial ionisation.<br />
NaA → Na<sup>+</sup> + A<sup>&#8211;</sup> Complete ionisation<br />
K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}_3 \mathrm{O}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{A}^{-}\right]}{[\mathrm{HA}]}\)<br />
Since HA is weakly dissociated, the conc. HA ion solution can be taken equal to the initial conc. of the acid.<br />
Since NaA is completely dissociated, conc. of A- can be taken equal to the conc. of NaA (salt)<br />
K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}_3 \mathrm{O}^{+}\right][\text {Salt }]}{[\text { Acid }]}\)<br />
H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup> = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{a}} \text { [Acid] }}{[\text { Salt }]}\)<br />
-log [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = &#8211; logK<sub>a</sub> &#8211; log\(\frac{\text { [Acid] }}{[\text { Salt }]}\)<br />
pH = pKa + log \(\frac{\text { [Salt] }}{[\text { Acid }]}\)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Write notes on<br />
(i) Common ion effect.<br />
(ii) The relation between K<sub>sp</sub> and solubility (S) of a sparingly soluble salt BaSO<sub>4</sub>.<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Common ion effect: The solubility of an electrolyte in water decreases by the addition of another electrolyte which has one ion common with the electrolyte.</p>
<ul>
<li>For example the solubility of NaCl decreases on addition of HCl to the solution of NaCl in water which is known as salting out of water.</li>
<li>Acetic acid is weak acid and it undergoes partial ionization as follows.<br />
CH<sub>3</sub>COOH ⇌ CH<sub>3</sub>COO<sup>&#8211;</sup> + H<sup>+</sup></li>
<li>In case of such electrolytes there exists an equilibrium in between ions and molecular form. In such a condition, the addition of electrolyte with common ions shifts the equilibrium in backward direction which causes the decrease in solubility.</li>
</ul>
<p>Significance :<br />
1) Common ion effect is an important phenomenon in qualitative analysis.<br />
2) The common ion effect principle is also used in controlling the H<sup>+</sup> ion concentration in buffer solution.</p>
<p>ii) The relation between K and solubility (S) of a sparingly soluble salt BaSO<sub>4</sub> : The sparingly soluble salt like BaSO<sub>4</sub>, when added to water form saturated solution. There exists an equilibrium between undissolved solid and the ions in saturated solution.<br />
BaSO<sub>4</sub> ⇌ Ba<sup>2+</sup> + SO<sub>4</sub><sup>2-</sup><br />
The equilibrium constant, K = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{Ba}^{2+}\right]\left[\mathrm{SO}_4^{2-}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{BaSO}_4\right]}\)<br />
K = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{Ba}^{2+}\right]\left[\mathrm{SO}_4^{2-}\right]}{\mathrm{K}_1}\) (∴ Activity of solid BaSO<sub>4</sub> is constant)</p>
<p>K × K<sub>1</sub> = [Ba<sup>2+</sup>][SO<sup>2-</sup>] or K<sub>sp</sub> = [Ba<sup>2+</sup>][SO<sub>4</sub><sup>2-</sup>]<br />
The new constant K<sub>sp</sub> is called solubility product.</p>
<p>If S moles lit<sup>-1</sup> is the solubility of BaSO<sub>4</sub>.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19937" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-3.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 3" width="246" height="60" /><br />
K<sub>sp</sub> = s × s = s<sup>2</sup><br />
or solubility of BaSO<sub>4</sub> is s = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{sp}}}\) .</p>
<h3>Equilibrium Class 11 NCERT Solutions</h3>
<p>Question 1.<br />
A liquid is in equilibrium with its vapour in a sealed container at a fixed temperature.<br />
The volume of the container is suddenly increased.<br />
i) What is the initial effect of the change on vapour pressure ?<br />
ii) How do rates of evaporation and condensation change initially ?<br />
iii) What happens when equilibrium is restored finally and what will be the final vapour pressure ?<br />
Answer:<br />
i) The vapour pressure will decrease due to increase in volume.<br />
ii) Since, the temperature is fixed, the rate of evaporation will remain constant. However, the rate of condensation will be low initially due to lesser number of molecules per unit volume in the vapour phase.<br />
iii) When equilibrium is restored, the final vapour pressure will be the same as original vapour pressure because at equilibrium the rates of evaporation and condensation are equal.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
W hat is K<sub>c</sub> for the following equilibrium when the equilibrium concentration of each substance is : [SO<sub>2</sub>] = 0.60 M, [O<sub>2</sub>] = 0.82 M and [SO<sub>3</sub>] = 1.90 M ?<br />
2SO<sub>2</sub>(g) + O<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2SO<sub>3</sub>(g)<br />
Answer:<br />
K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{SO}_3(\mathrm{~g})\right]^2}{\left[\mathrm{SO}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]^2\left[\mathrm{O}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]}=\frac{(1.90)^2}{(0.60)^2 \times(0.82)}\) = 12.229 L mol<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
At a certain temperature and a total pressure of 10<sup>5</sup> Pa, iodine vapour contains 40% by volume of I atoms.<br />
I<sub>2(g)</sub> ⇌ 2I<sub>(g)</sub><br />
Calculate K<sub>p</sub>, for the equilibrium.<br />
Answer:<br />
Partial pressure of I atom (pI<sub>1</sub>) = \(\frac{40}{100}\) × 10<sup>5</sup><br />
Partial pressure of I<sub>2</sub> (pI<sub>2</sub>) = \(\frac{(100-40)}{100}\) × 10<sup>5</sup><br />
∴ K<sub>p</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{I}}^2}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{I}_2}}=\frac{\left(4.0 \times 10^4\right)^2}{6.0 \times 10^4}\)<br />
= 2.67 × 10<sup>4</sup> Pa</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Write the expression for the equilibrium constant, K<sub>c</sub> for each of the following reactions.<br />
i) 2NOCl(g) ⇌ 2NO(g) + Cl<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
ii) 2Cu(NO<sub>3</sub>)<sub>2</sub>(s) ⇌ 2Cu0(s) + 4NO<sub>2</sub>(g) + O<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
iii) CH<sub>3</sub>COOC<sub>2</sub>H<sub>5</sub>(aq) + H<sub>2</sub>O(l) ⇌ CH<sub>3</sub>COOH(aq) + C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>5</sub>OH(aq)<br />
iv) Fe<sup>3+</sup>(aq) + 3OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>(aq) ⇌ Fe(OH)<sub>3</sub>(s)<br />
v) I<sub>2</sub>(s) + 5F<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2IF<sub>5</sub>(g)<br />
Answer:<br />
i) K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{[\mathrm{NO}(\mathrm{~g})]^2\left[\mathrm{Cl}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]}{[\mathrm{NOCl}(\mathrm{~g})]^2}\)<br />
ii) K<sub>c</sub> = [NO<sub>2</sub>(g)]<sup>4</sup>[O<sub>2</sub>(g)] {∵ [CuO(s) = [Cu(NO<sub>3</sub>)<sub>2</sub>(s)] = 1}<br />
iii) K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOH}(\mathrm{aq})\right]\left[\mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_5 \mathrm{OH}(\mathrm{aq})\right]}{\left[\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOC}_2 \mathrm{H}_5(\mathrm{aq})\right]}\) (∵ [H<sub>2</sub>O(l)] = 1)<br />
iv) K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{1}{\left[\mathrm{Fe}^{3+}(\mathrm{aq})\right]\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}(\mathrm{aq})\right]^3}\) (∵ [Fe(OH)<sub>3</sub>(s)] = 1)<br />
v) K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{IF}_5\right]^2}{\left[\mathrm{~F}_2\right]^5}\) (∵ [I<sub>2</sub>(s) = 1)</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Find out the value of Kc for each of the following equilibria from the value of K<sub>p</sub>.<br />
i) 2NOCl(g) ⇌ 2NO(g) + Cl<sub>2</sub>(g) ;K<sub>p</sub> = 1.8 × 10<sup>-2</sup> at 500 K<br />
ii) CaCO<sub>3</sub>(s) ⇌ CaO(s) + CO<sub>2</sub>(g); K<sub>p</sub> = 167 at 1073 K<br />
Answer:<br />
i) For the reaction, 2NOCl(g) ⇌ 2NO(g) + Cl<sub>2</sub>(g) ; ∆n = (2 + 1) &#8211; 2 = 1<br />
K<sub>p</sub> = K<sub>c</sub> (RT)<sup>∆n</sup><br />
∴ K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{p}}}{(\mathrm{RT})^{\Delta \mathrm{n}}}=\frac{1.8 \times 10^{-2}}{(0.0831 \times 500)}\) = 4.33 × 10<sup>-4</sup> (∵ R = 0.0831 L bar mol<sup>-1</sup>K<sup>-1</sup>)</p>
<p>ii) For the reaction, CaCO<sub>3</sub>(s) ⇌ CaO(s) + CO<sub>2</sub>(g) ; ∆n = 1 &#8211; 0 = 1<br />
∵ K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{p}}}{(\mathrm{RT})^{\mathrm{An}}}=\frac{167}{(0.0831 \times 1073)}\) = 1.873</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
For the following equilibrium, K<sub>c</sub> = 6.3 × 10<sup>14</sup> at 1000 K.<br />
NO(g) + O<sub>3</sub>(g) ⇌ NO<sub>2</sub>(g) + O<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
Both the forward and reverse reactions in the equilibrium are elementary bimolecular reactions. What is K<sub>c</sub>, for the reverse reactions ?<br />
Answer:<br />
K<sub>c(reverse)</sub> = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{c}(\text { forward })}}\) = \(\frac{1}{3.3 \times 10^{14}}\) = 1.59 × 10<sup>-15</sup></p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Explain why pure liquids and solids can be ignored while writing the equilibrium constant expression ?<br />
Answer:<br />
[Pure solid] or [Pure liquid] = \(\frac{\text { No.of moles }}{\text { Volume (in } \mathrm{L})}\) = \(\frac{\text { Mass } / \text { molecular mass }}{\text { Volume }}\)<br />
= \(\frac{\text { Density }}{\text { Molecular mass }}\) = Constant<br />
(The density of a pure solid or a pure liquid is constant at constant temperature)</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Reaction between N<sub>2</sub> and O<sub>2</sub> takes place as follows.<br />
2N<sub>2</sub>(g) + O<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2N<sub>2</sub>O(g)<br />
If a mixture of 0.482 mol of N<sub>2</sub> and 0.933 mol of O<sub>2</sub> is placed in a 10L reaction vessel and allowed to form N<sub>2</sub>O at a temperature for which K<sub>c</sub> = 2.0 × 10<sup>-37</sup>, determine the composition of equilibrium mixture.<br />
Answer:<br />
Suppose x moles of N<sub>2</sub> react till equilibrium is attained.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19938" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-4.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 4" width="590" height="195" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-4.png 590w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-4-300x99.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 590px) 100vw, 590px" /><br />
Since, the value of Kc for the reaction (K<sub>c</sub> = 2.0 × 10<sup>-37</sup>) is very small, the value of x must be very small. Therefore,<br />
[N<sub>2</sub>(g)] = \(=\frac{0.482-x}{10}=\frac{0.482}{10}\) = 0.0482 mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
[O<sub>2</sub>(g)] = \(\frac{0.933-x / 2}{10}=\frac{0.933}{10}\frac{0.933-x / 2}{10}=\frac{0.933}{10}\) = 0.0933 mol L<sup>-1</sup> and [N<sub>2</sub>O(g)] = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{10}\)<br />
From K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{N}_2 \mathrm{O}(\mathrm{~g})\right]^2}{\left[\mathrm{~N}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]^2\left[\mathrm{O}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]}\)<br />
We have, 2.0 × 10<sup>-37</sup> = \(\frac{(x / 10)^2}{(0.0482)^2 \times 0.0933}\)<br />
Which gives, x = 6.6 × 10<sup>-20</sup><br />
∴ [N<sub>2</sub>O(g)] = \(\frac{x}{10}=\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-20}}{10}\) = 6.6 × 10<sup>-21</sup></p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
Nitric oxide reacts with Br2 and gives nitrosyl bromide as per reaction given below.<br />
2NO(g) + Br<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2NOBr(g)<br />
When 0.087 mol of NO and 0.0437 mol of Br<sub>2</sub> are mixed in a closed container at constant temperature, 0.0518 mol of NOBr is obtained at equilibrium. Calculate equilibrium amount of NO and Br<sub>2</sub>.<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19939" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-5.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 5" width="606" height="92" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-5.png 606w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-5-300x46.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 606px) 100vw, 606px" /><br />
Given that x = 0.0518<br />
No. of moles of NO(g) at equilibrium = 0.087 &#8211; x = 0.087 &#8211; 0.518 = 0.0352<br />
and number of moles of Br<sub>2</sub>(g) at equilibrium = 0.0437 &#8211; \(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{2}\) = 0.0437 &#8211; \(\frac{0.0518}{2}\) = 0.0178</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
At 450 K, K<sub>p</sub> = 2.0 × 10<sup>10</sup> bar for the given reaction at equilibrium.<br />
2SO<sub>2</sub>(g) + O<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2SO<sub>3</sub>(g)<br />
What is K<sub>c</sub> at this temperature ?<br />
Answer:<br />
For the given reaction, ∆n = 2 &#8211; (2 + 1) = -1<br />
K<sub>p</sub> = K<sub>c</sub>(RT)<sup>∆n</sup><br />
⇒ K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{p}}}{(\mathrm{RT})^{\Delta \mathrm{n}}}=\frac{2.0 \times 10^{10}}{(0.0831 \times 450)^{-1}}\) L mol<sup>-1</sup>, (∵ R = 0.0831 L bar K<sup>-1</sup> mol<sup>-1</sup>)<br />
= 2.0 × 10<sup>10</sup> × 0.831 × 450 L mol<sup>-1</sup><br />
= 7.48 × 10<sup>11</sup> L mol<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
A sample of HI(g) is placed in a flask at a pressure of 0.2 atm. At equilibrium the partial pressure of HI(g) is 0.04 atm. What is K<sub>p</sub> for the given equilibrium ?<br />
2HI(g) ⇌ H<sub>2</sub>(g) + I<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19940" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-6.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 6" width="588" height="111" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-6.png 588w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-6-300x57.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 588px) 100vw, 588px" /><br />
[∵ (0.2 &#8211; 0.04) is the decrease in the pressure of HI]<br />
K<sub>p</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{H}_2} \times \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{I}_2}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{HI}}^2}=\frac{0.08 \times 0.08}{(0.04)^2}\) = 4.0</p>
<p>Question 12.<br />
A mixture of 1.57 mol of N<sub>2</sub>, 1.92 mol of H<sub>2</sub> and 8.13 mol of NH<sub>3</sub> is introduced into a 20 L reaction vessel at 500 K. At this temperature, the equilibrium constant, K<sub>c</sub> for the reaction<br />
N<sub>2</sub>(g) + 3H<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2NH<sub>3</sub>(g) is 1.7 × 10<sup>2</sup>. Is the reaction mixture at equilibrium ? If not, what is the direction of the net reaction ?<br />
Answer:<br />
N<sub>2</sub>(g) + 3H<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2NH<sub>3</sub>(g)<br />
Q<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{NH}_3(\mathrm{~g})\right]^2}{\left[\mathrm{~N}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]\left[\mathrm{H}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]^3}=\frac{(8.13 / 20)^2}{\left(\frac{1.57}{20}\right) \times\left(\frac{1.92}{20}\right)^3}\) = 2.38 × 10<sup>3</sup> (V = 20 L)<br />
Given that K<sub>c</sub> = 1.7 × 10<sup>2</sup><br />
Obviously, Q<sub>c</sub> ≠ K<sub>c</sub><br />
Therefore, the reaction is not in equilibrium because Q<sub>c</sub> ≠ K<sub>c</sub>. It will proceed in the reverse direction.</p>
<p>Question 13.<br />
The equilibrium constant expression for a gas reaction is, K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{NH}_3\right]^4\left[\mathrm{O}_2\right]^5}{[\mathrm{NO}]^4\left[\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}\right]^6}\)<br />
Write the balanced chemical equation corresponding to this expression.<br />
Answer:<br />
4NO(g) + 6H<sub>2</sub>O(g) ⇌ 4NH<sub>3</sub>(g) + 5O<sub>2</sub>(g)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 14.<br />
One mole of H<sub>2</sub>O and one mole of CO are taken in 10 L vessel and heated to 725 K. At equilibrium, 40% of water (by mass) reacts with CO according to the equation,<br />
H<sub>2</sub>O(g) + CO(g) ⇌ H<sub>2</sub>(g) + CO<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
Calculate the equilibrium constant for the reaction.<br />
Answer:<br />
The given reaction is H<sub>2</sub>O(g) + CO(g) ⇌ H<sub>2</sub>(g) + CO<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
Initial number of moles of H<sub>2</sub>O(g) = 1<br />
Number of moles of H<sub>2</sub>O(g) (reacted) = \(\frac{1 \times 40}{100}\) = 0.4<br />
∴ Number of moles of H<sub>2</sub>O(g) left (unreacted) = 1 &#8211; 0.4 = 0.6<br />
From the given equation it is clear that 0.4 moles of H<sub>2</sub>O(g) react with 0.4 moles of CO(g) to form 0.4 moles of H<sub>2</sub>(g) and 0.4 moles of CO<sub>2</sub>(g). The total volume is 10 litres.<br />
∴ At equilibrium,<br />
[H<sub>2</sub>O(g)] = \(\frac{1-0.4}{10}\) = \(\frac{0.6}{10}\) = 0.06 mol L<sup>-1</sup> ; [CO(g)] = \(\frac{1-0.4}{10}\) = \(\frac{0.6}{10}\) = 0.06 mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
[H<sub>2</sub>(g)] = \(\frac{0.4}{10}\) = 0.04 mol L<sup>-1</sup> ; [CO<sub>2</sub>(g)] = \(\frac{0.4}{10}\) = 0.04 mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
Hence, K = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]\left[\mathrm{CO}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]}{\left[\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}(\mathrm{~g})\right][\mathrm{CO}(\mathrm{~g})]}=\frac{0.04 \times 0.04}{0.06 \times 0.06}\) = 0 44</p>
<p>Question 15.<br />
At 700 K, equilibrium constant for the reaction :<br />
H<sub>2</sub>(g) + I<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2HI(g)<br />
is 54.8. If 0.5 mol L_1 of HI(g) js present at equilibrium at 700 K, what are the concentration of H<sub>2</sub>(g) and I<sub>2</sub>(g) assuming that we initially started with HI(g) and allowed it to reach equilibrium at 700 K ?<br />
Answer:<br />
The given reaction can be written as 2HI(g) ⇌ H<sub>2</sub>(g) + I<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
For this reaction, K = \(\frac{1}{54.8}\) = 1.82 × 10<sup>-2</sup> (∵ because for the reverse reaction, K = 54.8)<br />
As the number of moles of H<sub>2</sub> and N<sub>2</sub> are equal, their concentrations at equilibrium will also be equal.<br />
Suppose [H<sub>2</sub>(g)] = [I<sub>2</sub>(g)] = x mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
Given that [HI(g)] = 0.5 mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
K = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]\left[\mathrm{I}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]}{[\mathrm{HI}(\mathrm{~g})]^2}\) ⇒ 1.82 × 10<sup>-2</sup> = \(\frac{x \times x}{(0.5)^2}\) ⇒ x = [1.82 × 10<sup>-2</sup> × (0.5)<sup>2</sup>]<sup>1/2</sup> = 0.068 mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
Hence, at equilibrium, [H<sub>2</sub>(g)] = [I<sub>2</sub>(g)] = 0.068 mol L<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>Question 16.<br />
What is the equilibrium concentration of each of the substances in the equilibrium when the initial, concentration of ICl was 0.78 M ?<br />
2ICl(g) ⇌ I<sub>2</sub>(g) + Cl<sub>2</sub>(g); K<sub>c</sub> = 0.14<br />
Answer:<br />
Suppose at equilibrium, [I<sub>2</sub>(g)] = [Cl<sub>2</sub>(g&gt;] = x mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19941" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-7.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 7" width="540" height="74" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-7.png 540w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-7-300x41.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 540px) 100vw, 540px" /><br />
Given that, K<sub>c</sub> = 0.14<br />
K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{I}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]\left[\mathrm{Cl}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]}{[\mathrm{ICl}(\mathrm{~g})]^2}\)<br />
⇒ 0.14 = \(\frac{x \times x}{(0.78-2 x)^2}\) ⇒ x<sup>2</sup> = 0.14(0.78 -2x)<sup>2</sup><br />
⇒ x = \(\sqrt{0.14}\) (0.78 &#8211; 2x) = 0.374(0.78 &#8211; 2x)<br />
⇒ x = 0.292 &#8211; 0.748 x<br />
⇒ 1.748 x = 0.292<br />
x = \(\frac{0.292}{1.748}\) = 0.167<br />
Hence, equilibrium concentrations will be as follows.<br />
[I<sub>2</sub>(g)] &#8211; [Cl<sub>2</sub>(g)] = x = 0.167 M<br />
[ICl(g)] = 0.78 &#8211; 2x = 0.78 &#8211; (2 × 0.167) = 0.446 M</p>
<p>Question 17.<br />
K<sub>p</sub> = 0.04 atm at 899 K for the equilibrium shown below. What is the equilibrium concentration of C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>6</sub> when it is placed in a flask at 4.0 atm pressure and allowed to come to equilibrium?<br />
C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>6</sub>(g) ⇌ C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>4</sub>(g) + H<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
Answer:<br />
Suppose the partial pressure of C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>6</sub> decreases by p atm till equilibrium is attained.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19942" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-8.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 8" width="486" height="75" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-8.png 486w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-8-300x46.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 486px) 100vw, 486px" /><br />
K<sub>p</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_4} \cdot \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{H}_2}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_6}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{p} \times \mathrm{p}}{4.0-\mathrm{p}}\) ⇒ 0.04 = \(\frac{\mathrm{p}^2}{4.0-\mathrm{p}}\) = 0.16 &#8211; 0.04 p ⇒ p<sup>2</sup> + 0.04 p &#8211; 0.16 = 0<br />
p = \(\frac{-0.04 \pm \sqrt{(0.04)^2-4 \times 1 \times(-0.16)}}{2 \times 1}=\frac{-0.04 \pm 0.801}{2}\)<br />
Taking positive value, p = 0.38<br />
∴ [C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>6</sub>(g)]<sub>eq</sub> = 4.0 &#8211; p = 4.0 &#8211; 0.38 = 3.62 atm</p>
<p>Question 18.<br />
Ethyl acetate is formed by the reaction between ethanol and acetic acid and the equilibrium is represented as,<br />
CH<sub>3</sub>COOH(l) + C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>5</sub>OH(l) ⇌ CH<sub>3</sub>COOC<sub>2</sub>H<sub>5</sub>(l) + H<sub>2</sub>O(l)<br />
i) Write the concentration ratio (reaction quotient), Q<sub>c</sub>, for this reaction (note : water is not in excess and is not a solvent in this reaction)<br />
ii) At 293 K, if one starts with 1.00 mol of acetic acid and 0.18 mol of ethanol, there is 0.171 mol of ethyl acetate in the final equilibrium mixture. Calculate the equilibrium constant.<br />
iii) Starting with 0.5 mol of ethanol and 1.0 mol of acetic acid and maintaining it at 293 K, 0.214 mol of ethyl acetate is found after sometime. Has equilibrium been reached?<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Q<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOC}_2 \mathrm{H}_5(l)\right]\left[\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}(l)\right]}{\left[\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOH}(l)\right]\left[\mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_5 \mathrm{OH}(l)\right]}\)</p>
<p>ii)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19943" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-9.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 9" width="664" height="97" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-9.png 664w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-9-300x44.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 664px) 100vw, 664px" /><br />
If the volume of the reaction mixture is V L, we have at equilibrium,<br />
[CH<sub>3</sub>COOH(l)] = \(\frac{0.829}{\mathrm{V}}\) mol L<sup>-1</sup> ; [C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>5</sub>OH(l)] = \(\frac{0.009}{\mathrm{V}}\) mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
[CH<sub>3</sub>COOC<sub>2</sub>H<sub>5</sub>(l)] = \(\frac{0.171}{\mathrm{V}}\) mol L<sup>-1</sup> ; [H<sub>2</sub>O(l)] = \(\frac{0.171}{\mathrm{V}}\) mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOC}_2 \mathrm{H}_5(l)\right]\left[\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}(l)\right]}{\left[\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOH}(l)\right]\left[\mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_5 \mathrm{OH}(l)\right]}=\frac{\frac{0.171}{\mathrm{~V}} \times \frac{0.171}{\mathrm{~V}}}{\frac{0.829}{\mathrm{~V}} \times \frac{0.009}{\mathrm{~V}}}=\frac{0.171 \times 0.171}{0.829 \times 0.009}\) = 3.92</p>
<p>iii)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19944" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-10.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 10" width="662" height="94" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-10.png 662w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-10-300x43.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 662px) 100vw, 662px" /><br />
∴ Q<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\frac{0.214}{V} \times \frac{0.214}{V}}{\frac{0.786}{V} \times \frac{0.286}{V}}\) = 0.204<br />
Since, Q<sub>c</sub> &lt; K<sub>c</sub>, equilibrium has not been reached.</p>
<p>Question 19.<br />
A sample of pure PCl<sub>5</sub>, was introduced into an evacuated vessel at 473 K. After equilibrium was attained, concentration of PCl<sub>5</sub> was found to be 0.5 × 10<sup>-1</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup>. If value of K<sub>c</sub> is 8.3 × 10<sup>-5</sup> what are the concentrations of PCl<sub>3</sub> and Cl<sub>2</sub> at equilibrium ?<br />
PCl<sub>5</sub>(g) ⇌ PCl<sub>3</sub>(g) + Cl<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
Answer:<br />
PCl<sub>5</sub>(g) ⇌ PCl<sub>3</sub>(g) + Cl<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
Since, the number of moles of PCl<sub>3</sub>(g) and Cl<sub>2</sub>(g) are equal, their concentrations at equilibrium will also be equal.<br />
Suppose, at equilibrium, [PCl<sub>3</sub>(g)] = [Cl<sub>2</sub>(g)] = x mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
Given that at equilibrium, [PCl<sub>5</sub>] = 0.5 × 10<sup>-1</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
∴ K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{PCl}_3(\mathrm{~g})\right]\left[\mathrm{Cl}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]}{\left[\mathrm{PCl}_5(\mathrm{~g})\right]}\) ⇒ 8.3 × 10<sup>-3</sup> = \(\frac{\mathrm{x} \times \mathrm{x}}{0.5 \times 10^{-1}}\)<br />
⇒ x = (8.3 × 10<sup>-3</sup> × 0.5 × 10<sup>-1</sup>)<sup>1/2</sup> = 0.02<br />
Hence, [PCl<sub>3</sub>(g)] = [Cl<sub>2</sub>(g)] = 0.02 mol L<sup>-1</sup>.</p>
<p>Question 20.<br />
One of the reaction that takes place in producing steel from iron ore is the reduction of iron (II) oxide by carbon monoxide to give iron metal and CO<sub>2</sub>.<br />
FeO(s) + CO(g) ⇌ Fe(s) + CO<sub>2</sub>(g); K<sub>p</sub> = 0.265 atm at 1050 K<br />
What are the equilibrium partial pressures of CO and CO<sub>2</sub> at 1050 K if the initial partial pressures are : P <sub>CO</sub> = 1.4 atm and P<sub>CO<sub>2</sub></sub> = 0.80 atm?<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19945" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-11.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 11" width="683" height="68" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-11.png 683w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-11-300x30.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 683px) 100vw, 683px" /><br />
Q<sub>p</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{CO}_2}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{CO}}}=\frac{0.80}{1.4}\) = 0.571<br />
Since, Q<sub>p</sub> &gt; K<sub>p</sub>, the reaction will proceed in the reverse direction. On account of this partial pressure of CO<sub>2</sub> will decrease while that of CO will increase.<br />
Suppose, the decrease in the partial pressure of CO<sub>2</sub> is p atm.<br />
∴ At equilibrium, P<sub>CO<sub>2</sub></sub> = (0.80 &#8211; p) atm and P<sub>CO</sub> = (1.4 + p) atm<br />
∵ K<sub>p</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{CO}_2}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{CO}}}\), we have<br />
0.265 = \(\frac{0.80-\mathrm{p}}{1.4+\mathrm{p}}\) ⇒ 0.265 (1.4 + p) = 0.80 &#8211; p<br />
⇒ 0.371 + 0.265 p = 0.80 &#8211; p<br />
⇒ 1.265 p = 0.429 ⇒ p = \(\frac{0.429}{1.265}\) = 0.339 atm<br />
∴ P <sub>CO</sub> at equilibrium = 1.4 + 0.339 = 1.739 atm.<br />
and P<sub>CO<sub>2</sub></sub> at equilibrium = 0.80 &#8211; 0.339 = 0.461 atm.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 21.<br />
Equilibrium constant, K<sub>c</sub> for the reaction<br />
N<sub>2</sub>(g) + 3H<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2NH<sub>3</sub>(g) at 500 K is 0.061 At a particular time, the analysis shows that composition of the reaction mixture is 3.0 mole L<sup>-1</sup> N<sub>2</sub>(g) 2.0 mol L<sup>-1</sup> H<sub>2</sub> and 0.5 mol L<sup>-1</sup> NH<sub>3</sub>. Is the reaction at equilibrium ? If not in which direction does the reaction tend to proceed to reach equilibrium ?<br />
Answer:<br />
N<sub>2</sub>(g) + 3H<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2NH<sub>3</sub>(g) ; K<sub>c</sub> = 0.061<br />
For the given set of conditions, Q<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{NH}_3(\mathrm{~g})\right]^2}{\left[\mathrm{~N}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]\left[\mathrm{H}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]^3}=\frac{(0.5)^2}{(3.00) \times(2.00)^3}\) = 0.0104<br />
Since, Q<sub>c</sub> &lt; K<sub>c</sub>, the reaction is not at equilibrium. It will proceed in the forward direction.</p>
<p>Question 22.<br />
Bromine monochioride, BrCl decomposes into bromine and chlorine and reaches the equilibrium:<br />
2BrCl(g) ⇌ Br<sub>2</sub>(g) + Cl<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
for which K<sub>c</sub> = 32 at 500 K. If initially pure BrCl is present at a concentration 3.3 × 10<sup>-3</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup>, what is its molar concentration in the mixture at equilibrium?<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19946" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-12.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 12" width="602" height="100" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-12.png 602w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-12-300x50.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 602px) 100vw, 602px" /><br />
K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{Br}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]\left[\mathrm{C} l_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]}{[\mathrm{BrCl}(\mathrm{~g})]^2}\) ⇒ 32 = \(\frac{\frac{x}{2} \times \frac{x}{2}}{\left(3.30 \times 10^{-3}-x\right)^2}\)<br />
Taking square root on both sides, we get<br />
5.66 = \(\frac{\frac{x}{2}}{3.30 \times 10^{-3}-x}=\frac{x}{2\left(3.30 \times 10^{-3}-x\right)}\)<br />
⇒ 0.037 &#8211; 11.32 x = x ⇒ (1 + 11.32)x = 0.037 ⇒ x = \(\frac{0.037}{1+11.32}\) = 3.0 × 10<sup>-3</sup><br />
∴ Equilibrium centration of BrCl = 3.30 × 10<sup>-3</sup> &#8211; x<br />
= 3.30 × 10<sup>-3</sup> &#8211; 3.0 × 10<sup>-3</sup><br />
= 3.0 × 10<sup>-4</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>Question 23.<br />
At 1127 K and 1 atm pressure, a gaseous mixture of CO and CO<sub>2</sub> in equilibrium with solid carbon has 90.55% CO by mass, C(s) + CO<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2CO(g)<br />
Calculate K<sub>c</sub> for this reaction at the above temperature.<br />
Answer:<br />
If the total mass of the gaseous mixture at equilibrium is 100 g then<br />
mass of CO(g) = 90.55 g<br />
and mass of CO<sub>2</sub>(g) = 100 &#8211; 90.55 = 9.45 g<br />
Number of moles of COg) = \(\frac{90.55}{28}\) = 3.234,<br />
(∵ molar mass of CO = 28 g/mol, molar mass of CO<sub>2</sub> = 44 g/mol)<br />
and number of moles of CO<sub>2</sub>(g) = \(\frac{9.45}{44}\) = 0.215<br />
Total number of gaseous moles = 3.234 + 0.2 15 = 3.449<br />
∴ P<sub>CO</sub> = \(\frac{3.234}{3.449}\) × 1 = 0.938 atm (∵ Partial pressure = \(\frac{\text { No.of moles }}{\text { Total no.of moles }}\) × Total pressure)<br />
and P<sub>CO<sub>2</sub></sub> = \(\frac{0.215}{3.449}\) × 1 = 0.062 atm<br />
Hence, for the reaction C(s) + CO<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2CO(g)<br />
K<sub>p</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{p}{\mathrm{CO}}^2}{\mathrm{p}{\mathrm{CO}_2}}=\frac{(0.938)^2}{0.062}\) = 14.19<br />
For the above reaction, ∆n = 2 &#8211; 1 = 1<br />
K<sub>p</sub> = K<sub>p</sub>(RT)<sup>∆n</sup> ⇒ K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{p}}}{(\mathrm{RT})^{\mathrm{An}}}=\frac{14.19}{(0.0821 \times 1127)^1}\) = 0.153</p>
<p>Question 24.<br />
Calculate (i) ∆G° and (ii) the equilibrium constant for the formation of NO<sub>2</sub> from NO and O<sub>2</sub> at 298<br />
NO(g) + 1/2O<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ NO<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
where ∆<sub>f</sub>G°(NO<sub>2</sub>) = 52.0 kJ/mol ; ∆<sub>f</sub>G°(NO) = 87,0 kJ/mol ; ∆<sub>f</sub>G°(O<sub>2</sub>) = 0 kJ/mol<br />
Answer:<br />
i) ∆<sub>r</sub>G° = ∆<sub>f</sub>G° (products) &#8211; ∆<sub>f</sub>G° (reactants)<br />
or = ∆<sub>r</sub>G° [NO<sub>2</sub>] &#8211; {∆<sub>f</sub>G° [NO] + ½∆<sub>f</sub>G° [O<sub>2</sub>])<br />
or ∆<sub>r</sub> = 52.0 &#8211; (87.0 + 0) = -35.0 kJ mol <sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>ii) ∆<sub>r</sub>G° = -2.303 RT log10K<br />
⇒ log<sub>10</sub>K = &#8211;\(\frac{\Delta_{\mathrm{r}} G^{\circ}}{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}\) = \(\frac{(-35.0)}{-2.303 \times 8.314 \times 10^{-3} \times 298}\) = 6.1341<br />
(∵ R = 8.314 × 10<sup>-3</sup> kJ K<sup>-1</sup> mol<sup>-1</sup>)<br />
⇒ K = antilog<sub>10</sub>6.134l = 1.362 × 10<sup>6</sup></p>
<p>Question 25.<br />
Does the number of moles of reaction products increase, decrease or remain same when each of the following equilibria is subjected to a decrease In pressure by increasing the volume?<br />
i) PCl<sub>5</sub>(g) ⇌ PCl<sub>3</sub>(g) + Cl<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
ii) CaO(s) + CO<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ CaCO<sub>3</sub>(s)<br />
iii) 3Fe(s) + 4H<sub>2</sub>O(g) ⇌ Fe<sub>3</sub>O<sub>4</sub>(s) + 4H<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
Answer:<br />
According to Le Chateliers principle, if the pressure on the system is decreased, then the equilibrium shifts in the direction in which the number of moles of gases is more.<br />
i) No.of moles of products will increase on decreasing pressure as the forward reaction will be favoured.<br />
ii) No.of moles of products will decrease as the backward reaction will be favoured.<br />
iii) No.of moles of products will remain the same as the number of moles of gaseous substances is the same on both the sides.</p>
<p>Question 26.<br />
Which of the following reactions will get affected by increasing the pressure ? Also, mention whether change will cause the reaction to go into forward or backward direction.<br />
i) COCl<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ CO(g) + Cl<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
ii) CH<sub>4</sub>(g) + 2S<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ CS<sub>2</sub>(g) + 2H<sub>2</sub>S(g)<br />
iii) CO<sub>2</sub>(g) + C(s) ⇌ 2C0(g)<br />
iv) 2H<sub>2</sub>(g) + CO(g) ⇌ CH<sub>3</sub>OH(g)<br />
v) CaCO<sub>3</sub>(s) ⇌ CaO(s) + CO<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
vi) 4NH<sub>3</sub>(g) + 5O<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 4NO(g) + 6H<sub>2</sub>O(g)<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Reaction will go in the backward direction as n<sub>P</sub> &gt; n<sub>R</sub><br />
ii) Reaction will remain unaffected as n<sub>P</sub> = n<sub>R</sub>.<br />
iii) Reaction will go in the backward direction as n<sub>P</sub> &gt; n<sub>R</sub><br />
iv) Reaction will go in the forward direction as n<sub>P</sub> &lt; n<sub>R</sub><br />
v) Reaction will go in the backward direction as n<sub>P</sub> &gt; n<sub>R</sub><br />
vi) Reaction will go in the backward direction as n<sub>P</sub> &gt; n<sub>R</sub>.</p>
<p>Question 27<br />
The equilibrium constant for the following reaction is 1.6 × 10<sup>5</sup> at 1024 K<br />
H<sub>2</sub>(g) + Br<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2HBr(g)<br />
Find the equilibrium pressure of all gases if 10.0 bar of HBr is introduced into a sealed container at 1024 K.<br />
Answer:<br />
For the reaction<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19947" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-13.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 13" width="528" height="102" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-13.png 528w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-13-300x58.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 528px) 100vw, 528px" /><br />
For the above reaction, K = \(\frac{1}{1.6 \times 10^5}\) = 6.25 × 10<sup>-6</sup><br />
Further, K = K = 6.25 × 10<sup>-6</sup> ⇒ K<sub>p</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{p}{\mathrm{H}_2} \cdot \mathrm{p}{\mathrm{Br}2}}{\mathbf{p}{\mathrm{HBr}}^2}\)<br />
Hence, 6.25 × 10<sup>-6</sup> = \(\frac{\frac{\mathrm{p}}{2} \cdot \frac{\mathrm{p}}{2}}{(10.0-\mathrm{p})^2}\)<br />
Taking square mot on both sides, we have, 2.5 × 10<sup>-3</sup> = \(\frac{\frac{p}{2}}{10.0-p}=\frac{p}{2(10.0-p)}\)<br />
⇒ 0.05 &#8211; 5.0 × 10<sup>-3</sup> p ⇒ p = p(1 +5.0 × 10<sup>-3</sup>)= 0.05 ⇒ p = \(\frac{0.05}{1+5.0 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 4.98 × 10<sup>-2</sup> bar<br />
Hence, at equilibrium, P<sub>H<sub>2</sub></sub> = P<sub>Br<sub>2</sub></sub> = \(\frac{p}{2}=\frac{4.98 \times 10^{-2}}{2}\) = 2.49 × 10<sup>-2</sup> bar<br />
and P<sub>HBr</sub> = (10.0 &#8211; p) = 10.0 &#8211; 4.98 × 10<sup>-2</sup> = 9.95 bar</p>
<p>Question 28.<br />
Dihydrogen gas ¡s obtained from natural gas by partial oxidation with steam as per following endothermic reaction:<br />
CH<sub>4</sub>(g) + H<sub>2</sub>O(g) ⇌ CO(g) + 3H<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
i) Write an expression for K<sub>p</sub> for the above reaction.<br />
ii) How will the values of K<sub>p</sub> and composition of equilibrium mixture be affected by<br />
a) increasing the pressure b) increasing the temperature c) using a catalyst?<br />
Answer:<br />
i) K<sub>p</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{p}{\mathrm{CO}} \times \mathrm{p}{\mathrm{H}2}^3}{\mathrm{p}{\mathrm{CH}4} \times \mathrm{p}{\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}}\)<br />
ii) a) Equilibrium will shift in the backward direction as n<sub>p</sub> &gt; n<sub>R</sub>.</p>
<p>b) Equilibrium will shift in the forward direction because the reaction is endothermic.</p>
<p>c) Composition of equilibrium mixture will remain unchanged. However, the equilibrium will be attained earlier,<br />
The value of K<sub>p</sub> will remain unchanged in (a) and (C). K<sub>p</sub> will increase in (b).</p>
<p>Question 29.<br />
Describe the effect of:<br />
i) addition of H<sub>2</sub><br />
ii) addition of CH<sub>3</sub>OH<br />
iii) removal of CO<br />
iv) removal of CH<sub>3</sub>OH<br />
on the equilibrium of the reaction:<br />
2H<sub>2</sub>(g) + CO(g) ⇌ CH<sub>3</sub>OH(g)<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Equilibrium will shift in the forward direction.<br />
ii) Equilibrium will shift in the backward direction.<br />
iii) Equilibrium will shift in the backward direction.<br />
iv) Equilibrium will shift in the forward direction.</p>
<p>Question 30.<br />
At 473 K, equilibrium constant K<sub>c</sub> for decomposition of phosphorus pentachioride, PCl<sub>5</sub> is 8.3 × 10<sup>-3</sup>. If decomposition is depicted as,<br />
PCl<sub>5</sub>(g) ⇌ PCl<sub>3</sub>(g) + Cl<sub>2</sub>(g); ∆<sub>r</sub>H° = 124.0 kJ mol<sup>-1</sup><br />
i) Write an expression for K<sub>c</sub> for the reaction.<br />
ii) What is the value of K<sub>c</sub> for the reverse reaction at the same temperature?<br />
iii) What would be the effect on K<sub>c</sub> if (a) more PCl<sub>5</sub> is added (b) pressure is increased (c) the temperature is increased?<br />
Answer:<br />
i) K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{PCl}_3(\mathrm{~g})\right]\left[\mathrm{Cl}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]}{\left[\mathrm{PCl}_5(\mathrm{~g})\right]}\)<br />
ii) K&#8217; = \(\frac{1}{K_c}=\frac{1}{8.3 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 120.48<br />
iii) a) M constan temperature, the value of K<sub>c</sub> is not affected by addition of reactants.<br />
Therefore, K<sub>c</sub> will remain unchanged.<br />
b) K<sub>c</sub> will remain unchanged.<br />
c) Since, K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{K_1}{K_2}\), an increase in temperature will favour the forward reaction as the reaction is endothermic. Thus, K<sub>1</sub> will Increase. Hence, the value of K<sub>c</sub> will increase or increasing temperature.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 31.<br />
Dihydrogen gas used in Haber’s process is produced by reacting methane from natural gas with high temperature steam. The first stage of two stage reaction involves the formation of CO and H<sub>2</sub>. In second stage, CO formed in first stage is reacted with more steam in water gas shift reaction,<br />
CO(g) + H<sub>2</sub>O(g) ⇌ CO<sub>2</sub>(g) + H<sub>2</sub>(g)<br />
If a reaction vessel at 4000 C is charged with an equimolar mixture of CO and steam such that p<sub>CO</sub> = p<sub>H<sub>2</sub>O</sub> = 4.0 bar, what will be the partial pressure of H<sub>2</sub> at equilibrium? K<sub>p</sub> = 10.1 at 400°C.<br />
Answer:<br />
Suppose the partial pressure of H<sub>2</sub> at equilibrium is p bar.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19948" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-14.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 14" width="599" height="79" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-14.png 599w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-14-300x40.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 599px) 100vw, 599px" /><br />
∴ K<sub>p</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{CO}_2} \cdot \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{H}_2}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{CO}} \cdot \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}}\)<br />
⇒ 10.1 = \(\frac{p \times p}{(4.0-p) \times(4.0-p)}=\left(\frac{p}{4.0-p}\right)^2\) ⇒ \(\frac{p}{4.0-p}\) = \(\sqrt{10.1}\) = 3.178<br />
⇒ p = 3.178 (40 &#8211; p) ⇒ p = 12.712 &#8211; 3.178 p ⇒ 3.178 + p = 12.712 bar<br />
∴ p = 12.712/4.178 bar<br />
p = 3.04 bar</p>
<p>Question 32.<br />
Predict which of the following reaction will have appreciable concentration of reactants and products.<br />
i) Cl<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2Cl(g) ; K<sub>c</sub> = 5 × 10<sup>-39</sup><br />
ii) Cl<sub>2</sub>(g) + 2NO(g) ⇌ 2NOCl(g) ; K<sub>c</sub> = 3.7 × 10<sup>8</sup><br />
iii) Cl<sub>2</sub>(g) + 2NO<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2NO<sub>2</sub>Cl(g) ; K<sub>c</sub> = 1.8<br />
Answer:<br />
i) For reaction (a), K<sub>c</sub> is very low. Therefore, the concentration of products will be very low.<br />
ii) For reaction (b), K<sub>c</sub> is quite high. Therefore, the reaction will proceed almost to completion and there will be no appreciable concentrations of reactants.<br />
iii) The reaction (c) has a moderate value of K<sub>c</sub> and will have appreciable concentrations of both reactants and products.</p>
<p>Question 33.<br />
The value of K<sub>c</sub> for the reaction 3O<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ 2O<sub>3</sub>(g) is 2.0 × 10<sup>-50</sup> at 25°C. If the equilibrium concentration of O<sub>2</sub> in air at 25°C is 1.6 × 10<sup>-2</sup>, what is the concentration of O<sub>3</sub> ?<br />
Answer:<br />
K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{O}_3(\mathrm{~g})\right]^2}{\left[\mathrm{O}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]^3}\) ⇒ 2.0 × 10<sup>-30</sup> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{O}_3(\mathrm{~g})\right]^2}{\left(1.6 \times 10^{-2}\right)^3}\)<br />
⇒ [O<sub>3</sub>(g)]<sup>2</sup> = 2.0 × 10<sup>-50</sup> × (1.6 × 10<sup>-2</sup>)<sup>3</sup> = 8.192 × 10-56<br />
∴ [O<sub>3</sub>(g)] = (8.192 × 10-56)<sup>10</sup> = 2.86 × 10-28 M</p>
<p>Question 34.<br />
The reaction, CO(g) + 3H<sub>2</sub>(g) ⇌ CH<sub>4</sub>(g) + H<sub>2</sub>O(g) is at equilibrium at 1300 K in a 1 L flask. It also contain 0.30 mol of CO, 0.10 mol of H<sub>2</sub> and 0.02 mol of H<sub>2</sub>O and an unknown amount of CH<sub>4</sub> in the flask. Determine the concentration of CH<sub>4</sub> in the mixture. The equilibrium constant, K<sub>c</sub> for the reaction at the given temperature is 3.90.<br />
Answer:<br />
K<sub>c</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CH}_4(\mathrm{~g})\right]\left[\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}(\mathrm{~g})\right]}{[\mathrm{CO}(\mathrm{~g})]\left[\mathrm{H}_2(\mathrm{~g})\right]^3}\)<br />
∴ 3.90 = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CH}_4(\mathrm{~g})\right] \times 0.02}{0.30 \times(0.10)^3}\) (V = 1 L)<br />
⇒ [CH<sub>4</sub>(g)] = \(\frac{3.90 \times 0.30 \times(0.10)^3}{0.02}\) = 0.0585 = 5.85 × 10<sup>-2</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>Question 35.<br />
What is meant by the conjugate acid-base pair ? Find the conjugate acid/base for the following species.<br />
HNO<sub>2</sub>, CN<sup>&#8211;</sup>, HClO<sub>4</sub>, F<sup>&#8211;</sup>, OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>, \(\mathrm{CO}_3^2\) and S<sup>2-</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
A conjugate acid-base pair that differs only by one proton. Conjugate pairs of the given species are NO<sub>2</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup>, HCN, ClO<sub>4</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup>, HF, H<sub>2</sub>O, HCO<sub>3</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup> and HS<sup>&#8211;</sup> respectively.</p>
<p>Question 36.<br />
Which of the followings are Lewis acids ? H<sub>2</sub>O, BF<sub>3</sub>, H<sup>+</sup>, and \(\mathrm{NH}_4^{+}\)?<br />
Answer:<br />
BF<sub>3</sub>, H<sup>+</sup> and \(\mathrm{NH}_4^{+}\).</p>
<p>Question 37.<br />
What will be the conjugate bases for the Bronsted acids : HF, H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> and \(\mathrm{HCO}_3^{-}\) ?<br />
Answer:<br />
F<sup>&#8211;</sup>, HSO<sub>4</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup> and CO<sub>3</sub><sup>2-</sup><br />
(Conjugate base = Conjugate acid &#8211; H<sup>+</sup>)</p>
<p>Question 38.<br />
Write the conjugate acids for the following Bronsted bases : NH<sub>2</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup>, NH<sub>3</sub> and HCO<sub>3</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup>.<br />
Answer:<br />
NH<sub>3</sub>, NH<sub>4</sub><sup>+</sup>, HCOOH (Conjugate acid = Conjugate base + H<sup>+</sup>)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 39.<br />
The species : H<sub>2</sub>O, HCO<sub>3</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup>, HS<sub>4</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup> and NH<sub>3</sub> can act both as Bronsted acids and bases. For each case give the corresponding conjugate acid and base.<br />
Answer:</p>
<table border="2">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="84"><strong>Substance</strong></td>
<td width="133"><strong>Conjugate Acid</strong></td>
<td width="136"><strong>Conjugate base</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="84">H<sub>2</sub>O</td>
<td width="133">H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup></td>
<td width="136">OH<sup>&#8211;</sup></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="84">HCO<sub>3</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup></td>
<td width="133">H<sub>2</sub>CO<sub>3</sub></td>
<td width="136">CO<sub>3</sub><sup>2-</sup></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="84">HSO<sub>4</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup></td>
<td width="133">H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub></td>
<td width="136">SO<sub>4</sub><sup>2-</sup></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="84">NH<sub>3</sub></td>
<td width="133">NH<sub>4</sub><sup>+</sup></td>
<td width="136">NH<sub>2</sub><sup>&#8211;</sup></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Question 40.<br />
Classify the following species into Lewis acids and Lewis bases and show these act as Lewis acid/base :<br />
(a) OH<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
(b) F<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
(c) H<sup>+</sup><br />
(d) BCl<sub>3</sub>.<br />
Answer:<br />
a) OH<sup>&#8211;</sup> is a Lewis base because it can donate an electron pair.<br />
b) F<sup>&#8211;</sup> is a Lewis base because it can donate electron pair.<br />
c) H<sup>+</sup> is a Lewis acid because it can accept an electron pair.<br />
d) BCl<sub>3</sub> is a Lewis acid because it is an electron deficient molecule and can accept an electron pair.</p>
<p>Question 41.<br />
The concentration of hydrogen ion in a sample of soft drink is 3.8 × 10<sup>-3</sup> M. What is its pH?<br />
Answer:<br />
pH = -log<sub>10</sub>(H<sup>+</sup>) = -log<sub>10</sub>(3.8 × 10<sup>-3</sup>) = 2.42</p>
<p>Question 42.<br />
The pH of a sample of vinegar is 3.76. Calculate the concentration of hydrogen ion in it.<br />
Answer:<br />
log<sub>10</sub>[H<sup>+</sup>] = -3.76<br />
[H<sup>+</sup>] = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-3.76) = antilog<sub>10</sub>\(\overline{4} .24\) = 1.74 × 10<sup>-4</sup> M</p>
<p>Question 43.<br />
The ionization constant of HF, HCOOH and HCN at 298 K are 6.8 × 10<sup>-4</sup>, 1.8 × 10<sup>-4</sup> and 4.8 × 10<sup>-9</sup> respectively. Calculate the ionization constants of the corresponding conjugate base.<br />
Answer:<br />
i) The conjugate base of HF is F<sup>&#8211;</sup>. It will react with water as follows.<br />
F<sup>&#8211;</sup> + H<sub>2</sub>O ⇌ HF + OH<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
Obviously, this is the equation of hydrolysis of a salt of HF with a strong base. Hence,<br />
K<sub>F</sub> = K<sub>h</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{w}}}{\mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{a}}}=\frac{1.0 \times 10^{-14}}{6.8 \times 10^{-4}}\) = 1.5 × 10<sup>-11</sup></p>
<p>ii) Similarly, for HCOOH, K<sub>HCOO<sup>&#8211;</sup></sub> = K<sub>h</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{w}}}{\mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{a}}}=\frac{1.0 \times 10^{-14}}{1.8 \times 10^{-9}}\) = 5.6 × 10<sup>-11</sup></p>
<p>iii) For HCN, K<sub>CN<sup>&#8211;</sup></sub> = K<sub>h</sub> = \(\frac{K_w}{K_a}=\frac{1.0 \times 10^{-14}}{4.8 \times 10^{-9}}\) = 2.1 × 10<sup>-6</sup></p>
<p>Question 44.<br />
The ionization constant of phenol is 1.0 × 10<sup>-10</sup>. What is the concentration of phenolate ion is 0.05 M solution of phenol ? What will be its degree of ionization if the solution is also 0.01M in sodium phenolate ?<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19949" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-15.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 15" width="448" height="74" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-15.png 448w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-15-300x50.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 448px) 100vw, 448px" /><br />
∴ K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_5 \mathrm{O}^{-}\right]\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_5 \mathrm{OH}\right]}=\frac{\mathrm{x} . \mathrm{x}}{0.05-\mathrm{x}}\) = 1.0 × 10<sup>-10</sup>(given)<br />
⇒ \(\frac{x^2}{0.05-x}\) = 1.0 × 10<sup>-10</sup><br />
Since, phenol is not much dissociated, 0.05 &#8211; x ≈ 0.05.<br />
Hence, \(\frac{x^2}{0.05}\) = 1.0 × 10<sup>-10</sup> ⇒ x = (0.05 × 1.0 × 10<sup>-10</sup>)<sup>1/2</sup> = 2.24 × 10<sup>-6</sup><br />
Hence, [C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>O<sup>&#8211;</sup>] in solution = x = 2.24 × 10<sup>-6</sup> M</p>
<p>In the presence of 0.01 M of C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>ONa :<br />
Suppose y is the amount of phenol dissociated. Therefore, at equilibrium<br />
[C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>OH] &#8211; 0.05 &#8211; y, [C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>O<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = 0.01 + y and [H<sup>+</sup>] = y<br />
∴ K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{(0.01+\mathrm{y})(\mathrm{y})}{(0.05-\mathrm{y})}\) = 1.0 × 10<sup>-10</sup> (given)<br />
Since, in the presence of sodium phenolate, the dissociation of phenol will get further suppressed we can take<br />
0.01 + y ≈ 0.01 and 0.05 &#8211; y ≈ 0.05<br />
Hence, \(\frac{0.01+\mathrm{y}}{0.05}\) = 1.0 × 10<sup>-10</sup> ⇒ y = \(\frac{1.0 \times 10^{-10} \times 0.05}{0.01}\) = 5.0 × 10<sup>-10</sup><br />
Hence, degree of dissociation of phenol<br />
α = \(\frac{\text { Number of moles dissociated }}{\text { Total no.of moles initially taken }}=\frac{5.0 \times 10^{-10}}{0.05}\) = 1.0 × 10<sup>-10</sup></p>
<p>Question 45.<br />
The first ionization constant of H<sub>2</sub>S is 9.1 × 10<sup>-8</sup>. Calculate the concentration of HS<sup>&#8211;</sup> ion in its 0.1 M solution. How will this concentration be affected if the solution is 0.1 M in HCl also? If the second dissociation constant of H<sub>2</sub>S is 1.2 × 10<sup>-13</sup>, calculate the concentration of Sounder both conditions.<br />
Answer:<br />
Calculation of [HS<sup>&#8211;</sup>]<br />
H<sub>2</sub>S ionises in two stages. The first stage of ionisation is as follows.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19950" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-16.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 16" width="441" height="74" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-16.png 441w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-16-300x50.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 441px) 100vw, 441px" /><br />
K<sub>a<sub>1</sub></sub> = 9.1 × 10<sup>-8</sup> (given)<br />
According to the law of equilibrium, K<sub>a<sub>1</sub></sub> = \(\)<br />
⇒ 9.1 × 10<sup>-8</sup> = \(\frac{x \cdot x}{0.1-x}\) = \(\frac{x^2}{0.1}\) (as x is very small so 0.1 &#8211; x = 0.1)<br />
⇒ x = (9.1 × 10<sup>-8</sup> × 0.1)<sup>1/2</sup> = 9.54 × 10<sup>-5</sup><br />
Hence, [HS<sup>&#8211;</sup>] in 0.1 M solution = x = 9.54 × 10<sup>-5</sup>.<br />
In the presence of 0.1 M HCl, suppose H<sub>2</sub>S dissociates to an extent of y M.<br />
Therefore, [H<sub>2</sub>S] = 0.1 &#8211; y ≈ 0.1M, [H<sup>+</sup>] = y + 0.1 ≈ 0.1M and [HS<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = y M<br />
(Since, in the presence of HCl, the dissociation of H<sub>2</sub>S will further get suppressed)<br />
∴ K<sub>a<sub>1</sub></sub> = \(\frac{0.1 \times \mathrm{y}}{0.1}\) = 9.1 × 10<sup>-8</sup> ⇒ y = 9.1 × 10<sup>-8</sup>M<br />
Hence, in the presence of 0.1 M of HCl,<br />
[HS<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = y = 9.1 × 10<sup>-8</sup>M<br />
Calculation of [S<sup>2-</sup>]<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19951" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-17.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 17" width="334" height="62" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-17.png 334w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-17-300x56.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 334px) 100vw, 334px" /><br />
The overall dissociation can be expressed as follows.<br />
H<sub>2</sub>S ⇌ 2H<sup>+</sup> + S<sup>2-</sup><br />
K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]^2\left[\mathrm{~S}^{2-}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{~S}\right]}\)<br />
K<sub>a</sub> = K<sub>a<sub>1</sub></sub> × K<sub>a<sub>2</sub></sub> = 9.1 × 10<sup>-8</sup> × 1.2 × 10<sup>-13</sup> = 1.1 × 10<sup>-20</sup></p>
<p>In the absence of 0.1 M of HCl:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19952" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-18.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 18" width="422" height="72" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-18.png 422w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-18-300x51.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 422px) 100vw, 422px" /><br />
⇒ x&#8217; = \(\left(\frac{1.1 \times 10^{-20} \times 0.1}{4}\right)^{1 / 3}\) = 6.5 × 10<sup>-8</sup> M<br />
Hence, [S<sup>2-</sup>] in the absence of 0.1 M of HCl = 6.5 × 10<sup>-8</sup> M</p>
<p>In the presence of 0.1 M of HCl:<br />
Suppose H<sub>2</sub>S dissociates to an extent of y&#8217; M<br />
∴ [H<sub>2</sub>S] = 0.1M &#8211; y&#8217; ≈ 0.1 M, [H<sup>+</sup>] = 2y&#8217; + 0.1 ≈ 0.1 M and [S<sup>2-</sup>] = y<br />
∴ K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{(0.1)^2 \times y^{\prime}}{0.1}\) = 1.1 × 10<sup>-20</sup> ⇒ y&#8217; = \(\frac{1.1 \times 10^{-20}}{0.1}\) = 1.1 × 10<sup>-19</sup> M<br />
Hence, [S<sup>2-</sup>] in the presence of 0.1 M of HCl = 1.1 × 10<sup>-19</sup> M</p>
<p>Question 46.<br />
The ionization constant of acetic acid is 1.74 × 10<sup>-5</sup>. Calculate the degree of dissociation of acetic acid in its 0.05 M solution. Calculate the concentration of acetate ion in the solution and its pH.<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19953" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-19.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 19" width="623" height="72" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-19.png 623w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-19-300x35.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 623px) 100vw, 623px" /><br />
According to the law of equilibrium,<br />
⇒ K = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COO}^{-}\right]\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOH}\right]}\) ⇒ 1.74 × 10<sup>-5</sup> = \(\frac{x . x}{0.05-x}=\frac{x^2}{0.05}\) (∵ x is very small)<br />
⇒ x = (1.74 × 10<sup>-5</sup> × 0.05)<sup>1/2</sup> = 9.33 × 10<sup>-4</sup> M<br />
[CH3COO<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = x = 9.33 × 10<sup>-4</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
[H<sup>+</sup>] = x = 9.33 × 10<sup>-4</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
∴ pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sup>+</sup>] = -log<sub>10</sub>(9.33 × 10<sup>-4</sup>) = 3.03</p>
<p>Question 47.<br />
It has been found that the pH of a 0.01 M solution of an organic acid is 4.15. Calculate the concentration of the anion, the ionization constant of the acid and its pK<sub>a</sub>.<br />
Answer:<br />
Suppose the organic acid is HA. HA ⇌ H<sup>+</sup> + A<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sup>+</sup>]<br />
4.15 = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sup>+</sup>]<br />
∴ [H<sup>+</sup>] = antilog10(-4.15) = 7.08 × 10<sup>-5</sup> M<br />
[A] = [H<sup>+</sup>] = 7.08 × 10<sup>-5</sup> M<br />
∴ K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{A}^{-}\right]}{[\mathrm{HA}]}\)<br />
K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{7.08 \times 10^{-5} \times 7.08 \times 10^{-5}}{0.01}\) = 5.01 × 10<sup>-7</sup> (∵ Dissociation of the acid is very low)<br />
pK<sub>a</sub> = -log<sub>10</sub> K<sub>a</sub> = -log<sub>10</sub>(5.01 × 10<sup>-7</sup>) = 6.3002</p>
<p>Question 48.<br />
Assuming complete dissociation, calculate the pH of the following solutions :<br />
i) 0.003 M HCl<br />
ii) 0.005 M NaOH<br />
iii) 0.002 M HBr<br />
iv) 0.002 M KOH<br />
Answer:<br />
i) [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = [HCl] &#8211; 0.003 mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
∴ pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = -log<sub>10</sub> (0.003) = 2.52</p>
<p>ii) [OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = [NaOH] = 0.005<br />
∴ [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{w}}}{\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}=\frac{1.0 \times 10^{-14}}{0.005}\) = 20 × 10<sup>-12</sup><br />
pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = -log<sub>10</sub>(2.0 × 10<sup>-12</sup>) = 11.7</p>
<p>iii) [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = [HBr] = 0.002 mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
∴ pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = -log<sub>10</sub>(0.002) = 2.70</p>
<p>iv) [OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = [KOH] = 0.002 mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
∴ [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{w}}}{\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}=\frac{1.0 \times 10^{-14}}{0.002}\) = 5.0 × 10<sup>-12</sup><br />
pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = -log<sub>10</sub>(5.0 × 10<sup>-12</sup>) = 11.3</p>
<p>Question 49.<br />
Calculate the pH of the following solutions.<br />
i) 2 g of TlOH dissolved in water to give 2 litres of solution.<br />
ii) 0.3 g of Ca(OH)<sub>2</sub> dissolved in water to give 500 mL of solution.<br />
iii) 0.3 g of NaOH dissolved in water to give 200 mL of solution.<br />
iv) 1 mL of 13.6 M HCl is diluted with water to give 1 litre of solution,<br />
Answer:<br />
i)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19954" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-20.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 20" width="708" height="524" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-20.png 708w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-20-300x222.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 708px) 100vw, 708px" /><br />
iv) Suppose the molarity of the diluted solution is M&#8217;.<br />
M<sub>1</sub>V<sub>1</sub> = M&#8217;V&#8217; ⇒ 13.6 × 1 = M&#8217; × 1000<br />
⇒ M&#8217; = \(\frac{13.6 \times 1}{1000}\) = 1.36 × 10<sup>-2</sup><br />
∴ [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = 1.36 × 10<sup>-2</sup> M<br />
pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = -log<sub>10</sub>(1.36 × 10<sup>-2</sup>) = 1.87</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 50.<br />
The degree of ionization of a 0.1 M bromoacetic acid solution is 0.132. Calculate the pH of the solution and the PK. of bromoacetic acid.<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19955" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-21.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 21" width="708" height="94" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-21.png 708w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-21-300x40.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 708px) 100vw, 708px" /><br />
∴ K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{BrCH}_2 \mathrm{COO}^{-}\right]\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{BrCH}_2 \mathrm{COOH}\right]}=\frac{(0.1 \times 0.132) \times(0.1 \times 0.132)}{0.1(1-0.132)}\) = 2.01 × 10<sup>-3</sup><br />
pK<sub>a</sub> = -log<sub>10</sub>K<sub>a</sub> = -log<sub>10</sub>(2.01 × 10<sup>-3</sup>) = 2.70<br />
[H<sup>+</sup>] = 0.1 × 0.132 = 0.0132 = 1.32 × 10<sup>-2</sup><br />
pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sup>+</sup>] = &#8211; log<sub>10</sub>(1.32 × 10<sup>-2</sup>) = 1.88</p>
<p>Question 51.<br />
The pH Of 0.005 M codeine (C<sub>18</sub>H<sub>21</sub>NO<sub>3</sub>) solution is 9.95. Calculate its ionization constant as pK<sub>b</sub>.<br />
Answer:<br />
Codeine is a base, therefore, it is expected to ionise in solution as follows.<br />
Codeine + H<sub>2</sub> ⇌ Codeine H<sup>+</sup> + OH<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
Given, pH = 9.95<br />
∴ POH = 14 &#8211; 9.95 = 4.05<br />
i.e., -log<sub>10</sub>[OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = 4.05<br />
[OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-4.05) = 8.91 × 10<sup>-5</sup><br />
[Codeine H<sup>+</sup>] = [OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = 8.91 × 10<sup>-5</sup><br />
[Codeine] = 0.005 M<br />
K<sub>b</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\text { Codeine } \mathrm{H}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}{[\text {Codeine }]}=\frac{\left(8.91 \times 10^{-5}\right) \times\left(8.91 \times 10^{-5}\right.}{0.005}\) = 1.587 × 10<sup>-5</sup><br />
[Codeine W] [OH ]<br />
and pK<sub>b</sub> = -log<sub>10</sub>K<sub>b</sub> = -log<sub>10</sub>(1.587 × 10<sup>-6</sup>) = 5.8</p>
<p>Question 52.<br />
What is the pH of 0.001 M aniline solution ? The ionization constant of aniline can be taken as 4.27 × 10<sup>-10</sup>. Calculate the degree of ionization of aniline in the solution. Also calculate the ionization constant of the conjugate acid of aniline.<br />
Answer:<br />
K<sub>b</sub> for aniline = 4.27 × 10<sup>-10</sup><br />
C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>NH<sub>2</sub> + H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup> ⇌ C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>NH<sub>3</sub><sup>+</sup> + OH<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
K<sub>b</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_5 \mathrm{NH}_3^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_5 \mathrm{NH}_2\right]}\)<br />
Since, [C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>NH<sub>3</sub><sup>+</sup>] = [OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>] and dissociation of aniline is not much, we have<br />
and<br />
[OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = {K<sub>b</sub>[C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>NH<sub>2</sub>]}<sup>1/2</sup> = (4.27 × 10<sup>-10</sup> × 0.00)<sup>1/2</sup> = 6.53 × 10<sup>-7</sup> M<br />
∴ POH = -log<sub>10</sub>(6.53 × 10<sup>-7</sup>) = 6.185<br />
and pH = 14 &#8211; 6.185 = 7.815<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19956" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-22.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 22" width="709" height="102" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-22.png 709w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-22-300x43.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 709px) 100vw, 709px" /><br />
∴ K<sub>b</sub> = \(\frac{0.001 \alpha \times 0.001 \alpha}{0.001(1-\alpha)}=\frac{0.001 \alpha^2}{1-\alpha}\) = 0.001 α<sup>2</sup> (Since, α is very small, 1 &#8211; α = 1)<br />
Thus, 0.001 α<sup>2</sup> = 4.27 × 10<sup>-10</sup> ⇒ α = \(\left(\frac{4.27 \times 10^{-10}}{0.001}\right)^{1 / 2}\) = 6.53 × 10<sup>-4</sup><br />
For a pair of conjugate acid and base,<br />
pK<sub>b</sub> + pK<sub>a</sub> = 14 ⇒ pK<sub>a</sub> = 14 &#8211; pK<sub>b</sub> = 14 &#8211; (-log<sub>10</sub> 4.27 × 10<sup>-10</sup>) = 14 &#8211; 9.37 = 4.63<br />
Hence, the ionisation constant of the conjugate acid.<br />
K<sub>a</sub> = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-pK<sub>a</sub>) (∵ pK<sub>a</sub> = -log10K<sub>a</sub>)<br />
= antilog<sub>10</sub> (-4.63) = 2.34 × 10<sup>-5</sup></p>
<p>Question 53.<br />
Calculate the degree of ionization of 0.05 M acetic acid if its pK<sub>a</sub> value is 4.74. How is the degree of dissociation affected when its solution also contains<br />
i) 0.01 M<br />
ii) 0.1 M of HCl?<br />
Answer:<br />
pK<sub>a</sub> = -log<sub>10</sub>K<sub>a</sub> = 4.74<br />
∴ K<sub>a</sub> = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-4.74) = 1.82 × 10<sup>-5</sup><br />
For a weak electrolyte, α = \(\sqrt{\frac{K_a}{c}}\); For acetic acid, α = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{a}}}{\mathrm{c}}}=\sqrt{\frac{1.82 \times 10^{-5}}{0.05}}\) = 1.908 × 10<sup>-2</sup><br />
In the presence of HCl, the dissociation of acetic acid will be suppressed due to common ion effect.</p>
<p>i) When the solution contains 0.01 M of HCl also : Suppose the concentration of CH<sub>3</sub>COOH decreases by x.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19957" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-23.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 23" width="678" height="93" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-23.png 678w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-23-300x41.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 678px) 100vw, 678px" /><br />
K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COO}^{-}\right]\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOH}\right]}\) ⇒ 1.80 × 10<sup>-5</sup> = \(\frac{x(x+0.01)}{(0.05-x)}=\frac{0.01 x}{0.05}\)<br />
(∵ Since, x is very small, x + 0.01 = 0.01 and 0.05 &#8211; x = 0.05)<br />
⇒ x = \(\frac{1.82 \times 10^{-5} \times 0.05}{0.01}\) = 9.1 × 10<sup>-5</sup><br />
Degree of dissociation (α) = \(\frac{\text { Amount dissociated }}{\text { Initial amount }}=\frac{9.1 \times 10^{-5}}{0.05}\) = 1.85 × 10<sup>-5</sup></p>
<p>ii) When the solution contains 0.1 M of HCl:<br />
Proceeding as above, we have, α&#8217; = \(\frac{1.82 \times 10^{-5} \times 0.05}{0.1}\) = 9.1 × 10<sup>-4</sup> and<br />
α&#8217; = \(\frac{9.1 \times 10^{-6}}{0.05}\) = 1.82 × 10<sup>-4</sup></p>
<p>Question 54.<br />
The ionization constant of dimethylamine is 5.4 × 10<sup>-4</sup>. Calculate its degree of ionization in its 0.02 M solution. What percentage of dimethylamine is ionized if the solution is also 0.11 in NaOH?<br />
Answer:<br />
Dimethylamine is weak base. For a weak base, α = \(\sqrt{\frac{K_b}{c}}\)<br />
Therefore, for dimethylamine, α = \(\sqrt{\frac{5.4 \times 10^{-4}}{0.02}}\) = 0.164<br />
In presence of 0.1 M of NaOH, its dissociation will get suppressed.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19958" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-24.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 24" width="712" height="105" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-24.png 712w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-24-300x44.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 712px) 100vw, 712px" /><br />
∴ K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{x(x+0.1)}{0.02-x}=\frac{0.1 x}{0.02}\) (∵ x is very small, x + 0.1 ≈ 0.1 and 0.02 &#8211; x ≈ 0.02)<br />
⇒ 5.4 × 10<sup>-4</sup> = \(\frac{0.1 x}{0.02}\) ⇒ x = \(\frac{5.4 \times 10^{-4} \times 0.02}{0.1}\) = 1.08 × 10<sup>-4</sup><br />
∴ Percent ionisation of dimethylamine = \(\frac{\text { Amount dissociated }}{\text { Total amount }}\) × 100<br />
= \(\frac{x \times 100}{0.02}=\frac{1.08 \times 10^{-4}}{0.02}\) × 100 = 0.57%</p>
<p>Question 55.<br />
Calculate the hydrogen ion concentration in the following biological fluids whose pH are given below.<br />
i) Human muscle-fluid, 6.83<br />
iii) Human blood, 7.38<br />
ii) Human stomach fluid, 1.2<br />
iv) Human saliva, 6.4<br />
Answer:<br />
Given, pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>]<br />
[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-pH)<br />
i) [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] in human muscle fluid = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-6.83) = 1.47 × 10<sup>-7</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
ii) [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] in stomach fluid = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-1.2) = 6.3 × 10<sup>-2</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
iii) [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] in human blood = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-7.38) = 4.1 × 10<sup>-8</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
iv) [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] in human saliva = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-6.4) = 3.98 × 10<sup>-7</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>Question 56.<br />
The pH of milk, black coffee, tomato juice, lemon juice and egg white are 6.8, 5.0, 4.2, 2.2 and 7.8 respectively. Calculate the corresponding hydrogen ion concentration in each.<br />
Answer:<br />
[H<sup>+</sup>] = [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>]<br />
= = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-pH) = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-6.8) = 1.58 × 10<sup>-7</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] in milk = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-5.0) = 1.0 × 10<sup>-5</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] in black coffee = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-4.2) =1.0 × 10<sup>-5</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] in tomato juice = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-2.2) = 6.31 × 10<sup>-5</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] in lemon juice = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-7.8) = 6.31 × 10<sup>-3</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] in egg white = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-7.8) = 1.58 × 10<sup>-8</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 57.<br />
If 0.561 g of KOH is dissolved in water to give 200 mL of solution at 298 K. Calculate the concentrations of potassium, hydrogen and hydroxyl ions. What is its pH ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Molarity of a solution is given by w = \(\frac{\mathrm{M} \times \mathrm{M}^{\prime} \times \mathrm{V}}{1000}\)<br />
∴ 0.561 = \(\frac{\mathrm{M} \times 56 \times 200}{1000}\) (mol. mass of KOH = 56)<br />
⇒ M = \(\frac{0.561 \times 1000}{56 \times 200}\) = 0.05 M<br />
Since, KOH dissociates completely in the solution, KOH → K<sup>+</sup> + OH<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
∴ [K<sup>+</sup>] = [OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = Molarity of KOH = 0.05 M<br />
and [H<sup>+</sup>] = \(\frac{K_w}{\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}=\frac{1.0 \times 10^{-14}}{0.05}\) = 2.0 × 10<sup>-13</sup> M<br />
Now, pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sup>+</sup>] = -log<sub>10</sub>(2 × 10<sup>-13</sup>) = -log<sub>10</sub>2 + 13 log 10 = -0.3010 + 13 = 12.70</p>
<p>Question 58.<br />
The solubility of Sr(OH)<sub>2</sub> at 298 K is 19.23 g/L of solution. Calculate the concentrations of strontium and hydroxyl ions and the pH of the solution.<br />
Answer:<br />
Molecular mass of Sr(OH)<sub>2</sub> = 87.6 + 2 × (16 + 1) = 121.6<br />
Solubility of Sr(OH)<sub>2</sub> = 19.23 g/L = \(\frac{19.23}{121.6}\) mol/L<sup>-1</sup> = 0.1581 mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
Sr(OH)<sub>2</sub> ⇌ Sr<sup>2+</sup> + 2OH<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
If Sr(OH)<sub>2</sub> is assumed to be completely ionised, we have<br />
[Sr<sup>2+</sup>] = 0.1581 mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
and [OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = 2 × 0.1581 = 0.3162 mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
∴ [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = \(\) = 3.16 × 10<sup>-14</sup><br />
and pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = -log<sub>10</sub>(3.16 × 10<sup>-14</sup>) = 13.50</p>
<p>Question 59.<br />
The ionization constant of propanoic acid is 1.32 × 10<sup>-5</sup>. Calculate the degree of ionization of the acid in its 0.05 M solution and also its pH. What will be its degree of ionization if the solution is 0.01 M in HCl also ?<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19959" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-25.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 25" width="724" height="72" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-25.png 724w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-25-300x30.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 724px) 100vw, 724px" /><br />
∴ K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}_2 \mathrm{COO}^{-}\right]\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{CH}_2 \mathrm{COOH}\right]}\)<br />
or 1.32 × 10<sup>-5</sup> = \(\frac{0.05 \alpha \times 0.05 \alpha}{0.05(1-\alpha)} \approx \frac{(0.05 \alpha)^2}{0.05}=\frac{0.05 \alpha^2}{1}\)<br />
α = 1.63 × 10<sup>-2</sup><br />
Then, [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = 0.05α = 0.05 × 1.63 × 10<sup>-2</sup> = 8.15 × 10<sup>-4</sup> M<br />
∴ pH = 3.09<br />
In the presence of 0.1 M of HCl, let &#8216;α&#8217; be the degree of ionization.<br />
Then, [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = 0.01; [A<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = 0.05 α&#8217; ; [H<sub>A</sub>] = 0.05<br />
K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{0.01 \times 0.05 \alpha^{\prime}}{0.05}\) ⇒ 1.32 × 10<sup>-5</sup> = 0.01 α&#8217;<br />
⇒ α&#8217; = 1.32 × 10<sup>-3</sup></p>
<p>Question 60.<br />
The pH of 0.1 M solution of cyanic acid (HCNO) is 2.34. Calculate the ionization constant of the acid and its degree of ionization in the solution.<br />
Answer:<br />
Suppose the degree of ionisation of HCNO is α.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19960" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-26.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 26" width="509" height="71" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-26.png 509w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-26-300x42.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 509px) 100vw, 509px" /><br />
Given that pH of the solution is 2.34.<br />
∴ -log<sub>10</sub>(0.1 × α) = 2.34<br />
⇒ log<sub>10</sub>(0.1 × α) = -2.34 ⇒ 0.1 × α = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-2.34) = 0.00457 = \(\frac{0.00457}{0.1}\) = 0.0457<br />
K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]\left[\mathrm{CNO}^{-}\right]}{[\mathrm{HCNO}]}=\frac{(0.1 \times \alpha) \times(0.1 \times \alpha)}{0.1(1-\alpha)}\)<br />
= \(\frac{(0.1 \times \alpha)^2}{0.1}=\frac{(0.1 \times 0.0457)^2}{0.1}\) = 2.09 × 10<sup>-4</sup></p>
<p>Question 61.<br />
The ionization constant of nitrous acid is 4.5 × 10<sup>-4</sup>. Calculate the pH of 0.04 M sodium nitrite solution and also its degree of hydrolysis.<br />
Answer:<br />
Sodium nitrite is a salt of a strong base and a weak acid. For such a salt,<br />
pH = \(\frac{1}{2}\)pK<sub>w</sub> + \(\frac{1}{2}\)pK<sub>a</sub> + \(\frac{1}{2}\)log<sub>10</sub>c<br />
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (-log<sub>10</sub>1.0 × 10<sup>-14</sup>) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (-log<sub>10</sub>4.5 × 10<sup>-4</sup>) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) × log<sub>10</sub>0.04<br />
= 7.0 + 1.673 &#8211; 0.698 = 7.975<br />
The degree of hydrolysis of such a salt is given by<br />
h = \(\sqrt{\frac{K_w}{K_a \cdot c}}=\sqrt{\frac{1.0 \times 10^{-14}}{4.5 \times 10^{-4} \times 0.04}}\) = 2,36 × 10<sup>-5</sup></p>
<p>Question 62.<br />
A 0.02 M solution of pyridinium hydrochloride has pH = 3.44. Calculate the ionization constant of pyridine.<br />
Answer:<br />
Pyridinium hydrochloride is the salt of a weak base (pyridine) and a strong acid (HCl). For the salt of a weak base and strong acid.<br />
pH = \(\frac{1}{2}\)pK<sub>w</sub> + \(\frac{1}{2}\)pK<sub>a</sub> + \(\frac{1}{2}\)log<sub>10</sub>c<br />
Substituting the values, we have<br />
3.44 = [-\(\frac{1}{2}\)log<sub>10</sub>1.0 × 10<sup>-14</sup> &#8211; \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (- log<sub>10</sub> K<sub>b</sub>) &#8211; \(\frac{1}{2}\) × log<sub>10</sub> 0.02<br />
⇒ 3.44 = &#8211; \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (-14) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)log<sub>10</sub> K<sub>b</sub> &#8211; \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (-1.699)<br />
⇒ 3.44 = 7 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)log<sub>10</sub>K<sub>b</sub> + 0.849<br />
log<sub>10</sub>K<sub>b</sub> = (3.44 &#8211; 7 &#8211; 0.849) × 2 = -8.82<br />
⇒ K<sub>b</sub> = anti log<sub>10</sub>(-8.82) = 1.5 × 10<sup>-9</sup></p>
<p>Question 63.<br />
Predict if the solutions of the following salts are neutral, acidic or basic.<br />
NaCl, KBr, NaCN, NH<sub>4</sub>NO<sub>3</sub>, NaNO<sub>2</sub> and KF<br />
Answer:<br />
Neutral solutions : NaCl, KBr.<br />
Acidic solutions : NH<sub>4</sub>NO<sub>3</sub>.<br />
Basic solutions : NaCN, NaNO<sub>2</sub>, KF.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 64.<br />
The ionization constant of chloroacetic acid is 1.35 × 10<sup>-3</sup>. What will be the pH of 0.1 M acid and its 0.1 M of sodium salt solution ?<br />
Answer:<br />
pH of 0.1 M acid :<br />
Suppose the degree of ionisation of chloroacetic acid is α.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19961" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-27.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 27" width="535" height="74" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-27.png 535w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-27-300x41.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 535px) 100vw, 535px" /><br />
∴ K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{Cl} \mathrm{CH}_2 \mathrm{COO}^{-}\right]\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{ClCH}{ }_2 \mathrm{COOH}\right]}\)<br />
⇒ 1.35 × 10<sup>-3</sup> = \(\frac{0.1 \alpha \times 0.1 \alpha}{0.1(1-\alpha)}\) ≈ \(\frac{(0.1 \alpha)^2}{0.1}\) ⇒ α = \(\left(\frac{1.35 \times 10^{-3} \times 0.1}{(0.1)^2}\right)^{1 / 2}\) = 0.116<br />
∴ [H<sup>+</sup>] = 0.1 × α = 0.1 × 0.116 = 0.0116<br />
and pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sup>+</sup>] = -log<sub>10</sub>(0.0116) = 1.94<br />
pH of 0.1 M of sodium salt:<br />
The sodium salt of chloroacetic acid is the salt of a weak acid and a strong base.<br />
For such as salt<br />
pH = \(\frac{1}{2}\)pK<sub>w</sub> + \(\frac{1}{2}\)pK<sub>a</sub> + \(\frac{1}{2}\)log<sub>10</sub>c<br />
= \(\frac{1}{2}\)(-log<sub>10</sub>1.0 × 10<sup>-14</sup>) + \(\frac{1}{2}\)(-log<sub>10</sub>1.35 × 10<sup>-3</sup>) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) × log<sub>10</sub>0.1<br />
= 7.0 + 1.435 + (-0.5) = 7.94</p>
<p>Question 65.<br />
Ionic product of water at 310 K is 2.7 × 10<sup>-14</sup>. What is the pH of neutral water and temperature?<br />
Answer:<br />
In neutral water, [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = [OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>]<br />
K<sub>w</sub> = [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] [OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>]<sup>2</sup><br />
⇒ [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>]<sup>2</sup> = K<sub>w</sub> = 2.7 × 10<sup>-14</sup><br />
[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = (2.7 × 10<sup>-14</sup>)12 = 1.64 × 10<sup>-7</sup><br />
Hence, pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = -log<sub>10</sub>(1.64 × 10<sup>-7</sup>) = 6.78</p>
<p>Question 66.<br />
Calculate the pH of the resultant mixtures.<br />
i) 10 mL Of 0.2 M of Ca(OH)<sub>2</sub> + 25 mL of 0.1 M of HCl<br />
ii) 10 mL Of 0.01 M of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> + 10 mL of 0.01 M of Ca(OH)<sub>2</sub><br />
iii) 10 mL of 0.1 M of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> + 10 mL of 0.1 M of KOH<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Normality of Ca(OH)<sub>2</sub> solution = 0.2 × 2 = 0.4 N<br />
and normality of HCl solution = 0.1 × 1 = 0.1 N<br />
Gram equivalents of is taken as = \(\frac{\mathrm{N} \times \mathrm{V}}{1000}=\frac{0.4 \times 10}{1000}\) = 0.004<br />
Gram equivalents of HCl is taken as = \(\frac{N \times V}{1000}=\frac{0.1 \times 25}{1000}\) = 0.0025<br />
0.0025 gram eq. of HCl would neutralise 0.0025 gram eq. of Ca(OH)<sub>2</sub>.<br />
∴ Amount of left unreacted = 0.004 &#8211; 0.0025 = 0.0015 gram equivalents<br />
Total volume of the mixture = 10 + 25 = 35 mL<br />
Suppose the normality of the resultant solution is N&#8217;.<br />
No.of gram eq. = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}^{\prime} \times \mathrm{V}}{1000}\)<br />
⇒ 0.0015 = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}^{\prime} \times 35}{1000}\)<br />
⇒ N&#8217; = \(\frac{0.0015 \times 1000}{35}\) = 0.0429<br />
∴ [OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = N&#8217; = 0.042<br />
∴ [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{w}}}{\left[\mathrm{OH}^{-}\right]}=\frac{1.0 \times 10^{-14}}{0.0429}\) = 2.331 × 10<sup>-13</sup><br />
pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = -log<sub>10</sub>2.331 × 10<sup>-13</sup> = 12.63</p>
<p>ii) 10 mL of 0.01 M of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> would exactly neutralise 10 mL of 0.01 M Ca(OH)<sub>2</sub> and resultant solution would be neutral.<br />
Hence, pH of the resultant mixture = 7.00</p>
<p>iii) Normality of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> = 0.1 × 2 = 0.2 N and Normality of KOH = 0.1 × 1 = 0.1 N<br />
Gram equivalents of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{N} \times \mathrm{V}}{1000}=\frac{0.2 \times 10}{1000}\) = 0.002<br />
Gram equivalents of NaOH = \(\frac{\mathrm{N} \times \mathrm{V}}{1000}=\frac{0.1 \times 10}{1000}\) = 0.001<br />
0.001 gram equation of NaOH would neutralise 0.001 gram equation of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub>.<br />
Total volume of the mixture = 10 + 10 = 20 mL. If the normality of the resultant solution is N&#8217;.<br />
0.001 = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}^{\prime} \times 20}{1000}\) ⇒ \(\frac{0.001 \times 1000}{20}\) = 0.05<br />
∴ [H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = N&#8217; = 0.05<br />
pH = -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>] = -log<sub>10</sub>0.05 = 1.30</p>
<p>Question 67.<br />
Determine the solubilities of silver chromate, barium chromate, ferric hydroxide, lead chloride and mercurous iodide at 298 K from their solubility product constants given. Determine also the molarities of individual ions.<br />
Given, K<sub>sp</sub> Ag<sub>2</sub>CrO<sub>4</sub> = 1.1 × 10<sup>-12</sup>, K<sub>sp</sub> BaCrO<sub>4</sub> = 1.2 × 10<sup>-10</sup><br />
K<sub>sp</sub> = 1.0 × 10<sup>-38</sup>, K<sub>sp</sub> PbCl<sub>2</sub> = 1.6 × 10<sup>-5</sup>,<br />
K<sub>sp</sub> Hg<sub>2</sub>I<sub>2</sub> = 4.5 × 10<sup>-29</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
i) For silver chromate (Ag<sub>2</sub>CrO<sub>4</sub>) :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19962" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-28.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6 28" width="718" height="673" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-28.png 718w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Equilibrium-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-6-28-300x281.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 718px) 100vw, 718px" />1<br />
s = \(\) = \(\) = 2.24 × 10<sup>-10</sup> M<br />
and [Hg<sub>2</sub><sup>2+</sup>] = s = 2.2 × 10<sup>-10</sup> M and [I<sup>&#8211;</sup>] = 2s = 2.24 × 10<sup>-10</sup> × 2 = 4.48 × 10<sup>-10</sup> M</p>
<p>Question 68.<br />
The solubility product constant of Ag<sub>2</sub>CrO<sub>4</sub> and AgBr are 1.1 × 10<sup>-2</sup> and 5.0 × 10<sup>-15</sup> respectively. Calculate the ratio of the molarities of their saturated solutions.<br />
Answer:<br />
For Ag<sub>2</sub>CrO<sub>4</sub> (a ternary salt), s = \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{sp}}}{4}\right)^{1 / 3}\) = \(\left(\frac{1.1 \times 10^{-12}}{4}\right)^{1 / 3}\) = 6.5 × 10<sup>-5</sup> M<br />
For AgBr (a binary salt), s’ = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{sp}}}\) = \(\sqrt{5.0 \times 10^{-13}}\) = 7.1 × 10<sup>-7</sup> M<br />
Ratio of molarities of their saturated solutions = \(\frac{\mathrm{s}}{\mathrm{~s}^{\prime}}\) = \(\frac{6.5 \times 10^{-5}}{7.1 \times 10^{-7}}\) = 91.5</p>
<p>Question 69.<br />
Equal volumes of 0.002 M solutions of sodium iodate and cupric chlorate are mixed together. Will it lead to precipitation of copper iodate? (For cupric iodate K<sub>sp</sub> = 7.4 × 10<sup>-8</sup>).<br />
Answer:<br />
[I\(\mathrm{O}_3^{-}\) = 0.002 M and [Cu<sup>2+</sup>] = 0.002 M<br />
Cu<sup>2+</sup> + 2I\(\mathrm{O}_3^{-}\) → Cu(IO<sub>3</sub>)<sub>2</sub><br />
K,sub.sp Cu(IO<sub>3</sub>)<sub>2</sub> = [Cu<sup>2+</sup>][I\(\mathrm{O}_3^{-}\)]<sup>2</sup> = 7.4 × 10<sup>-8</sup> (given)<br />
On mixing equal volumes, the concentration gets halved.<br />
[Cu<sup>2+</sup>][I\(\mathrm{O}_3^{-}\)]<sub>2</sub> = \(\left(\frac{0.002}{2}\right)\) × \(\left(\frac{0.002}{2}\right)^2\) = 1.0 × 10<sup>-9</sup><br />
Since, the ionic product is less than the solubility product, precipitation will not take place.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Equilibrium Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 6" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 70.<br />
The ionization constant of benzoic acid is 6.46 × 10<sup>-5</sup> and K<sub>sp</sub> for silver benzoate is 2.5 × 10<sup>-13</sup>. How many times is silver benzoate more soluble in a buffer of pH 3.19 compared<br />
to its solubility in pure water?<br />
Answer:<br />
C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COOAg \(\text { ⇌ }\) C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COO<sup>&#8211;</sup> + Ag<sup>+</sup><br />
Solubility in water : s = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{sp}}}\) = \(\sqrt{2.5 \times 10^{-13}}\) = 5.0 × 10<sup>-7</sup> mol L<sup>-7</sup><br />
Solubility in a buffer of pH = 3.19:<br />
In a buffer of pH = 3.19, -log<sub>10</sub>[H<sup>+</sup>] = 3.19<br />
∴ [H<sup>+</sup>] = antilog<sub>10</sub>(-3.19) = 6.457 × 10<sup>-4</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup>.<br />
The H<sup>+</sup> ions present in buffer solution will combine with C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COO<sup>&#8211;</sup> ions to form C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COOH but (H<sup>+</sup>) in the solution will remain unchanged because the solution is a buffer solution.<br />
C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COOH \(\text { ⇌ }\) C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COO<sup>&#8211;</sup> + H<sup>+</sup><br />
∴ K<sub>a</sub> = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{C}6 \mathrm{H}_5 \mathrm{COO}^{-}\right]\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_5 \mathrm{COOH}\right]}\) ⇒ \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_5 \mathrm{COOH}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{C}_6 \mathrm{H}_5 \mathrm{COO}^{-}\right]}\) = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}^{+}\right]}{\mathrm{K}{\mathrm{a}}}\) = \(\frac{6.457 \times 10^{-4}}{6.46 \times 10^{-5}}\) = 9.995 &#8230;.. (i)<br />
Suppose the solubility of silver benzoate in the buffer is s’ mol L<sup>-1</sup>.<br />
Since, almost all the C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COO<sup>&#8211;</sup> ions get converted to benzoic acid which remains almost unionised, we have<br />
s’ = [Ag<sup>+</sup>] = [C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COO-] + [C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COOH]<br />
= [C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COO<sup>&#8211;</sup>] + 9.995 × [C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COO<sup>&#8211;</sup>] (From eq. (i))<br />
∴ [C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COO-] = \(\frac{\mathrm{s}^{\prime}}{10.995}\)<br />
K<sub>sp</sub> = [C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COO<sup>&#8211;</sup>][Ag<sup>+</sup>]<br />
⇒ 2.5 × 10<sup>-13</sup> = \(\frac{\mathrm{s}^{\prime}}{10.995}\) × s&#8217; = s<sup>&#8216;2</sup> = 2.5 × 10<sup>-13</sup> × 10.995<br />
⇒ s&#8217; = \(\sqrt{2.5 \times 10^{-13} \times 10.995}\) = 1.657 × 10<sup>-6</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
∴ \(\frac{s^{\prime}}{s}\) = \(\frac{1.657 \times 10^{-6}}{5.0 \times 10^{-7}}\) = 3.314</p>
<p>Question 71.<br />
What is the maximum concentration of equlmolar solutions of ferrous sulphate and sodium sulphide so that when mixed in equal volumes, there is no precipitation of iron sulphide? (For an iron sulphide, K<sub>sp</sub> = 6.3 × 10<sup>-18</sup>).<br />
Answer:<br />
Suppose the required concentration is x M. On mixing equal volumes, concentration gets halved. Therefore, [Fe<sup>2+</sup>] = \(\frac{\mathbf{x}}{2}\) and [S<sup>2-</sup>] = \(\frac{\mathbf{x}}{2}\)<br />
For the state of no precipitation, [Fe<sup>2+</sup>] [S<sup>2-</sup>] = K<sub>sp</sub><br />
⇒ \(\frac{x}{2} \cdot \frac{x}{2}[latex] 6.3 × 10<sup>-18</sup> ⇒ x = (6.3 × 10<sup>-18</sup> × 4)<sup>1/2</sup> = 5.02 × 10<sup>-9</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>Question 72.<br />
What is the minimum volume of water required to dissolve 1 g of calcium sulphate at 298 K? (For calcium sulphate, K<sub>sp</sub> is 9.1 × 10<sup>-8</sup>). V<br />
Answer:<br />
For a binary salt, s = [latex]\sqrt{K_{s p}}\)<br />
∴ For CaSO<sub>4</sub>, S = 1\(\sqrt{9.1 \times 10^{-6}}\) = 3.0 × 10<sup>-3</sup> mol L<sup>-1</sup><br />
Solubility of CaSO<sub>4</sub> in g/L = 3.0 × 10<sup>-3</sup> × 136 = 0.41 gL<sup>-1</sup><br />
(Mol. mass of CaSO<sub>4</sub> = 40 + 32 + 64 = 136 g/mol)<br />
Thus, a saturated solution of CaSO<sub>4</sub> contains 0.41 g of the salt in 1 L.<br />
Hence, the volume of water required to dissolve 1 g of CaSO<sub>4</sub> = \(\frac{1}{0.41}\) = 2.44 L</p>
<p>Question 73.<br />
The concentration of suiphide ion in 0.1 M HCl solution saturated with hydrogen sulphide is 1.0 × 10<sup>-19</sup>M. If 10 ml. of this is added to 5 mL of 0.04 M solution of the following FeSO<sub>4</sub>, MnCl<sub>2</sub>, ZnCl<sub>2</sub> and CdCl<sub>2</sub>. In which of these solutions precipitation will take place?<br />
Answer:<br />
Precipitation takes only when the ionic product exceeds the solubility product.<br />
Since 10 mL of the solution containing S<sup>2-</sup> ion is mixed with 5 mL of the different metal salt solutions, volume of the mixture after mixing in each case = 10 + 5 = 15 mL.<br />
∴ [S<sup>2-</sup>] = 1.0 × 10<sup>-19</sup> × \(\frac{10}{15}\) = 6.67 × 10<sup>-20</sup>M<br />
and M<sup>2+</sup> = [Fe<sup>2+</sup>] = [Mn<sup>2+</sup>] = [Zn<sup>2+</sup>] = [Cd<sup>2+</sup>] = 0.04 × \(\frac{5}{15}\) = 1.33 × 10<sup>-2</sup> M<br />
Therefore, in each case<br />
Ionic product = [M<sup>2+</sup>][S<sup>2+</sup>] = (1.33 × 10<sup>-2</sup>) × (6.67 × 10<sup>-20</sup>) = 8.87 × 10<sup>-22</sup><br />
This ionic product is greater than the solubility product of ZnS and CdS. Hence, precipitation will take place only in ZnCl<sub>2</sub> and CdCl<sub>2</sub> solutions.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
		<post-id xmlns="com-wordpress:feed-additions:1">19934</post-id>	</item>
		<item>
		<title>Dialogue Writing Skills Inter 1st Year English Grammar</title>
		<link>https://tsboardsolutions.in/dialogue-writing-skills-inter-1st-year-english/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Srinivas]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sat, 17 Oct 2026 11:16:09 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[AP Inter 1st Year]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tsboardsolutions.in/?p=19971</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[For systematic learning, students can include AP Inter 1st Year English Study Material and Dialogue Writing Skills in English Inter 1st Year in their daily study routine. Inter 1st Year English Dialogue Writing Skills with Answers Conversation forms the basis of communication skills. Regular practice is required to equip oneself with this essential skill. Greetings, ... <a title="Dialogue Writing Skills Inter 1st Year English Grammar" class="read-more" href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/dialogue-writing-skills-inter-1st-year-english/" aria-label="Read more about Dialogue Writing Skills Inter 1st Year English Grammar">Read more</a>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>For systematic learning, students can include <a href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-english-study-material/">AP Inter 1st Year English Study Material</a> and Dialogue Writing Skills in English Inter 1st Year in their daily study routine.</p>
<h2>Inter 1st Year English Dialogue Writing Skills with Answers</h2>
<p>Conversation forms the basis of communication skills. Regular practice is required to equip oneself with this essential skill. Greetings, courtesies, polite way of agreement or otherwise, etc. form an important component of conversation. Learning to use them properly is, therefore, of great help.</p>
<p>In the Public Examination, an incomplete dialogue usually with four blanks is given. Four appropriate words or phrases are also provided. The student is required to understand the given part and respond to fill in the blanks suitably. Careful observation of the part given before and after the blank and a little bit of common sense will help the student answer this question correctly. There may be more than one possible way of filling in the given blank. One should not worry about this as long as the completed dialogue sounds meaningful. Study the following dialogues.</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">Examples</span></p>
<p>1. Read the dialogue given below regarding a complaint over a phone call and All the blanks with the suitable dialogues given below.</p>
<p>Making a Complaint &#8211; a faulty Television Set</p>
<p>Shopkeeper : ___________ (1) ___________<br />
Customer : Yes please! I have a complaint regarding with television set.<br />
Shopkeeper : ___________ (2)___________<br />
Customer : Oh, it s SM004 &#8211; NEW. I bought this television here about three months ago, but the sound and picture quality are not so good.<br />
Shopkeeper : Can you explain in more detail ?<br />
Customer : ___________ (3) ___________ there&#8217;s a dark line down the left &#8211; hand side of the screen.<br />
Shopkeeper : Do you have an outdoor antenna ?<br />
Customer : Yes, I do.<br />
Shopkeeper : ___________ (4) ___________<br />
Customer : Several times.<br />
Shopkeeper : ___________ (5) ___________<br />
Customer : I am not so happy with the television set. I want a refund.<br />
Shopkeeper : I’m afraid it isn&#8217;t our policy to give refunds, sir.<br />
Customer : ___________ (6) ___________</p>
<p>Choose the correct dialogue from the following to make the above conversation meaningful.</p>
<p>a) Well then, I want to talk to the manager.<br />
b) I&#8217;ll get our engineers to have a look at it.<br />
c) Have you tried adjusting the antenna ?<br />
d) Good afternoon, can 1 halp you ?<br />
e) May I know the model number of it ?<br />
f) Oh, yes, of course, the picture is always flickering and there’s an annoying hissing sound in the background.<br />
Answers:<br />
1) Good afternoon, can I help you ?<br />
2) May I know the model number of it ?<br />
3) Oh, yes, of course, the picture is always flickering and there is an annoying hissing sound in the background.<br />
4) Have you tried adjusting the antenna ?<br />
5) I&#8217;ll get our engineers to have a look at it.<br />
6) Well then, I want to talk to the manager.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Dialogue Writing Skills Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>2. Choose the appropriate dialogue from the given options to make the conversation below meaningful.<br />
(Sita dropped a glass on the floor. Naturally, her mother asks for an explanation.)</p>
<p>Mother : What was that terrible noise ? ___________ (1) ___________ anything ?<br />
Sita : I&#8217;m sorry, mom. ___________ (2) ___________ and it broke.<br />
Mother : Were you hurt ?<br />
Sita : No, but I&#8217;m really sorry.<br />
Mother : I&#8217;m glad that you aren&#8217;t hurt ! It was ___________ (3) ___________ on your 1st birthday!<br />
Sita : I feel bad for breaking the glass.<br />
Mother : Haven&#8217;t I told you to handle glassware carefully ?<br />
Sita : The glass was too slippery.<br />
Mother : It&#8217;s okay, but you&#8217;ve ___________ (4) ___________.<br />
Sita : Sure, Mom. ___________ (5) ___________ again.</p>
<p>a) I dropped a glass on the floor.<br />
b) a gift from your aunt Meena<br />
c) got to be cautious next time!<br />
d) I&#8217;ll not let it happen<br />
e) Did you drop<br />
Answers:<br />
a) Did you drop<br />
b) I dropped a glass on the floor<br />
c) a gift from your aunt<br />
d) Meena got to be cautious next time!<br />
e) I&#8217;ll not let it happen</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">Exercises For Practice</span></p>
<p>I. what happened, mind, see, slowly recuperating</p>
<p>Mahesh : Hi, Suresh. Why didn’t you turn up to college yesterday?<br />
Suresh : Hello, Mahesh. I wasn’t feeling well yesterday.<br />
Mahesh : ___________ (1) ___________ ?<br />
Suresh : I had a severe stomach ache.<br />
Mahesh : How are you now? Are you okay ?<br />
Suresh : Yes, I’m ___________ (2) ___________ now.<br />
Mahesh : Did you ___________ (3) ___________ the doctor ?<br />
Suresh : Yes, I have seen the doctor. He told me to avoid fast food and have my meals on time.<br />
Mahesh : I’ve seen you skip meals for a plate of pani poori many times.<br />
Suresh : I love pani poori. But now, I’ve made up my mind not to have them.<br />
Mahesh : Thank God. That must have been a terrible pain. Good that you changed your ___________ (4) ___________.<br />
Answers:<br />
1. What happened?<br />
2. slowly recuperating<br />
3. see<br />
4. mind</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Dialogue Writing Skills Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>II. sure, hungry, else you need, replace</p>
<p>Victor : Excuse me, I ordered pasta, but this is noodles.<br />
Waiter : I’m terribly sorry, sir. Let me ___________ (1) ___________ this immediately.<br />
Victor : Thank you. Please ensure it’s vegetarian, as I requested earlier.<br />
Waiter : ___________ (2) ___________, sir. I’ll double-check your order and bring it back soon.<br />
Victor : I hope it doesn’t take too long. I’m quite ___________ (3) ___________.<br />
Waiter : It won’t take long, sir. Thank you for your patience.<br />
Victor : I appreciate your quick response.<br />
Waiter : You’re welcome. Please let me know if there’s anything ___________ (4) ___________.<br />
Answers:<br />
1. replace<br />
2. Sure<br />
3. hungry<br />
4. else you need</p>
<p>III. resolved, sure, hours, phone number</p>
<p>Rahul : Excuse me, my internet hasn’t been working for two days now.<br />
Support Agent : I’m sorry to hear that, sir. Could you please provide your ___________(1)___________?<br />
Rahul : Sure, it’s 9876543210. Can you fix this by today ?<br />
Support Agent : I’ll escalate the issue right away. You should have it resolved within a few ___________ (2) ___________.<br />
Rahul : Thank you. I really need it for an important online meeting.<br />
Support Agent : I understand, sir. We’ll prioritize your request.<br />
Rahul : Will you notify me once the issue is resolved ?<br />
Support Agent : ___________ (3) ___________, sir. You’ll receive a confirmation message once it’s ___________ (4) ___________.<br />
Answers:<br />
1. phone number<br />
2. hours<br />
3. Sure<br />
4. resolved</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">Exercises</span></p>
<p>Read each set of dialogues below and complete the blanks with appropriate words or phrases from the word bank provided.</p>
<p>I. expensive / iPhones / budget phones / tough</p>
<p>Ramu : I’m thinking of buying a mobile phone. I really like the iPhone.<br />
Charan : ___________ (1) ___________ are amazing, no doubt!<br />
Ramu : Many of my school friends have bought one.<br />
Charan : Yeah, some of my friends have it too. But&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; do you have the money ? It&#8217;s pretty expensive.<br />
Ramu : It is ___________ (2) ___________. I know. That&#8217;s why I&#8217;m planning to ask my mom.<br />
Charan : You know, the price of an iPhone is like two months of your mom’s salary. It might be tough for her.<br />
Ramu : Hmm, you’re right. It is ___________ (3) ___________ for her. I didn’t think of her difficulties. Now, I think a budget phone will be enough for me. I’ll get a budget phone.<br />
Charan : Exactly! These days, ___________ (4) ___________ have almost all the features we need. It’s better not to trouble our parents unnecessarily, especially just to follow what others are doing.<br />
Answers:<br />
1. iPhones<br />
2. expensive<br />
3. tough<br />
4. budget phones</p>
<p>II. homemade food / for both of us / I’m hungry / let’s go</p>
<p>Sowmya : I’m famished. Shall we go out to eat something?<br />
Navya : ___________ (1) ___________ too, but I want homemade food.<br />
Sowmya : Homemade food isn’t tasty. At least I want something spicy and tasty.<br />
Navya : Sure, but ___________ (2) ___________ is healthy. And we can cook our<br />
Sowmya : But we have neither the energy nor the patience, not even the skill to cook.<br />
Navya : You are correct.<br />
Sowmya : I will pay for both of us. Shall we go out?<br />
Navya : Sure, but you will pay ___________ (3) ___________<br />
Sowmya : Let’s go out!<br />
Navya : ___________ (4) ___________<br />
Answers:<br />
1. I’m hungry<br />
2. homemade food<br />
3. for both of us<br />
4. Let’s go.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Dialogue Writing Skills Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>III. having fun / photos / social media / memories</p>
<p>Tinnu : Why are you always clicking ___________ (1) ___________ ? We are here to enjoy the trip, not to take photos.<br />
Bannu : But I want to make memories. Lots of memories.<br />
Tinnu : ___________ (2) ___________ of taking photos? If you don’t really enjoy, you can’t make real memories. First, let’s have some fun.<br />
Bannu : Fun ? I&#8217;m all in our ___________ (3) ___________. But don&#8217;t you think others need to know that we are having fun ?<br />
Tinnu : We need to share our happiness, not our photos. By sharing our photos, we are just making others jealous.<br />
Bannu : I think we are just inspiring them. It depends on how you look at it. I don’t want to blame social media.<br />
Tinnu : Even I won&#8217;t blame ___________ (4) __________. But social media just increases our fears. So please keep your camera away.<br />
Bannu : Sure. Come here, one more selfie.<br />
Answers:<br />
1. photos<br />
2. Memories<br />
3. having fun<br />
4. social media</p>
<p>IV. deep breath /nothing / do you / shout</p>
<p>Rahim : Hey, I didn’t understand what our teacher said. I have a doubt.<br />
Raju : __________ (1) __________ ? Then ask him. He’ll explain.<br />
Rahim : But, I’m afraid. What if he shouts?<br />
Raju : Why will he __________ (2) __________ at you? He won’t do such things. He will explain. Trust me.<br />
Rahim : But what if others laugh at me? What if they think I know nothing?<br />
Raju : Knowing __________ (3) __________ is not a problem. Not learning is a problem. Even others will learn something through your question. Take a deep breath.<br />
Rahim : Ok, I’ll ask the doubt myself. Let me take a __________ (4) __________.<br />
Raju : All the best. I know you’ll rock!<br />
Answers:<br />
1. Do you<br />
2. shout<br />
3. nothing<br />
4. deep breath</p>
<p>V. our parents / greedy / everything / exams</p>
<p>Gita : Why do you always study so much? You are too greedy.<br />
Madhu : I’m not __________ (1) __________. I just want to learn as much as I can. I don’t want to leave anything to chance.<br />
Gita : But that’s too much. If I get some 50%, that’s enough for me. If I get less than that, I have to face the anger of my parents.<br />
Madhu : I don’t think we should read for __________(2) __________. I read it because I love it.<br />
Gita : But those questions won’t be asked in the exam.<br />
Madhu : We shouldn’t read for the sake of __________ (3) __________. Imagine you go to a doctor with a strange problem, and the doctor says that your problem wasn’t asked in her exam. How would you feel?<br />
Gita : I don’t go to such doctors. I want my doctor to know everything.<br />
Madhu : It’s good thinking. But isn’t it fair? You expect others to know __________ (4) __________ but you don’t learn everything? W&#8217;e all should do our best.<br />
Answers:<br />
1. Thank you<br />
2. cold and cough<br />
3. That’s very nice<br />
4. 200 rupees</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Dialogue Writing Skills Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>VI. the train to Delhi / you &#8216;re welcome / on time / excuse me</p>
<p>Doctor : Please take your seat.<br />
Patient : __________ (1) __________<br />
Doctor : Please tell me, how can I help you?<br />
Patient : Sir, I have been suffering from fever for the last two days.<br />
Doctor : Ok. Do you have a cold, cough, or anything else?<br />
Patient : I have __________ (2) __________. Please give me medicine, doctor. I don’t want an injection.<br />
Doctor : Don’t worry. I’m not giving you an injection. These medicines are enough.<br />
Patient : __________ (3) __________ of you. How much is the fee?<br />
Doctor : The fee is __________ (4) __________. Please pay it at the counter.<br />
Answers:<br />
1. Thank you<br />
2. cold and cough<br />
3. That’s very nice<br />
4. 200</p>
<p>VII. the train to Delhi / you &#8216;re welcome / on time / excuse me</p>
<p>Customer : ___________, on which platform will the train to Delhi arrive?<br />
Enquiry : __________ (2) __________ will arrive on platform number four.<br />
Customer : When will it arrive? Is it on time?<br />
Enquiry : The train will arrive in fifteen minutes, and yes, it is __________ (3) __________<br />
Customer : Thank you for the information.<br />
Enquiry : __________ (4) __________. Do you need any more information?<br />
Customer : No, that’s all. Thank you for the help once again.<br />
Answers:<br />
1. Excuse me<br />
2. The train to Delhi<br />
3. on times<br />
4. You’re welcome</p>
<p>VIII. thank you / good morning/hear that / studies</p>
<p>Principal : Good morning, Mr Anil. Welcome to the parent-teacher meeting.<br />
Mr Anil : __________ (1) __________. Sir.<br />
Principal : Please take a seat.<br />
Mr Anil : __________ (2) __________. Sir. I am eager to know about my son’s progress.<br />
Principal : Of course, your son is doing well in __________ (3) __________.<br />
Mr Anil : It’s nice to __________ (4) __________. The whole credit goes to your staff.<br />
Principal : It’s our duty to bring the best out of the students. I thank you for visiting.<br />
Answers:<br />
1. Good morning<br />
2. Thank you<br />
3. studies<br />
4. hear that</p>
<p>IX. neglecting / just an exam / a movie / completing</p>
<p>Arjun : Hi! I am planning to go for a movie. Will you accompany me?<br />
Karthik : __________ (1) __________! Are you even thinking? Tomorrow we have an exam.<br />
Arjun : It’s __________ (2) __________ I’m very eager to see the first day first show.<br />
Karthik : Bro, it’s not just an exam. You are __________ (3) __________ your studies. It’s not good on your part.<br />
Karthik : Exams can’t be written the other day. But you can go to the movie after the exam. Even heroes don’t skip their schedules. movie after __________ (4) __________ the exam.<br />
Karthik : That’s a good idea.<br />
Answers:<br />
1. A movie<br />
2. just an exam<br />
3. neglecting<br />
4. completing</p>
<p>X. be completed / harm / microplastics / playing</p>
<p>Mom : Will you please stop playing games on your mobile phone?<br />
Son : Mom, I’m not __________ (1) __________ games. I’m watching a video.<br />
Mom : Whatever, it’s not good for your eyes to keep looking at the screen for hours together.<br />
Son : Mom, I’ve got a project to __________ (2) __________ by this weekend. I’m watching a video related to that.<br />
Mom : What’s the project about?<br />
Son : It’s about microplastics.<br />
Mom : __________ (3) __________. What is it?<br />
Son : Just like plastic, there are very tiny particles that can cause harm to the Earth.<br />
Mom : How do they cause __________ (4) __________ to the Earth?<br />
Son : The usage of plastic has become a part of our life. When we dispose of any plastic object, it doesn’t degrade in the soil. Moreover, it pollutes our air, soil, and water too.<br />
Mom : Interesting. Tell me more about microplastics once you complete your project.<br />
Son : Sure, Mom.<br />
Answers:<br />
1. Playing<br />
2. be completed<br />
3. Microplastics<br />
4. harm</p>
<p>XI. Read the following dialogue and fill the blanks with the words given below.</p>
<p>for you / thank you very much /your bill/ please wait</p>
<p>Sophia : Excuse me, I believe there’s been a msitake in my bill.<br />
Manager : I’m sorry to hear that. Could you please show me __________ (1) __________ ?<br />
Sophia : Here it is. I was charged for two desserts, but I only had one.<br />
Manager : Let me check this for you. __________ (2) __________ while I verify it.<br />
Sophia : Sure, I’ll wait. Thank you for looking into it.<br />
Manager : You’re right. There was an error. I’ll fix it and issue a new bill right away.<br />
Sophia : __________ (3) __________. Mistakes happen, but it’s great to see such prompt service.<br />
Manager : Thank you for your understanding. Here’s your corrected bill. Please let us know if there’s anything else we can do __________ (4) __________.<br />
Sophia : Thank you. Everything else was perfect. I’ll definitely visit again.<br />
Answers:<br />
1. your bill<br />
2. Please wait<br />
3. Thank you very much<br />
4. for you</p>
<p>XII. Read the following dialogue and fill the blanks with the words given below.</p>
<p>have / hoped / advance / thank you very much</p>
<p>Elsa : Hi, Mia. I’m so sorry I couldn’t come to your party last night.<br />
Mia : It’s okay, Elsa. But I really __________ (1) __________ you would be there.<br />
Elsa : I know, and I feel terrible about it. Something urgent came up at home.<br />
Mia : I understand. But next time, please let me know in __________ (2) __________.<br />
Elsa : Absolutely. I’ll make it up to you with a coffee treat soon!<br />
Mia : That sounds good ! But next time, you really __________ (3) __________ to make it.<br />
Elsa : I promise. Your party pictures looked amazing!<br />
Mia : __________(4) __________! It was a great evening. I hope to<br />
see you at the next one.<br />
Answers:<br />
1. hoped<br />
2. advance<br />
3. have<br />
4. Thank you very much</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
		<post-id xmlns="com-wordpress:feed-additions:1">19971</post-id>	</item>
		<item>
		<title>AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7c Solutions</title>
		<link>https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-maths-exercise-7c-solutions/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Mahesh]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sat, 17 Oct 2026 10:02:14 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[AP Inter 1st Year]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tsboardsolutions.in/?p=19966</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Referring to the AP Inter 1st Year Maths Study Material Chapter 7 Binomial Theorem Exercise 7c Solutions makes it easier to understand complex problems. AP Inter 1st Year Maths Binomial Theorem Solutions Exercise 7c Find the coefficient of Question 1. x5 in (x + 3)8 Solution: The general term Tr+1 of the binomial expansion (a ... <a title="AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7c Solutions" class="read-more" href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-maths-exercise-7c-solutions/" aria-label="Read more about AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7c Solutions">Read more</a>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Referring to the <a href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-maths-textbook-solutions/">AP Inter 1st Year Maths Study Material</a> Chapter 7 Binomial Theorem Exercise 7c Solutions makes it easier to understand complex problems.</p>
<h2>AP Inter 1st Year Maths Binomial Theorem Solutions Exercise 7c</h2>
<p>Find the coefficient of</p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
x<sup>5</sup> in (x + 3)<sup>8</sup><br />
Solution:<br />
The general term T<sub>r+1</sub> of the binomial expansion (a + b)n is given by T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r</sub> a<sup>n-r</sup>b<sup>r</sup><br />
Here x5 is the T<sub>r+1</sub> term so a = x, b = 3 and n = 8<br />
T<sub>r+1</sub> = 8C<sub>r</sub>x<sup>8-r</sup>3<sup>r</sup> &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;..(1)<br />
To find out the coefficient of x<sup>5</sup>, We have to equate x<sup>5</sup> = x<sup>8-r</sup> =&gt;r = 3<br />
Putting the value of r in (1), we get T<sub>3+1</sub> = <sup>8</sup>C<sub>3</sub> × x<sup>8-3</sup> 3<sup>3</sup><br />
T<sub>4</sub> = \(\frac{8!}{3!5!}\) × x<sup>5</sup> × 27 = 1512 x<sup>5</sup><br />
Hence the coefficient of x<sup>5</sup> = 1512</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
a<sup>5</sup>b<sup>7</sup> in (a &#8211; 2b)<sup>12</sup>.<br />
Solution:<br />
The general term Tr+ t of the binomial expansion (a + b)<sup>n</sup> is given by T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r</sub> a<sup>n-r</sup>b<sup>r</sup><br />
Here a = a, b = -2b &amp; n = 12<br />
Substituting above values, we get T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>12</sup>C<sub>r</sub> a<sup>12-r</sup> (-2b)<sup>r</sup> &#8230; (1)<br />
To find out the coefficient of a<sup>5</sup>, We equate a<sup>12-r</sup> = a<sup>5</sup>, r = 7<br />
Putting r = 7 in (1) ⇒ Tg = <sup>12</sup>C<sub>7</sub> a<sup>5</sup>(-2b)<sup>7</sup><br />
T<sub>8</sub> = \(\frac{12!}{7!5!}\) × a<sup>5</sup> × (-2)<sup>7</sup>b<sup>7</sup><br />
= -101376 a<sup>5</sup>b<sup>7</sup><br />
Hence, the coefficient of a<sup>5</sup>b<sup>7</sup> = -101376.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7c Solutions" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Write the general term in the expansion of</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
(x<sup>3</sup> &#8211; y)<sup>6</sup><br />
Solution:<br />
The general term T<sub>r+1</sub> of the binomial expansion (a + b)n is given by T<sub>r+1</sub> = nCra&#8221;-b&#8217;&#8230; (1)<br />
Here, a = x<sup>2</sup>, n = 6 and b = &#8211; y<br />
Putting above values in (1)<br />
T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>6</sup>C<sub>r</sub> x<sup>2(6-r)</sup> (-1)<sup>r</sup> y<sup>r</sup><br />
= <sup>6</sup>C<sub>r</sub> x<sup>12-2r</sup> x (-1)<sup>r</sup> X y<sup>r</sup><br />
= (-1)<sup>r</sup> <sup>6</sup>C<sub>r</sub> x<sup>12-2r</sup> y<sup>r</sup></p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
(x<sup>2</sup> &#8211; yx)<sup>12</sup>, x ≠ 0.<br />
Solution:<br />
The general term T<sub>r+x</sub> of the binomial expansion (a + b)n is given by T<sub>r+1</sub> = nC<sub>r</sub> a<sup>n-r</sup> b<sup>r</sup><br />
Here n = 12, a = x<sup>2</sup> and b = -y x<br />
Substituting the above values, we get<br />
T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>12</sup>C<sub>r</sub> x<sup>2(12-r)</sup> (-1)<sup>r</sup> y<sup>r</sup>x<sup>r</sup> = (-1)r <sup>12</sup>C<sub>r</sub> x<sup>24-2r</sup> y<sup>r</sup> x<sup>r</sup><br />
= (-1)<sup>r</sup> <sup>12</sup>C<sub>r</sub> x<sup>24-r</sup>. y<sup>r</sup></p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
In the expansion of (1 + a)<sup>m+n</sup>, prove that the coefficients of am and an are equal.<br />
Solution:<br />
We know that the general term T<sub>r+1</sub> of the binomial expansion (a + b)<sup>n</sup> is given by<br />
T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r</sub> a<sup>n-r</sup> b<sup>r</sup><br />
Here n = m + n, a = 1 and b = a<br />
Substituting the values in the general term<br />
T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>m+n</sup>C. 1<sup>m+n-r</sup>a<sup>r</sup> = <sup>m+n</sup>C<sub>r</sub> a<sup>r</sup> &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;..(1)<br />
Now, we have the general term for the expression is, T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>m+n</sup>C<sub>r</sub> a<sup>r</sup><br />
Now, for coefficient of a<sup>m</sup>, T<sub>m+1</sub> = <sup>m+n</sup>C<sub>m</sub> a<sup>m</sup><br />
Hence, for the coefficient of m, the value of r = m<br />
So, the coefficient is <sup>m+n</sup>C<sub>m</sub><br />
Similarly, the coefficient of an is <sup>m+n</sup>C<sub>n</sub><br />
<sup>m+n</sup>C<sub>m</sub> = \(\frac{(\mathrm{m}+\mathrm{n})!}{\mathrm{m}!\mathrm{n}!}\) And also, <sup>m+n</sup>C<sub>n</sub> = \(\frac{(\mathrm{m}+\mathrm{n})!}{\mathrm{m}!\mathrm{n}!}\)<br />
The coefficient of am and an are same that is \(\frac{(\mathrm{m}+\mathrm{n})!}{\mathrm{m}!\mathrm{n}!}\)</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
The coefficients of the (r &#8211; 2)<sup>th</sup>, r<sup>th</sup> and (r + 2)<sup>th</sup> terms in the expansion of (x + 1)<sup>n</sup> are in the ratio 1:3:5. Find n and r.<br />
Solution:<br />
The general term T<sub>r+1</sub> of the binomial expansion (a + b)n is given by T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r</sub> a<sup>n-r</sup> b<sup>r</sup><br />
Here, the binomial is (1 + x)<sup>n</sup> where a = 1, b = x and n = n</p>
<p>The (r + 1)<sup>th</sup> term is given by<br />
T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r</sub> 1<sup>n-r</sup> x<sub>r</sub> ⇒ T<sub>(r + 1)</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r</sub> x<sup>r</sup><br />
The coefficient of (r + 1)<sup>th</sup> term is <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r</sub></p>
<p>The rth term is given by (r &#8211; 1)<sup>th</sup> term<br />
T<sub>(r &#8211; 1 &#8211; 1)</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r-1</sub><br />
⇒ T<sub>r</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r &#8211; 1</sub>x<sup>r-1</sup><br />
∴ The coefficeint of (r &#8211; 1)<sup>th</sup> term is <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r &#8211; 1</sub></p>
<p>For (r &#8211; 1)<sup>th</sup> term, we will take (r &#8211; 2)<sup>th</sup> term<br />
T<sub>r &#8211; 2 + 1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r-2</sub> x<sup>r-2</sup><br />
T<sub>r-1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r-2</sub>x<sup>r-2</sup><br />
∴ The coefficeint of (r &#8211; 1)<sup>th</sup> term is <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r &#8211; 2</sub></p>
<p>Given that the coefficient of (r &#8211; 1)<sup>th</sup>, r<sup>th</sup> and r + 1<sup>th</sup> term are in ratio 1: 3 : 5<br />
Therefore,<br />
\(\frac{\text { Coefficient of }(\mathrm{r}-1)^{\text {th }} \text { term }}{\text { Coefficient of } \mathrm{r}^{\text {th }} \text { term }}=\frac{1}{3}\)</p>
\(\frac{{ }^n C_{r-2}}{{ }^n C_{r-1}}=\frac{1}{3} \Rightarrow \frac{\frac{n!}{(r-2)!(n-r+2)!}}{\frac{n!}{(r-1)(n-r+1)!}}=\frac{1}{3}\)
<p>On rearrangement, we get<br />
\(\frac{n!}{(r-2)!(n-r+2)!} \times \frac{(r-1)!(n-r+1)!}{n!}=\frac{1}{3}\)</p>
<p>By multiplying<br />
⇒ \(\frac{(\mathrm{r}-1)(\mathrm{r}-2)!(\mathrm{n}-\mathrm{r}+1)!}{(\mathrm{r}-2)!(\mathrm{n}-\mathrm{r}+2)!}=\frac{1}{3} \Rightarrow \frac{(\mathrm{r}-1)(\mathrm{n}-\mathrm{r}+1)!}{(\mathrm{n}-\mathrm{r}+2)(\mathrm{n}-\mathrm{r}+1)!}=\frac{1}{3}\)</p>
<p>On simplifying we get,<br />
⇒ \(\frac{(\mathrm{r}-1)}{(\mathrm{n}-\mathrm{r}+2)}=\frac{1}{3}\)<br />
⇒ 3r &#8211; 3 = n &#8211; r + 2<br />
⇒ n &#8211; 4r + 5 = 0 &#8230;. (1)</p>
<p>Also, \(\frac{\text { the coefficient of } r^{\text {th }} \text { term }}{\text { coefficient of } r+1^{\text {th }} \text { term }}=\frac{3}{5} \Rightarrow \frac{\frac{n!}{(r-1)!(n-r+1)!}}{\frac{n!}{r!(n-r)!}}=\frac{3}{5}\)</p>
<p>On rearranging we get,<br />
⇒ \(\frac{n!}{(r-1)!(n-r+1)!} \times \frac{r!(n-r)!}{n!}=\frac{3}{5}\)</p>
<p>By multiplying<br />
⇒ \(\frac{r(r-1)!(n-r)!}{r-1)!(n-r+1)!}=\frac{3}{5} \Rightarrow \frac{r(n-r)!}{(n-r+1)!}=\frac{3}{5} \Rightarrow \frac{r(n-r)!}{(n-r+1)(n-r)!}=\frac{3}{5}\)</p>
<p>On simplifying we get,<br />
⇒ \(\frac{r}{(n-r+1)}=\frac{3}{5}\)<br />
⇒ 5r = 3n &#8211; 3r + 3<br />
⇒ 8r &#8211; 3n &#8211; 3 = 0 &#8230; (2)<br />
We have 1 and 2 as<br />
n &#8211; 4r + 5 = 0 &#8230;(1)<br />
8r &#8211; 3n &#8211; 3 = 0 &#8230;(2)<br />
Multiplying equation (1) by number (2)<br />
2n &#8211; 8r + 10 = 0 &#8230;(3)<br />
Adding equations (2) and (3)<br />
2n &#8211; 8r + 10 = 0<br />
⇒ -3n &#8211; 8r &#8211; 3 = 0<br />
⇒ -n = -7<br />
⇒ n = 7 and r = 3</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="AP Inter 1st Year Maths Exercise 7c Solutions" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Prove that the coefficient of xn in the expansion of (1 + x)<sup>2n</sup> is twice the of x<sup>n</sup> in the expansion of (1 + x)<sup>2n-1</sup>.<br />
Solution:<br />
The general term T<sub>r+1</sub>, of the binomial expansion (a + b)<sup>n</sup> is given by T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r+1</sub> a<sup>n-r</sup>b<sup>r</sup><br />
The general term for binomial (1 + x)<sup>2n</sup> is<br />
T<sub>(r+1)</sub> = <sup>2n</sup>C<sub>r</sub>x<sup>r</sup> &#8230;(1)<br />
To find the coefficient of x<sup>n</sup>, r = n<br />
T<sub>n+1</sub> = <sup>2n</sup>C<sub>n</sub>x<sup>n</sup><br />
The coefficeint of x<sup>n</sup> = <sup>2n</sup>C<sub>n</sub></p>
<p>The general term for binomial (1 + x)<sup>2n-1</sup> is<br />
T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>2n-1</sup>C<sub>r</sub> x<sup>r</sup></p>
<p>To find the co-efficient of x<sup>n</sup><br />
Putting r = n<br />
T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>2n-1</sup>C<sub>r</sub> x<sup>r</sup><br />
The coefficient of x<sup>n</sup> = <sup>2n-1</sup>C<sub>n</sub><br />
We have to prove<br />
Coefficient of x<sup>n</sup> in (1 + x)<sup>2n</sup> = 2 coefficient of x<sup>n</sup> in (1 + x)<sup>2n-1</sup><br />
Consider LHS = <sup>2n</sup>C<sub>n</sub> = \(\frac{2 n!}{n!(2 n-n)!}=\frac{2 n!}{n!(n)!}\)<br />
Again consider RHS = 2 × <sup>2n-1</sup>C<sub>n</sub><br />
= 2 × \(\frac{(2 n-1)!}{n!(2 n-1-n)!}=2 \times \frac{(2 n-1)!}{n!(n-1)!}\)<br />
Now multiplying and dividing by n we get, 2 × \(\frac{(2 n-1)!}{n!(n-1)!} \times \frac{n}{n}=\frac{2 n(2 n-1)!}{n!n(n-1)!}=\frac{2 n!}{n!n!}\)<br />
From above equation LHS = RHS.<br />
Hence proved.</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Find a positive value of m for which the coefficient of x<sup>2</sup> in the expansion (1 + x)<sup>m</sup> is 6.<br />
Solution:<br />
The general term T<sub>r+1</sub> of the binomial expansion (a + b)<sup>n</sup> is given by T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r</sub> a<sup>n-r</sup> b<sup>r</sup><br />
Here, a = 1, b = x and n = m<br />
Putting above values, T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>m</sup>C<sub>r</sub> 1<sup>n-r</sup> x<sup>r</sup> = <sup>m</sup>C<sub>r</sub> x<sup>r</sup><br />
We need the coefficient of x<sup>2</sup><br />
Putting r = 2, T<sub>2+1</sub> = <sup>m</sup>C<sub>2</sub> x<sup>2</sup><br />
The coefficient of x<sup>2</sup> = <sup>m</sup>C<sub>2</sub><br />
Given that coefficient of x<sup>2</sup> = <sup>m</sup>C<sub>2</sub> = 6<br />
⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{m}!}{2!(\mathrm{m}-2)!}\) = 6<br />
⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{m}(\mathrm{~m}-1)(\mathrm{m}-2)!}{2 \times 1 \times(\mathrm{m}-2)!}\) = 6<br />
⇒ m(m &#8211; 1) = 12<br />
⇒ m<sup>2</sup> &#8211; m &#8211; 12 = 0<br />
⇒ m<sup>2</sup> &#8211; 4m + 3m &#8211; 12 = 0<br />
⇒ m(m &#8211; 4) + 3(m &#8211; 4) = 0<br />
⇒ (m + 3) (m &#8211; 4) = 0<br />
⇒ m = -3, 4<br />
We need the positive value of m, so m = 4.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
		<post-id xmlns="com-wordpress:feed-additions:1">19966</post-id>	</item>
		<item>
		<title>Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar</title>
		<link>https://tsboardsolutions.in/common-errors-inter-1st-year-english/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Srinivas]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sat, 17 Oct 2026 06:19:42 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[AP Inter 1st Year]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tsboardsolutions.in/?p=19899</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[For systematic learning, students can include AP Inter 1st Year English Study Material and Common Errors in English Inter 1st Year in their daily study routine. AP Inter 1st Year English Common Errors with Answers (A) USAGE OF ARTICLES (A, An, The) : Rule 1 : Don&#8217;t use the&#8217; before material nouns used in general ... <a title="Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar" class="read-more" href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/common-errors-inter-1st-year-english/" aria-label="Read more about Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar">Read more</a>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>For systematic learning, students can include <a href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-english-study-material/">AP Inter 1st Year English Study Material</a> and Common Errors in English Inter 1st Year in their daily study routine.</p>
<h2>AP Inter 1st Year English Common Errors with Answers</h2>
<p>(A) USAGE OF ARTICLES (A, An, The) :</p>
<p>Rule 1 : Don&#8217;t use the&#8217; before material nouns used in general sense.<br />
(పదార్ధాల పేర్ల ముందు &#8216;<span style="text-decoration: underline;">the</span>&#8216; నుపయోగింపరాదు.)<br />
e.g. : 1. The gold is a precious metal. (Wrong)<br />
Gold is a precious metal. (Right)</p>
<p>Rule 2 : No article is used before the branches of knowledge.<br />
(విద్యలేక జ్ఞాన సంబంధ వాక్యాలముందు ఏ విధమైన Article నుపయోగింపరాదు.)<br />
2. The Geology is an interesting subject. (W)<br />
Geology is an interesting subject. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 3 : No article is used before the names of days, months and seasons.<br />
(దినముల, నెలల, ఋతువుల పేర్ల ముందు ఏ Article నుపయోగింపరాదు.)<br />
e.g. : 3. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Sunday</span> is a holiday. (not the Sunday)<br />
4. If <span style="text-decoration: underline;">winter</span> comes, can <span style="text-decoration: underline;">spring</span> be far behind. (not &#8216;the winter&#8217;, not the spring)<br />
5. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">May</span> is the hottest month. (not the May)</p>
<p>Rule 4 : Don&#8217;t use any article before nouns in certain phrases.<br />
(కొన్ని phrases లోని నామవాచకాల ముందు ఏ విధమైన Article నుపయోగింపరాదు.)<br />
e.g. : 6. by air, by sea, over hill and dale etc.</p>
<p>Rule 5 : Don&#8217;t use &#8216;the&#8217; before the names of games.<br />
(ఆటల పేర్ల ముందు, &#8216;the&#8217; నుపయోగింపరాదు.)<br />
e.g. : 7. I play hockey. (not &#8216;the hockey&#8217; )<br />
8. Chess is a fine game. (not &#8216;the chess&#8217;)</p>
<p>Rule 6 : No article is used before a Common Noun used in the vocative case.<br />
(సంబోధనాత్మక సాధారణ నమాచకాల ముందు ఎట్టి Article నుపయోగింపరాదు.)<br />
e.g. : 9. Friend, I have news to tell you. (not &#8216;the friend&#8217;)<br />
10. Can you help me, brother ? (not &#8216;the brother&#8217;)</p>
<p>Rule 7 : Article is omitted when a noun indicates rank, titles, occupation etc.<br />
(బిరుదు, వృత్తి, హూదాలను తెలిపేటపుడు Article నుపయోగింపరాదు.)<br />
e.g. : 11. King Arthur. (not &#8216;the King Arthur&#8217;)<br />
12. General Kaul. (not &#8216;the General Kaul&#8217;)</p>
<p>Rule 8 : No article is used before Collective Nouns like mankind, people, society, company etc.<br />
(సామూహిక నామవాచకాల ముందు ఏ Article నుపయోగింపరాదు.)<br />
e.g. : 13. We are members of society, (not &#8216;the society&#8217;)</p>
<p>Rule 9 : In certain phrases consisting of a preposition, no article is placed.<br />
(కొన్ని phrases లో విభక్తి ప్రత్యయముల ముందు ఏ విధమైన Article నుపయోగింపరాదు.)<br />
e.g. : 14. on demand (not ’on the demand&#8217;)<br />
15. at home (not &#8216;at the home&#8217; or &#8216;at a home&#8217;)</p>
<p>Rule 10 : Don&#8217;t put any article before names of meal when used in general sense.<br />
(భోజన పదాలముందు ఏ Article నుపయోగింపరాదు.)<br />
e.g.: 16. The lunch is at eleven o&#8217; clock. (W)<br />
Lunch is at eleven o’ clock. (R)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Rule 11 : &#8216;A&#8217; is used before words beginning with a consonant sound.<br />
e.g.: 17. Frank is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">an</span> European. (W)<br />
Frank is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">a</span> European. (R)</p>
<p>18. Here is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">an</span> one-rupee note. (W)<br />
Here is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">a</span> one-rupee note. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 12 : &#8216;An&#8217; is used before words with a vowel sound.<br />
e.g. : 19. Brutus is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">a</span> honest man. (W)<br />
Brutus is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">an</span> honest man. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 13 : &#8216;The&#8217; is used in the following cases :<br />
e.g. : 20. Rajahmundry is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">on Godavari</span>. (W)<br />
Rajahmundry is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">on the Godavari</span>. (R)</p>
<p>21. My sister lives <span style="text-decoration: underline;">in U.K.</span> (W)<br />
My sister lives <span style="text-decoration: underline;">in the U.K.</span> (R)</p>
<p>22. The higher you climb <span style="text-decoration: underline;">colder</span> you get. (W)<br />
The higher you climb <span style="text-decoration: underline;">the colder</span> you get. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 14 : No article is used before Proper Nouns.<br />
(పేర్లకుముందు ఏ విధమైన Article నుపయోగింపరాదు.)<br />
23. The Delhi is the capital of India. (W)<br />
Delhi is the capital of India. (R)</p>
<p>(B) USAGE OF PREPOSITIONS:</p>
<p>Rule 15 : &#8216;Since&#8217; denotes point of time. &#8216;For&#8217; denotes period of time.<br />
e.g. : 24. She has been typing since two hours. (W)<br />
She has been typing <span style="text-decoration: underline;">for</span> two hours. (R)</p>
<p>25. They have been living here for 1990. (W)<br />
They have been living here <span style="text-decoration: underline;">since</span> 1990. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 16 : &#8216;At&#8217; is used for small places and villages. &#8216;In&#8217; is used in the case of towns, cities and countries.<br />
e.g. : 26. He was born in Pamarru. (W)<br />
He was born <span style="text-decoration: underline;">at</span> Pamarru. (R)</p>
<p>27. He was born at Sweden. (W)<br />
He was born <span style="text-decoration: underline;">in</span> Sweden. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 17 : &#8216;Beside&#8217; means by &#8216;the side of nr &#8216;next to&#8217;.<br />
&#8216;Besides&#8217; means &#8216;in addition to&#8217;:<br />
e.g. : 28. His house is besides the temple. (W)<br />
His house is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">beside</span> the temple. (R)</p>
<p>29. Beside Rama, Krishna was also injured. (W)<br />
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Besides</span> Rama, Krishna was also injured. (R)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>(C) USAGE OF NOUNS :</p>
<p>Rule 18 : Some uncountable nouns are generally used in the Singular Number. They have no Plural form.<br />
e.g. : information luggage news furniture<br />
machinery poetry alphabet scenery<br />
bedding clothing bread soap advice paper etc.</p>
<p>ఫై పదాలకు బహువచన రూపం ఉండదు. వాటిని ఎల్లప్పుడు ఏక వచనంగానే భావించాలి.వాటి ముందు a గాని an గాని, ఉపయోగింపరాదు.</p>
<p>furnitures (Wrong) &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; furniture (Right)<br />
alphabets (Wrong) &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.. alphabet (Right)</p>
<p>30. I know the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">alphabets</span>. (W)<br />
I know the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">alphabet</span>. (R)</p>
<p>31. He gave me wrong <span style="text-decoration: underline;">advices</span>. (W)<br />
He gave me wrong <span style="text-decoration: underline;">advice</span>. (R)</p>
<p>32. We heard <span style="text-decoration: underline;">a good news.</span> (W)<br />
We heard <span style="text-decoration: underline;">good news.</span> (R)</p>
<p>Rule 19 : పైన పేర్కొనబడ్డ uncountable Nouns Subject గా వాడబడినప్పుడు క్రియాపదము ఏకవచనంలో ఉండాలి.<br />
e.g. : 33. Where <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> my <span style="text-decoration: underline;">luggages?</span> (W)<br />
Where <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> my <span style="text-decoration: underline;">luggage?</span> (R)</p>
<p>34. The news <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> true. (W)<br />
The news <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> true. (R)</p>
<p>35. The news of the air crash <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> shocking. (W)<br />
The news of the air crash <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> shocking. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 20 : Some nouns appear plural in form but they are used as singular.<br />
(కొన్ని నామవాచకాలు బహువచనాలుగా కన్పించినా వాటిని ఏకవచనంగానే ప్రయోగించాలి.)<br />
Branches of learning: Mathematics, Physics, Civics, Politics, Statistics, Mechanics etc.<br />
Diseases : Measles, Mumps<br />
Games : Billiards, Draughts, Gymnastics.<br />
Other words : premises, innings, summons, wages, gallows etc.</p>
<p>e.g. : 36. Mathematics <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> his favourite subject. (W)<br />
Mathematics <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> his favourite subject. (R)</p>
<p>37. Measles <span style="text-decoration: underline;">have</span> broken out in the city. (W)<br />
Measles <span style="text-decoration: underline;">has</span> broken out in the city. (R)</p>
<p>38. Summons <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> served on him. (W)<br />
Summons <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> served on him. (R)</p>
<p>39. Billiards <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> interesting. (W)<br />
Billiards <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> interesting. (R)</p>
<p>40. The first innings <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> over. (W)<br />
The first innings <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> over. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 21 : Some nouns are always used in plural.<br />
(ఈ క్రింది నామవాచకాలను ఎల్లపుడు బహువచన రూపంలోనే వాడాలి)<br />
Articles of dress : shoes, trousers etc.<br />
Instruments: scissors, spectacles, bellows, tongs etc.<br />
Other nouns : alms, ashes, annals, assets, thanks, proceeds, savings, spirits, riches, contents etc.<br />
(ఈ పాదాలన్నింటిని బహువచనంలోనే వాడాలి. బహువచన క్రియనే ఉపయోగించాలి.)</p>
<p>e.g : 41. These scissors <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> very sharp. (W)<br />
These scissors <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> very sharp. (R)</p>
<p>42. This <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> my spectacles. (W)<br />
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">These are</span> my <span style="text-decoration: underline;">spectacles</span>. (R)</p>
<p>43. Father bought a bag of <span style="text-decoration: underline;">rices</span>. (W)<br />
Father bought a bag of <span style="text-decoration: underline;">rice</span>. (R)</p>
<p>Exception: (మినహాయింపు)<br />
A pair వాడబడినప్పుడు ఏకవచన క్రియనే వాడాలి.<br />
e.g. : 44. A pair of shoes <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> all I want. (W)<br />
A pair of shoes <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> all I want. (R)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Rule 22 : Plurals of compound words are formed by adding &#8216;s&#8217; to the main word.<br />
e.g. : 45. I have two <span style="text-decoration: underline;">brother-in-laws.</span> (W)<br />
I have two <span style="text-decoration: underline;">brothers-in-law</span>. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 23 : The following words do not take plural when preceded by a numerical.<br />
(ఈ క్రింది పదాల ముందు సంఖ్యారూపక పదమున్నపుడు ఆ పదాలను బహువచనంలో వ్రాయరాదు)<br />
hundred, dozen, thousand, lakh, million etc.<br />
e.g. : 46. I need five <span style="text-decoration: underline;">hundreds</span> rupees. (W)<br />
I need five <span style="text-decoration: underline;">hundred</span> rupees. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 24 : The meaning of brother or sister is included in the word ’cousin&#8217;. So don&#8217;t add &#8216;brother&#8217; or &#8216;sister&#8217; after &#8216;cousin&#8217;.<br />
(Cousin అను పదము తర్వాత brother గాని sister అను పదము గాని ప్రయోగింపరాదు)<br />
e.g. : 47. Radha is my <span style="text-decoration: underline;">cousin sister</span>. (W)<br />
Radha is my <span style="text-decoration: underline;">cousin</span>. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 25 : Running is not used with age.<br />
(వయస్సు గురించి చెప్పేటప్పుడు running ప్రయోగించరాదు.)<br />
e.g. : 48. Gopal is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">running sixteen</span>. (W)<br />
Gopal is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">sixteen</span>. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 26 : The words &#8216;male&#8217;, &#8216;female&#8217; are used as Adjectives but not as Nouns. &#8216;Men&#8217; and &#8216;Women&#8217; are used as Nouns.<br />
(male, female అను పదాలను విశేషణాలుగా ప్రయోగిస్తారు. అవి నామవాచకాలు కావు. నామవాచకాలుగా male, female ప్రయోగించాలి.)</p>
<p>e.g. : 49. There are twenty <span style="text-decoration: underline;">females</span> working here. (W)<br />
There are twenty <span style="text-decoration: underline;">women</span> working here. (R)</p>
<p>50. Five hundred <span style="text-decoration: underline;">males</span> attended the meeting. (W)<br />
Five hundred <span style="text-decoration: underline;">men</span> attended the meeting. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 27 : When two nouns are in apposition &#8216;s&#8217; is added to the second word.<br />
e.g. : 51. It is my <span style="text-decoration: underline;">sister&#8217;s Kamala&#8217;s</span> house. (W)<br />
It is my <span style="text-decoration: underline;">sister Kamaia&#8217;s</span> house. (R)</p>
<p>(D) USAGE OF PRONOUNS :</p>
<p>Rule 28 : To the word yours apostrophe is not added.<br />
e.g. : 52. Your&#8217;s faithfully. (W)<br />
Yours faithfully. (R)</p>
<p>53. This book is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">your&#8217;s</span>. (W)<br />
This book is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">yours</span>. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 29 : The first person comes last. The second person is placed before the third.<br />
e.g. : 54. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">I and Gopal</span> went to the Zoo. (W)<br />
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Gopal and I</span> went to the Zoo. (R)</p>
<p>55. Ravi invited <span style="text-decoration: underline;">me and you</span> to dinner. (W)<br />
Ravi invited <span style="text-decoration: underline;">you and me</span> to dinner. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 30 : When a personal pronoun is used as the object of a verb, it is placed in the objective case.<br />
e.g. : 56. I accused <span style="text-decoration: underline;">she</span> of theft. (W)<br />
I accused <span style="text-decoration: underline;">her</span> of theft. (R)</p>
<p>57. How long did you wait for <span style="text-decoration: underline;">myself</span>? (W)<br />
How long did you wait for <span style="text-decoration: underline;">me</span>? (R)</p>
<p>58. Besides <span style="text-decoration: underline;">he</span>, many others voted for me. (W)<br />
Besides <span style="text-decoration: underline;">him</span>, many others voted for me. (R)</p>
<p>59. It is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">me</span> that scored the goal. (W)<br />
It is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">I</span> that scored the goal. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 31 : If a pronoun stands for a collective noun singular verb is used. If it stands for separate Individuals plural verb is used.<br />
(కొన్ని సామూహిక పద నామవాచకాలు గుంపును నిర్దేశిస్తే క్రియ ఏకవచనంలో ఉండాలి లేక ఆ నామవాచకం వేర్వేరు వ్యక్తులను నిర్దేశిస్తే క్రియ బహువచనంలో ఉండాలి.)<br />
e.g. : 60. The fleet, after it had served, <span style="text-decoration: underline;">were</span> withdrawn. (W)<br />
The fleet, after it had served, <span style="text-decoration: underline;">was</span> withdrawn. (R)</p>
<p>61. The committee <span style="text-decoration: underline;">was</span> divided in their opinion. (W)<br />
The committee <span style="text-decoration: underline;">were</span> divided in their opinion. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 32 : The verbs &#8216;enjoy&#8217;, &#8216;avail&#8217; take Reflexive pronouns.<br />
e.g. : 62. He <span style="text-decoration: underline;">enjoyed</span> during the holidays. (W)<br />
He <span style="text-decoration: underline;">enjoyed himself</span> during the holidays. (R)</p>
<p>63. We <span style="text-decoration: underline;">avail</span> the opportunity. (W)<br />
We <span style="text-decoration: underline;">avail ourselves</span> of the opportunity. (R)<br />
avail + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;. self + of + sth</p>
<p>Rule 33 : A relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender, number and person.<br />
e.g. : 64. It is I <span style="text-decoration: underline;">who</span> is to blame. (W)<br />
It is I <span style="text-decoration: underline;">who am</span> to blame. (R)</p>
<p>65. He is one of the Directors <span style="text-decoration: underline;">who has</span> served the company. (W)<br />
He is one of the Directors <span style="text-decoration: underline;">who have</span> served the company. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 34 : &#8216;Who&#8217; is used for persons. &#8216;Which&#8217; is used for animals and lifeless objects.<br />
e.g. : 66. A triangle <span style="text-decoration: underline;">who</span> has three sides equal is called an equilateral triangle. (W)<br />
A triangle <span style="text-decoration: underline;">which</span> has three sides equal is called an equilateral triangle. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 35 : Each, every, anybody, nobody, everybody, either, neither should always be treated as singular.<br />
(Each, every, anybody, nobody మొదలగు పదాలను ఎల్లప్పుడూ ఏకవచన పదాలుగా పరిగణించాలి)<br />
e.g. : 67. Each of these rooms <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> well ventilated. (W)<br />
Each of these rooms <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> well ventilated. (R)</p>
<p>68. Neither John nor Henry <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> Indians. (W)<br />
Neither John nor Henry <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is an</span> Indian. (R)</p>
<p>69. Every boy <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> given a prize. (W)<br />
Every boy <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> given a prize. (R)</p>
<p>70. Either Sekhar or his brother <span style="text-decoration: underline;">do</span> the work. (W)<br />
Either Sekhar or his brother <span style="text-decoration: underline;">does</span> the work. (R)</p>
<p>71. None of these students <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> here. (W)<br />
None of these students <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> here. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 36 : Use &#8216;each other&#8217; for two, &#8216;one another&#8217; for more than two.<br />
e.g. : 72. The two girls hated <span style="text-decoration: underline;">one another</span>. (W)<br />
The two girls hated <span style="text-decoration: underline;">each other</span>. (R)</p>
<p>73. The four thieves accused <span style="text-decoration: underline;">each other</span>. (W)<br />
The four thieves accused <span style="text-decoration: underline;">one another.</span> (R)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>(E) USAGE OF ADJECTIVES :</p>
<p>Rule 37 : Double Comparatives or double Superlatives are not used:<br />
e.g. : 74. Sita is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">more prettier</span> than Kamala. (W)<br />
Sita is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">prettier</span> than Kamala. (R)</p>
<p>75. Raju is the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">most tallest</span> boy. (W)<br />
Raju is the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">tallest</span> boy. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 38 : Comparatives like prefer, preferable &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; superior, inferior, junior, senior, prior, exterior, interior are followed by &#8216;to&#8217; but not &#8216;than&#8217;.<br />
eg. : 76. Sarala is junior <span style="text-decoration: underline;">than</span> Kamala. (W)<br />
Sarala is junior <span style="text-decoration: underline;">to</span> Kamala. (R)</p>
<p>77. This cloth is inferior <span style="text-decoration: underline;">than</span> that cloth. (W)<br />
This cloth is inferior <span style="text-decoration: underline;">to</span> that cloth. (R)</p>
<p>78. Coffee is preferable <span style="text-decoration: underline;">than</span> tea.(W)<br />
Coffee is preferable <span style="text-decoration: underline;">to</span> tea. (R)</p>
<p>79. I prefer reading stories <span style="text-decoration: underline;">than</span> seeing TV. (W)<br />
I prefer reading stories <span style="text-decoration: underline;">to</span> seeing TV. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 39 : &#8216;Some&#8217; is used in the affirmative. &#8216;Any&#8217; is used in the negative.<br />
e.g. : 80. I am hungry, I want <span style="text-decoration: underline;">any</span> food. (W)<br />
I am hungry, I want <span style="text-decoration: underline;">some</span> food. (R)</p>
<p>81. The plate does not have <span style="text-decoration: underline;">some</span> fresh cake. (W)<br />
The plate does not have <span style="text-decoration: underline;">any</span> fresh cake. (R)</p>
<p>Much is used in case of uncountables. Many is used in case of countables.</p>
<p>82. There are <span style="text-decoration: underline;">much</span> plans before me. (W)<br />
There are <span style="text-decoration: underline;">many</span> plans before me. (R)</p>
<p>83. There is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">many</span> work for me to do. (W)<br />
There is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">much</span> work for me to do. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 40 : &#8216;Many&#8217; is followed by plural verb. &#8216;Manya&#8217; is followed by singular verb.</p>
<p>eg. : 84. Many a passenger <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> hurt. (W)<br />
Many a passenger <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> hurt. (R)</p>
<p>85. Many passengers <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> hurt. (W)<br />
Many passengers <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> hurt. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 41 : &#8216;Elder&#8217; means the one above. &#8216;Older&#8217; means more aged.<br />
eg. : 86. Prakash is my <span style="text-decoration: underline;">older</span> brother. (W)<br />
Prakash is my <span style="text-decoration: underline;">elder</span> brother. (R)</p>
<p>87. Prakash is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">elder</span> than Raghu. (W)<br />
Prakash is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">older</span> than Raghu. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 42 : Superlative Degree cannot be used when the comparison is only between two.<br />
e.g. : 88. This short story is the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">best</span> of the two. (W)<br />
This short story is the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">better</span> of the two. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 43 : Some Adjectives have no degrees of comparison. They are perfect, unique, eternal, round etc.<br />
e.g. : 89. It is the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">most unique</span> work. (W)<br />
It is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">unique</span> work. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 44 : In certain comparisons &#8216;that of&#8217; should be used.<br />
e.g. : 90. The climate of Bangalore is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">better than</span> Hyderabad. (W)<br />
The climate of Bangalore is better than <span style="text-decoration: underline;">that of</span> Hyderabad. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 45 : Farther = more distance; further = beyond.<br />
e.g. : 91. He wants to study <span style="text-decoration: underline;">farther</span>. (W)<br />
He wants to study <span style="text-decoration: underline;">further</span>. (R)</p>
<p>92. Let us not walk any <span style="text-decoration: underline;">further</span>. (W)<br />
Let us not walk any <span style="text-decoration: underline;">farther</span>. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 46 : When &#8216;both&#8217; is used as an adjective it should be followed by &#8216;the&#8217;.<br />
e.g. : 93. We were present on <span style="text-decoration: underline;">both</span> days. (W)<br />
We were present on <span style="text-decoration: underline;">both the</span> days. (R)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>(F) USAGE OF ADVERBS :</p>
<p>e.g. : 94. It is a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">bitter</span> cold today. (W)<br />
It is a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">bitterly</span> cold today. (R)</p>
<p>95. She is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">so</span> rich. (W)<br />
She is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">very</span> rich. (R)</p>
<p>96. Drinking is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">quite</span> harmful for health. (W)<br />
Drinking is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">very</span> harmful for health. (R)</p>
<p>97. He spoke <span style="text-decoration: underline;">fluent</span>. (W)<br />
He spoke <span style="text-decoration: underline;">fluently</span>. (R)</p>
<p>98. It is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">so</span> hot to go out. (W)<br />
It is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">too</span> hot to go out. (R)</p>
<p>99. He is too weak <span style="text-decoration: underline;">that he cannot</span> walk. (W)<br />
He is too weak <span style="text-decoration: underline;">to</span> walk. (R)<br />
(or)<br />
He is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">so</span> weak that he cannot walk. (R)</p>
<p>100. The boy sat <span style="text-decoration: underline;">alonely</span>. (W)<br />
The boy sat <span style="text-decoration: underline;">alone</span>. (R)</p>
<p>101. He comes <span style="text-decoration: underline;">late often</span> to school. (W)<br />
He <span style="text-decoration: underline;">often comes late</span> to school. (R)</p>
<p>102. He only married <span style="text-decoration: underline;">her</span> for her money. (W)<br />
He married her only <span style="text-decoration: underline;">for</span> her money. (R)</p>
<p>103. Last night you returned <span style="text-decoration: underline;">lately</span>. (W)<br />
Last night you returned <span style="text-decoration: underline;">late</span>. (R)</p>
<p>104. He is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">enough wise</span> to understand the problem. (W)<br />
He is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">wise enough</span> to understand the problem. (R)</p>
<p>105. I met him three weeks <span style="text-decoration: underline;">before</span>. (W)<br />
I met him three weeks <span style="text-decoration: underline;">ago</span>. (R)</p>
<p>106. His daughter is working <span style="text-decoration: underline;">hardly</span>. (W)<br />
His daughter is working <span style="text-decoration: underline;">hard</span>. (R)</p>
<p>107. I came <span style="text-decoration: underline;">directly</span> to my house. (W)<br />
I came <span style="text-decoration: underline;">direct</span> to my house. (R)</p>
<p>108. She bore <span style="text-decoration: underline;">cheerfully</span> her miseries. (W)<br />
She bore her miseries <span style="text-decoration: underline;">cheerfully</span>. (R)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>(G) USAGE OF VERB FORMS :</p>
<p>Rule 47 : Simple Present Tense is used to express a habit.<br />
e.g. : 109. She <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is drinking</span> milk daily. (W)<br />
She <span style="text-decoration: underline;">drinks</span> milk daily. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 48 : The Present Perfect Continuous Tense is used with &#8216;since&#8217; and &#8216;for&#8217;.<br />
e.g. : 110. They <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are working here</span> for six years. (W)<br />
They <span style="text-decoration: underline;">have been working</span> here for six years. (R)</p>
<p>111. She <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is typing from</span> 2 p.m. (W)<br />
She <span style="text-decoration: underline;">has been typing since</span> 2 p.m. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 49 : Some words like taste, hear, smell, feel, love, like, have, own, belong etc., are not used in the continuous tense form.<br />
e.g. : 112. I <span style="text-decoration: underline;">am having</span> two Maruthi cars. (W)<br />
I <span style="text-decoration: underline;">have</span> two Maruthi cars. (R)</p>
<p>113. This house <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is belonging</span> to Ravi. (W)<br />
This house <span style="text-decoration: underline;">belongs</span> to Ravi. (R)</p>
<p>114. It is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">tasting</span> good. (W)<br />
It <span style="text-decoration: underline;">tastes</span> good. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 50 : Past Tense is used after &#8216;It is time&#8217; &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;<br />
e.g. : 115. It is time you <span style="text-decoration: underline;">leave</span> this place. (W)<br />
It is time you <span style="text-decoration: underline;">left</span> this place. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 51 : Simple Past is used to denote past action.<br />
e.g. : 116. Last year my grandfather <span style="text-decoration: underline;">had died</span>. (W)<br />
Last year my grandfather <span style="text-decoration: underline;">died</span>. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 52 : Present Perfect Tense is used to denote actions just completed.<br />
e.g. : 117. The postman <span style="text-decoration: underline;">just came</span>. (W)<br />
The postman <span style="text-decoration: underline;">has just come</span>. (R)</p>
<p>118. I just <span style="text-decoration: underline;">received</span> the telegram. (W)<br />
I <span style="text-decoration: underline;">have</span> just <span style="text-decoration: underline;">received</span> the telegram. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 53 : Use Simple Present to denote universal truths.<br />
119. The earth was round. (W)<br />
The earth <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> round. (R)</p>
<p>120. The sun rose in the east. (W)<br />
The sun <span style="text-decoration: underline;">rises</span> in the east. (R)</p>
<p>121. Honesty will be the best policy. (W)<br />
Honesty <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> the best policy. (R)</p>
<p>When two past actions are mentioned, the earlier. (W)<br />
I have just received the telegram. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 54 : When two past actions are mentioned, the earlier action should be in Past Perfect Tense :<br />
(రెండు జరిగిన పనులను తెలిపేటప్పుడు ముందు జరిగిన పనిని Past Perfect Tense లో చెప్పాలి.)<br />
122. The patient died before the doctor arrived. (W)<br />
The patient <span style="text-decoration: underline;">had died</span> before the doctor arrived.(R)</p>
<p>123. She took her supper before she went to bed. (W)<br />
She <span style="text-decoration: underline;">had taken</span> her supper before she went to bed. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 55 : Future Tense is not used after some conjunctions like until, when, before, after etc.<br />
124. She will come when she <span style="text-decoration: underline;">will be</span> ready. (W)<br />
She will come when she <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> ready. (R)</p>
<p>125. I shall call on you when the doctor <span style="text-decoration: underline;">will be</span> ready. (W)<br />
I shall call on you when the doctor <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> ready. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 56 : Don&#8217;t use &#8216;will&#8217; in First Person in questions.<br />
126. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Will</span> I get you coffee ? (W)<br />
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Shall</span> I get you coffee ? (R)</p>
<p>Rule 57 : &#8216;Could&#8217; means capacity. &#8216;Was able&#8217; denotes actual performance.<br />
e.g. : 127. As he was a good batsman, he <span style="text-decoration: underline;">could</span> score a century. (W)<br />
As he was a good batsman, he <span style="text-decoration: underline;">was able</span> to score a century. (R)</p>
<p>128. I knew he <span style="text-decoration: underline;">was able to</span> do it. (W)<br />
I knew he <span style="text-decoration: underline;">could</span> do it. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 58 : &#8216;Lay&#8217; means to place. &#8216;Lie&#8217; means in a resting position.<br />
e.g. : 129. You are tired. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Lay</span> here. (W)<br />
You are tired. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Lie</span> here. (R)</p>
<p>130. She <span style="text-decoration: underline;">lies</span> here books on the table. (W)<br />
She <span style="text-decoration: underline;">lays</span> her books on the table. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 59 : &#8216;Hanged&#8217; means &#8216;Caused death&#8217;. Hung means &#8216;to display&#8217;.<br />
e.g. : 131. She <span style="text-decoration: underline;">hanged</span> her saree here. (W)<br />
She <span style="text-decoration: underline;">hung</span> her saree here. (R)</p>
<p>132. The murderer <span style="text-decoration: underline;">was hung</span>. (W)<br />
The murderer <span style="text-decoration: underline;">was hanged</span>. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 60 : &#8216;Ing&#8217; form is used after certain verbs and phrases like avoid, imagine, enjoy, finish, practise, with a view to, can&#8217;t help, look forward to etc.<br />
e.g. : 133. I <span style="text-decoration: underline;">avoid</span> to speak to her. (W)<br />
I <span style="text-decoration: underline;">avoid speaking</span> to her. (R)</p>
<p>134. She went to Mysore <span style="text-decoration: underline;">with a view to see</span> Brindavan Gardens. (W)<br />
She went to Mysore <span style="text-decoration: underline;">with a view to seeing</span> Brindavan Gardens. (R)</p>
<p>135. She looks <span style="text-decoration: underline;">forward to help</span> me. (W)<br />
She looks <span style="text-decoration: underline;">forward to helping</span> me. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 61 : &#8216;To&#8217; infinitive is used after certain verbs like allow, order, command, wish, request, permit, encourage etc.<br />
e.g. 136. He ordered me <span style="text-decoration: underline;">wait</span>. (W)<br />
He ordered me to <span style="text-decoration: underline;">wait</span>. (R)</p>
<p>137. I allowed him <span style="text-decoration: underline;">read</span> my essay. (W)<br />
I allowed him <span style="text-decoration: underline;">to read</span> my essay. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 62 : In Interrogative sentences the helping verb is placed before the subject.<br />
e.g. : 138. Where <span style="text-decoration: underline;">you will</span> go ? (W)<br />
Where <span style="text-decoration: underline;">will you</span> go ? (R)</p>
<p>Rule 63 : In a phrase like &#8216;Being a &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8217; it is placed before it.<br />
e.g. : 139. <span style="text-decoration: underline;">Being</span> a hot day, we stayed indoors. (W)<br />
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">It being</span> a hot day, we stayed indoors. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 64 : Lest is followed by should :<br />
e.g. : 140. He ran away lest he <span style="text-decoration: underline;">might</span> be caught. (W)<br />
He ran away lest he <span style="text-decoration: underline;">should be</span> caught. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 65 : The verb must agree with the subject in all aspects.<br />
e.g. : 141. She <span style="text-decoration: underline;">wash</span> her clothes. (W)<br />
She <span style="text-decoration: underline;">washes</span> her clothes. (R)</p>
<p>142. One of my friends <span style="text-decoration: underline;">have gone</span> to the Andamans. (W)<br />
One of my friends <span style="text-decoration: underline;">has gone</span> to the Andamans. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 66 : Errors of Proximity:<br />
e.g. : 143. The cost of all things <span style="text-decoration: underline;">have</span> gone up. (W)<br />
The cost of all things <span style="text-decoration: underline;">has</span> gone up. (R)</p>
<p>144. The state of affairs <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> causing anxiety. (W)<br />
The state of affairs <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> causing anxiety. (R)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Rule 67 : When the subject is the formal &#8216;There&#8217;, the verb agrees with the real subject that follows it.<br />
e.g. : 145. There <span style="text-decoration: underline;">has</span> been many difficulties. (W)<br />
There <span style="text-decoration: underline;">have</span> been many difficulties. (R)</p>
<p>146. There <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> nothing to fear. (W)<br />
There <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> nothing to fear. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 68 : When two subjects are connected with &#8216;not only &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230; but also&#8217; the verb agrees with the latter subject.<br />
e.g. : 147. Not only the master but also his servants <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> at work. (W)<br />
Not only the master but also his servants <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> at work. (R)</p>
<p>148. Not only the soldiers but also their captain <span style="text-decoration: underline;">have</span> been captured. (W)<br />
Not only the soldiers but also their captain <span style="text-decoration: underline;">has</span> been captured. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 69 : In a sentence when two nouns as subjects refer to the same thing or person, the verb must be singular.<br />
e.g. : 149. Rice and curry <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> his favourite dish. (W)<br />
Rice and curry <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> his favourite dish. (R)</p>
<p>150. The poet and dramatist <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> honoured. (W)<br />
The poet and dramatist <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> honoured. (R)</p>
<p>Rule 70 : When the subject consists of two nouns or pronouns joined with &#8216;with&#8217;, or &#8216;as well as&#8217; the verb agrees with the first subject.<br />
(ఒక వాక్యంలో రెండు నామవాచకాలు గాని సర్వనామాలు గాని కర్తలుగా ఉన్నట్లయితే ఆ వాక్యంలోని క్రియ మొదటి కర్త వచనం బట్టి ఉంటుంది)</p>
<p>e.g. : 151. Good students as well as good staff <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is</span> necessary to show good results. (W)<br />
Good students as well as good staff <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> necessary to show good results. (R)</p>
<p>152. The Minister with all the guests <span style="text-decoration: underline;">have</span> arrived. (W)<br />
The Minister with all the guests <span style="text-decoration: underline;">has</span> arrived. (R)</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">Exercises</span></p>
<p>1. Read the following sentences, correct the underlined part of each sentence, and rewrite them correctly. The entire sentence must be written in exams.</p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Khyati is one of my best <span style="text-decoration: underline;">friend</span>.<br />
Answer:<br />
Khyati is one of my best friends.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">sceneries of Araku Valiey are</span> beautiful.<br />
Answer:<br />
The scenery of Araku Valley is beautiful.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
The news <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> false.<br />
Answer:<br />
The news is false.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
The audience <span style="text-decoration: underline;">were</span> impressed by the magic show.<br />
Answer:<br />
The audience was impressed by the magic show.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">scissor is</span> are very sharp.<br />
Answer:<br />
The scissors are very sharp.</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
He has two <span style="text-decoration: underline;">brother-in-laws</span>.<br />
Answer:<br />
He has two brothers-in-law.</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Myself is</span> Gulshan from Kashmir.<br />
Answer:<br />
I am Gulshan from Kashmir.</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
We should <span style="text-decoration: underline;">avail</span> the opportunity.<br />
Answer:<br />
We should avail ourselves of the opportunity.</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
I <span style="text-decoration: underline;">am loving</span> my country.<br />
Answer:<br />
I love my country.</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
We <span style="text-decoration: underline;">have submitted</span> our project an hour ago.<br />
Answer:<br />
We submitted our project an hour ago.</p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
Chitra has a sweet voice, <span style="text-decoration: underline;">isn’t it</span> ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Chitra has a sweet voice, doesn&#8217;t she?</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 12.<br />
It&#8217;s time you <span style="text-decoration: underline;">start</span> preparation for the examinations.<br />
Answer:<br />
It&#8217;s time you started preparation for the examinations.</p>
<p>Question 13.<br />
Before we reached the theatre, the movie <span style="text-decoration: underline;">began already</span>.<br />
Answer:<br />
Before we reached the theatre, the movie had already begun.</p>
<p>Question 14.<br />
I <span style="text-decoration: underline;">was studied</span> in this college.<br />
Answer:<br />
I studied in this college. OR I was a student in this college.</p>
<p>Question 15.<br />
The soldiers along with the major <span style="text-decoration: underline;">was</span> wounded in the war.<br />
Answer:<br />
The soldiers along with the major were wounded in the war.</p>
<p>Question 16.<br />
The <span style="text-decoration: underline;">two first chapters</span> of the novel are very boring.<br />
Answer:<br />
The first two chapters of the novel are very boring.</p>
<p>Question 17.<br />
Mihira wore a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">red Bengal cotton gorgeous</span> sari.<br />
Answer:<br />
Mihira wore a gorgeous red Bengal cotton sari.</p>
<p>Question 18.<br />
Vivek is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">too</span> intelligent.<br />
Answer:<br />
Vivek is very intelligent.</p>
<p>Question 19.<br />
Teja drives car very <span style="text-decoration: underline;">fastly</span>.<br />
Answer:<br />
Teja drives car very fast.</p>
<p>Question 20.<br />
He considers her <span style="text-decoration: underline;">as</span> his guide.<br />
Answer:<br />
He considers her his guide.</p>
<p>Question 21.<br />
He has been reading the novel <span style="text-decoration: underline;">since</span> three hours.<br />
Answer:<br />
He has been reading the novel for three hours.</p>
<p>Question 22.<br />
I met <span style="text-decoration: underline;">an European</span> yesterday.<br />
Answer:<br />
I met a European yesterday.</p>
<p>Question 23.<br />
Although he had a fever, <span style="text-decoration: underline;">but</span> he attended the meeting.<br />
Answer:<br />
Although he had a fever, he attended the meeting.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 24.<br />
This is the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">most perfect</span> answer to the given question.<br />
Answer:<br />
This is the perfect answer to the given question.</p>
<p>Question 25.<br />
She is the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">most tallest</span> girl of the class.<br />
Answer:<br />
She is the tallest girl of the class.</p>
<p>Question 26.<br />
This is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">the best</span> of the two designs.<br />
Answer:<br />
This is the better of the two designs.</p>
<p>Question 27.<br />
The climate of Visakhapatnam is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">better than Guntur</span>.<br />
Answer:<br />
The climate of Visakhapatnam is better than that of Guntur.</p>
<p>Question 28.<br />
Veeru is junior <span style="text-decoration: underline;">than</span> Indraneel.<br />
Answer:<br />
Veeru is junior to Indraneel.</p>
<p>Question 29.<br />
He is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">elder</span> than all other boys in the class.<br />
Answer:<br />
He is older than all other boys in the class.</p>
<p>Question 30.<br />
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Teacher&#8217;s Day</span> is celebrated on September 5th in India.<br />
Answer:<br />
Teacher&#8217;s Day is celebrated on the 5th of September in India.</p>
<p>Question 31.<br />
That was a <span style="text-decoration: underline;">blunder mistake</span> by him.<br />
Answer:<br />
That was a blunder by him. OR That was a mistake by him.</p>
<p>Question 32.<br />
Ananya <span style="text-decoration: underline;">returned back</span> from Bangalore.<br />
Answer:<br />
Ananya returned from Bangalore.</p>
<p>Question 33.<br />
I was late <span style="text-decoration: underline;">why</span> because I had missed the bus.<br />
Answer:<br />
I was late because I had missed the bus.</p>
<p>Question 34.<br />
Meera is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">good in</span> English.<br />
Answer:<br />
Meera is good at English.</p>
<p>Question 35.<br />
Abhigna <span style="text-decoration: underline;">listens</span> melodious songs.<br />
Answer:<br />
Abhigna listens to melodious songs.</p>
<p>Question 36.<br />
We watched the film <span style="text-decoration: underline;">in TV</span>.<br />
Answer:<br />
We watched the film on TV.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 37.<br />
We should <span style="text-decoration: underline;">pray God</span>.<br />
Answer:<br />
We should pray to God.</p>
<p>Question 38.<br />
The little boy is suffering <span style="text-decoration: underline;">with</span> fever.<br />
Answer:<br />
The little boy is suffering from fever.</p>
<p>Question 39.<br />
They discussed <span style="text-decoration: underline;">about</span> films.<br />
Answer:<br />
They discussed films.</p>
<p>Question 40.<br />
We are <span style="text-decoration: underline;">awaiting</span> for the results.<br />
Answer:<br />
We are awaiting the results.</p>
<p>Question 41.<br />
Videep was elected <span style="text-decoration: underline;">as</span> general secretary.<br />
Answer:<br />
Videep was elected general secretary.</p>
<p>Question 42.<br />
Vihan is my <span style="text-decoration: underline;">cousin brother</span>.<br />
Answer:<br />
Vihan is my cousin.</p>
<p>Question 43.<br />
I go to the post office <span style="text-decoration: underline;">by walk</span>.<br />
Answer:<br />
I go to the post office on foot.</p>
<p>Question 44.<br />
We had <span style="text-decoration: underline;">better to wake up</span> early.<br />
Answer:<br />
We had better wake up early.</p>
<p>Question 45.<br />
She is <span style="text-decoration: underline;">running twenty-five</span>.<br />
Answer:<br />
She is twenty-five years old.</p>
<p>Question 46.<br />
The exam has been <span style="text-decoration: underline;">preponed to tomorrow</span>.<br />
Answer:<br />
The exam has been postponed to tomorrow.</p>
<p>Question 47.<br />
The students should pay their fees to the <span style="text-decoration: underline;">concerned clerk</span>.<br />
Answer:<br />
The students should pay their fees to the clerk concerned.</p>
<p>Question 48.<br />
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Corrupted</span> officers should be punished severely.<br />
Answer:<br />
Corrupt officers should be punished severely.</p>
<p>Question 49.<br />
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">According to me,</span> there is no short cut to success.<br />
Answer:<br />
In my opinion, there is no short cut to success.</p>
<p>Question 50.<br />
May I know your <span style="text-decoration: underline;">good name</span> ?<br />
Answer:<br />
May I know your name?</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>2. Rewrite the following sentences correcting the underlined part. The entire sentence must be written underlining the corrected part.</p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
The rose <span style="text-decoration: underline;">is smelling</span> sweet.<br />
Answer:<br />
The rose smells sweet.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Laahiri <span style="text-decoration: underline;">has seen</span> him long ago.<br />
Answer:<br />
Laahiri saw him long ago.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Mathematics <span style="text-decoration: underline;">are</span> hard subject.<br />
Answer:<br />
Mathematics is a hard subject.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Hardly he saw</span> the tiger when he ran away.<br />
Answer:<br />
Hardly had he seen the tiger when he ran away.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
He <span style="text-decoration: underline;">entered into</span> the hall late.<br />
Answer:<br />
He entered the hall late.</p>
<p>3. Rewrite the following sentences correcting the underlined part. The entire sentence must be written underlining the corrected part.</p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Raghu has three <span style="text-decoration: underline;">brother-in-laws</span>.<br />
Answer:<br />
Raghu has three brothers-in-law.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
<span style="text-decoration: underline;">Her both sons</span> are married.<br />
Answer:<br />
Both her sons are married.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Kittu <span style="text-decoration: underline;">has finished</span> his homework yesterday.<br />
Answer:<br />
Kittu finished his homework yesterday.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Common Errors Inter 1st Year English Grammar" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
We <span style="text-decoration: underline;">discussed about</span> Grammar.<br />
Answer:<br />
We discussed Grammar.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
I met <span style="text-decoration: underline;">an university professor</span> in the meeting.<br />
Answer:<br />
I met a university professor in the meeting.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
		<post-id xmlns="com-wordpress:feed-additions:1">19899</post-id>	</item>
		<item>
		<title>Units and Measurements Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 1</title>
		<link>https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-physics-chapter-1/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Srinivas]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sat, 17 Oct 2026 05:42:26 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[AP Inter 1st Year]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tsboardsolutions.in/?p=19910</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Regular practice with AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Units and Measurements Questions and Answers helps students stay prepared for examinations. AP Inter 1st Year Physics 1st Lesson Units and Measurements Questions and Answers I. Multiple Choice Questions Question 1. Pascal is the unit of (1) power (2) pressure (3) potential energy ... <a title="Units and Measurements Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 1" class="read-more" href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-physics-chapter-1/" aria-label="Read more about Units and Measurements Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 1">Read more</a>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Regular practice with <a href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-physics-study-material/">AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material</a> Chapter 1 Units and Measurements Questions and Answers helps students stay prepared for examinations.</p>
<h2>AP Inter 1st Year Physics 1st Lesson Units and Measurements Questions and Answers</h2>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">I. Multiple Choice Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Pascal is the unit of<br />
(1) power<br />
(2) pressure<br />
(3) potential energy<br />
(4) pressure gradient<br />
Answer:<br />
(2) pressure</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
When the number 0.046508 is reduced to four significant figures then it becomes<br />
(1) 0.04651<br />
(2) 4650<br />
(3) 4.651<br />
(4) 4.650<br />
Answer:<br />
(1) 0.04651</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Which of the following physical quantity has no dimensions?<br />
(1) Angular Velocity<br />
(2) Angular Acceleration<br />
(3) Angular Displacement<br />
(4) Stress<br />
Answer:<br />
(3) Angular Displacement</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Mention same dimensions in the dimensional formula of torque and angular momentum.<br />
(1) mass, time<br />
(2) time, length<br />
(3) mass, length<br />
(4) mass<br />
Answer:<br />
(3) mass, length</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
The velocity of an object varies with time as v = At<sup>2</sup> + Bt + C. If v and t are expressed in SI,<br />
what are the units of A, B and C ?<br />
(1) LT<sup>-1</sup><br />
(2) LT<sup>-2</sup><br />
(3) LT<sup>-3</sup><br />
(4) LT<sup>4</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
(1) LT<sup>-1</sup><br />
V = At<sup>2</sup> + Bt + C, From principal of Homogeneity. V = [LT<sup>-1</sup>]</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Which of the following equation is dimensionally correct?<br />
(1) \(\frac{1}{2}\)mV<sup>2</sup> = mgh<br />
(2) V = ut + at<br />
(3) s = ut + at<sup>3</sup><br />
(4) t = s + uv<br />
Answer:<br />
(1) \(\frac{1}{2}\)mV<sup>2</sup> = mgh</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
The velocity (V) of sound with air pressure (P) and density (d) of air are related as V ∝ P<sup>x</sup>d<sup>y</sup>. The value of x and y are.<br />
(1) 1, 1/2<br />
(2) -1/2, 1/2<br />
(3) 1/2, -1/2<br />
(4) 1/2, 1/2<br />
Answer:<br />
(3) 1/2, -1/2<br />
V = P<sup>x</sup>d<sup>y</sup> → LT<sup>-1</sup> = [ML<sup>-1</sup>T<sup>-2</sup>]<sup>x</sup> [ML<sup>-3</sup>]<sup>y</sup>.<br />
equality powers of M → x + y = 0 &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;.(1), L → 1 = -x &#8211; 3y &#8230;.(2)<br />
1 = y &#8211; 3y ⇒ -2y = 1 ⇒ y = -1/2, x = 1/2</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
The velocity of a body is given by V = At<sup>2</sup> + Bt + C. If V and t are expressed in SI units, then unit of A is<br />
(1) m/s<br />
(2) m/s<sup>2</sup><br />
(3) m/s<sup>3</sup><br />
(4) ms<br />
Answer:<br />
(3) m/s<sup>3</sup><br />
From principle of homogeneity, V = At<sup>2</sup> → A = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{t}^2}=\frac{\mathrm{LT}^{-1}}{\mathrm{~T}^2}\) = [LT<sup>3</sup>]</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
The dimensional formula for product of two physical quantities P and Q is ML<sup>2</sup> T<sup>-2</sup> and dimensional formula of P/ Q is MT<sup>-2</sup> then P is<br />
(1) force<br />
(2) displacement<br />
(3) acceleration<br />
(4) velocity<br />
Answer:<br />
(1) force<br />
P × Q = ML<sup>2</sup>T<sup>-2</sup> &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;(1), \(\frac{P}{Q}\) = mT<sup>2</sup> &#8230;(2)<br />
(1) × (2), P<sup>2</sup> M<sup>2</sup>L<sup>2</sup>T<sup>-2</sup> × MT<sup>-2</sup> = M<sup>2</sup>L<sup>2</sup>T<sup>-4</sup> ⇒ P = MLT<sup>-2</sup> = Force.</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
E, M, L and G denote energy, mass, angular momentum and gravitational constant respectively. Then the dimension of EL<sup>2</sup>M<sup>-5</sup>G<sup>-2</sup> is<br />
(1) angle<br />
(2) length<br />
(3) mass<br />
(4) time<br />
Answer:<br />
(1) angle</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">II. Fill in the Blanks</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Plane angle is the ratio of length of arc to ________.<br />
Answer:<br />
Radius</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Units and Measurements Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 1" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
The unit of plane angle is ________.<br />
Answer:<br />
Radian</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
The SI unit of luminous intensity is ______.<br />
Answer:<br />
Candela</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
The dimensional formula for the coefficient of viscosity is _______.<br />
Answer:<br />
ML<sup>-1</sup>T<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
The number of significant figures in 0.02308 is _____.<br />
Answer:<br />
4</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
If F, M and T are the force, mass and time, then FM<sup>-1</sup>T<sup>2</sup> denotes _____.<br />
Answer:<br />
Length<br />
FM<sup>-1</sup>T<sup>2</sup> = MLT<sup>-2</sup> M<sup>-1</sup>T<sup>2</sup> = [L]</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
A number 2.735 is rounded off to three significant figures is _______.<br />
Answer:<br />
2.74</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Planck&#8217;s constant and ______ have same dimensions.<br />
Answer:<br />
angular momentum</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
The dimensional formula of angular impulse is ________.<br />
Answer:<br />
ML<sup>2</sup>T<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
A force is represented by F = Ax<sup>2</sup> + Bt<sup>2</sup>, where x = distance and t = time then the dimensions of &#8216;A&#8217; ________.<br />
Answer:<br />
ML<sup>-1</sup>T<sup>2</sup><br />
Principle of Homogeneity:<br />
F = Ax<sup>2</sup> ⇒ A = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{x}^2}=\frac{\mathrm{MLT}^{-2}}{\mathrm{~L}^2}\), A = [ML<sup>-1</sup>T<sup>-2</sup>]</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">III. One Word Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
What is fundamental physical quantity?<br />
Answer:<br />
Fundamental Quantity : A fundamental quantity is one which is unique and freely existing. It does not depend on any other physical quantity.<br />
Ex : Length (L), Time (T), Mass (M) etc.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
What is derived physical quantity?<br />
Answer:<br />
Derived quantity: A derived quantity is produced by the combination of fundamental quanti¬ties (i.e., by division or by multiplication of fundamental quantities).<br />
Ex: Velocity = \(\frac{\text { displacement }}{\text { time }}=\frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{~T}}\) or LT<sup>-1</sup><br />
Acceleration = \(\frac{\text { change in velocity }}{\text { time }}=\frac{\mathrm{LT}^{-1}}{\mathrm{~T}}\) = LT<sup>-2</sup> etc.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
What is the SI unit of solid angle?<br />
Answer:<br />
Steradian (SI)</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Write any one physical constant that is having dimensions.<br />
Answer:<br />
Planck&#8217;s constant (D.F : M<sup>1</sup> L<sup>2</sup> T<sup>-1</sup>), Gravitational Constant (G) : M<sup>-1</sup>L<sup>3</sup>T<sup>-2</sup></p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Which physical quantity has negative dimensions in mass?<br />
Answer:<br />
Universal Gravitational Constant (G) = [M<sup>-1</sup> L<sup>3</sup> T<sup>-2</sup>]</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Which physical quantity is represented by gR, where R is the radius of the Earth?<br />
Answer:<br />
\(\sqrt{\mathrm{gR}}=\sqrt{\mathrm{LT}^{-2} \times \mathrm{L}}\) = [LT<sup>-1</sup> ] = Velocity</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Which physical quantity is represented by PV, where P is pressure and V is volume?<br />
Answer:<br />
PV = M<sup>1</sup>L<sup>1</sup>T<sup>-2</sup> × L<sup>3</sup> = [ML<sup>2</sup>T<sup>-2</sup>] = Work</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Name atleast one physical quantity whose SI unit is Nm .<br />
Answer:<br />
Pressure = force/area \(\frac{\mathrm{MLT}^{-2}}{\mathrm{~L}^2}\)<br />
= [M<sup>1</sup>L<sup>1</sup>T<sup>-2</sup>]; Nm<sup>-2</sup> (or) Pascal</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">IV. Very Short Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
What are significant figures and what do they represent when reporting the result of a measurement ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Significant figures represent all practically measured digits plus one uncertain digit at the end. When a result is reported in this way we can know up to what extent the value is reliable and also the amount of uncertainty in that reported value.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Distinguish between fundamental units and derived units.<br />
Answer:<br />
The units of fundamental physical quantities are called fundamental units.<br />
Ex : Kg, m, sec, etc.,<br />
The units of derived physical quantities are called derived units.<br />
Ex: m/sec, J, m/sec<sup>2</sup> etc.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
What are the two fundamental physical quantities used to measure angle ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Plane angle (θ) = Radian.<br />
Solid angle (ω) = Steradian.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Why do we have different units for the same physical quantity ?<br />
Answer:<br />
To measure the same physical quantity we use different units because sometimes the magnitude of the measured quantity value may be very big or very small.<br />
Ex:<br />
1. To measure astronomical distances, we will use light year.<br />
1 light year = 9.468 × 10<sup>15</sup>m.<br />
2. To measure atomic distances, we will use Angstrom A (or) Fermi.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Units and Measurements Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 1" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Define plane angle.<br />
Answer:<br />
Plane angle is the ratio of length of arc ‘dS’ to the radius “r”.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19914" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Units-and-Measurements-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-1-1.png" alt="Units and Measurements Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 1-1" width="376" height="66" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Units-and-Measurements-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-1-1.png 376w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Units-and-Measurements-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-1-1-300x53.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 376px) 100vw, 376px" /></p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
What is meant by dimension of a physical quantity?<br />
Answer:<br />
Dimension : The power of a fundamental quantity in the given derived quantity is called dimension.<br />
Ex : Force dimensional formula MLT<sup>-2</sup>.<br />
Here dimensions of Mass → 1, Length → 1, Time → 2.</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
What is meant by dimensional formula?<br />
Answer:<br />
Dimensional formula : It is a mathematical expression giving relation between various funda-mental quantities of a derived physical quantity.<br />
Ex : Momentum (\(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\)) MLT<sup>-1</sup>, Energy (E) ML<sup>2</sup>T<sup>-2</sup> etc.</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Write the physical quantities that are having J m<sup>-1</sup> and J m<sup>-2</sup> as their units.<br />
Answer:<br />
Force and Surface Tension.</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">V. Short Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
In a system of units, the unit of force is 100N, unit of length is 10m and the unit of time is 100s. What is the unit of mass in this system ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Here, F = MLT<sup>-2</sup> = 100 N → (1) ; L = 10 m ; T = 100s<br />
∴ From equation (1)<br />
M × (10) × (100)<sup>-2</sup> = 100 ⇒ M × 10<sup>-3</sup> = 100 ⇒ M = \(\frac{100}{10^{-3}}\) ⇒ M = 10<sup>5</sup> kg.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
1 calorie = 4.2 J where 1J = 1 kg m<sup>2</sup> s<sup>-2</sup>. Suppose we employ a system of units in which the unit of mass is α kg, the unit of length is β in and the unit of time γs, show that a calorie has a magnitude 4.2 α<sup>-1</sup> β<sup>-2</sup> γ<sup>2</sup> term of new units.<br />
Answer:<br />
Here, 1 calorie = 4.2 J = 4.2 kg m<sup>2</sup> / s<sup>2</sup> → (1)<br />
As new unit of mass = α kg<br />
∴ 1 kg = \(\frac{1}{\alpha}\) new unit of mass ⇒ α<sup>-1</sup> new unit of mass<br />
Similarly lm = β<sup>-1</sup>new unit of length and Is = γ<sup>-1</sup> new unit of time<br />
Putting these values in (1) we get<br />
1 calorie = 4.2 (α<sup>-1</sup> new unit of mass) (β<sup>-1</sup> new unit of length)<sup>2</sup> (γ<sup>-1</sup> new unit of time)<sup>-2</sup><br />
= 4.2 α<sup>-1</sup>β<sup>-2</sup>γ<sup>2</sup> new unit of energy, which was proved.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
The velocity of a body is given by v = At<sup>2</sup> + Bt + C. If v and t are expressed in SI, what are the units of A, B and C ?<br />
Answer:<br />
From principle of Homogeneity the terms At<sup>2</sup>, Bt and C must have same dimensional formula of velocity &#8216;v&#8217;.<br />
v = Velocity = LT<sup>-1</sup> ⇒ LT<sup>-1</sup> = A [ T<sup>2</sup> ]<br />
∴ A = \(\frac{\mathrm{LT}^{-1}}{\mathrm{~T}^2}\) = LT<sup>-3</sup>. So unit of A is m/sec<sup>3</sup><br />
LT<sup>-1</sup> = BT ⇒ B = LT<sup>-2</sup> So unit of B is m/sec<sup>2</sup><br />
LT<sup>-1</sup> = C So unit of C is m/sec.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
What are fundamental quantities? State their units in SI system.<br />
Answer:<br />
(i) Fundamental unit: The units of the fundamental quantities are called the &#8220;fundamental units&#8221;.<br />
Ex : Length → Meter (m), Mass → Kilogram (kg), Time → Second (s) etc.<br />
Basic units or fundamental units of SI system :</p>
<table border="2">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td style="text-align: center;"><strong>Type of Unit Fundamental Units</strong></td>
<td style="text-align: center;"><strong>Quantity</strong></td>
<td style="text-align: center;"><strong>Unit</strong></td>
<td style="text-align: center;"><strong>Symbol</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1.</td>
<td>Length</td>
<td>Metre</td>
<td>m</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2.</td>
<td>Mass</td>
<td>kilogram</td>
<td>kg</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3.</td>
<td>Time</td>
<td>second</td>
<td>s</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4.</td>
<td>Electric current</td>
<td>Ampere</td>
<td>A</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5.</td>
<td>Thermodynamic temperature</td>
<td>Kelvin</td>
<td>K</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6.</td>
<td>Luminous intensity of a source</td>
<td>candela</td>
<td>cd</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7.</td>
<td>Amount of a substance</td>
<td>mole</td>
<td>mol</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Supplementary Units</td>
<td>Angle Solid Angle</td>
<td>radian steradian</td>
<td>rad sr</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Explain the uses of Dimensional methods with examples.<br />
Answer:<br />
Uses of dimensional methods :</p>
<ol>
<li>To convert units from one system to another system.</li>
<li>To check the validity of given physical equations. For this purpose, we will use homogeneity of dimensions on L.H.S and on R.H.S.</li>
<li>To derive new relations between various physical quantities.</li>
</ol>
<p>Question 6.<br />
What are the rules for arithmetic operations with significant figures ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Rules for arithmetic operations with significant figures<br />
1. In multiplication or division, the final result should retain as many significant figures as there in the original number with the least significant figures.<br />
Ex: In the division \(\frac{4.237}{2.51}\) the significant figures are 4 and 3, so least significant figures are ‘3’.<br />
∴ \(\frac{4.237}{2.51}\) = 1.69 i.e., final answer must have only ‘3’ significant digits.</p>
<p>2. In addition or subtraction, the final result should retain as many decimal places are there in the number with the least decimal places.<br />
Ex : 436.26g + 227.2 g Here least number of significant figures after decimal point is one.<br />
∴ 436.26 + 272.2 = 708.46 must be expressed as 708.5 (after rounding off the last digit).</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
What is the rounding off a number and what are the rules to be followed in it?<br />
Answer:<br />
Rounding off the uncertain digits<br />
Rules for rounding off procedure : In rounding off the numbers to the required number of significant digits the following rules are followed.</p>
<ol>
<li>The preceding significant digit is raised by one if the first non-significant digit is more than 5.</li>
<li>The preceding significant digit is left unchanged if the first non-significant digit is less than 5.</li>
<li>If the first non-significant figure is 5, then</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li style="list-style-type: none;">
<ul>
<li>If the preceding significant figure is an odd number, then add one to it.</li>
<li>If the preceding significant figure is an even number, then it is unchanged and 5 is discarded.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">Problems</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
If the velocity of light (c). Planck&#8217;s constant (h) and the gravitational constant (G) are taken as fundamental quantities; then express mass, length and time in terms of dimensions of these quantities.<br />
Solution:<br />
Here, c = [L T<sup>-1</sup>] ; h = [M L<sup>2</sup>T<sup>-1</sup>] ; G = [M<sup>-1</sup>L<sup>3</sup>T<sup>-2</sup>]<br />
∴ E = hv, h = \(\frac{\mathrm{E}}{v}\) ; G = \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{Fd}^2}{\mathrm{~m}_1 \mathrm{~m}_2}\right)\)<br />
Let mass (M) = c<sup>x</sup>h<sup>y</sup>G<sup>z</sup> → (1)<br />
⇒ [M<sup>1</sup>L<sup>0</sup>T<sup>0</sup>]=(LT<sup>-1</sup> )<sup>x</sup> (M L<sup>2</sup>T<sup>-1</sup>)<sup>y</sup> (M<sup>-1</sup>L<sup>3</sup>T<sup>-2</sup> )<sup>z</sup><br />
⇒ [M<sup>1</sup>L<sup>0</sup>T<sup>0</sup>] = M<sup>y-z</sup>L<sup>x+2y+3z</sup>T<sup>-x-y-2z</sup><br />
Applying the principle of homogeneity of dimensions, we get<br />
y &#8211; z = 1 → (2) ; x + 2y + 3z = 0 → (3) ; &#8211; x &#8211; y &#8211; 2z = 0 → (4)<br />
Adding eq. (2), eq. (3) and eq. (4),<br />
∴ From eq. (2) z = y &#8211; 1 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) &#8211; 1 = \(\frac{-1}{2}\), From eq. (4) x = -y &#8211; 2z = \(\frac{-1}{2}\) + 1 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)<br />
Substituting the values of x, y &amp; z in eq. (1), we get ⇒ M = c<sup>1/2</sup> h<sup>1/2</sup> G<sup>1/2</sup> ⇒ M = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{ch}}{\mathrm{G}}}\)<br />
Proceeding as above we can show that L = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{hG}}{\mathrm{c}^3}} \text { and } \mathrm{T}=\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{hG}}{\mathrm{c}^5}}\)</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
An artificial satellite is revolving around a planet of mass M and radius R. in a circular orbit of radius r. Using dimensional analysis show that the period of the satellite“where k is a dimensionless constant and g is acceleration due to gravity.<br />
Solution:<br />
Given that, T<sup>2</sup> ∝ r<sup>3</sup> or T ∝ r<sup>3/2</sup>. Also T is a function of g and R.<br />
Let T ∝ r<sup>3/2</sup> g<sup>a</sup> R<sup>b</sup> where a, b are the dimensions of g and R. (or) T = k r<sup>3/2</sup> g<sup>a</sup> R<sup>b</sup> → (1)<br />
where k is a dimensionless constant of proportionality<br />
From equation (1) [M<sup>0</sup>L<sup>0</sup>T<sup>1</sup>] = L<sup>3/2</sup> (LT<sup>-2</sup>)<sup>a</sup> (L)<sup>b</sup> = M<sup>0</sup>L<sup>a+b+\(\frac{3}{2}\)</sup>T<sup>-2a</sup> Applying the principle of homogeneity of dimensions, we get<br />
a + b + \(\frac{3}{2}\) = 0 → (2)<br />
∴ -2a = 1 ⇒ a = \(\frac{-1}{2}\)<br />
From eq (1), \(\frac{-1}{2}\) + b + \(\frac{3}{2}\) = 0 ⇒ b = -1<br />
Substituting the values of &#8216;a&#8217; and &#8216;b&#8217; in eq. (1), we get<br />
∴ T = k r<sup>3/2</sup> g<sup>-1/2</sup> R<sup>-1</sup> = \(\frac{k}{R} \sqrt{\frac{r^3}{g}}\) This is the required relation.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
State the number of significant figures in the following.<br />
a) 6729<br />
b) 0.024<br />
c) 0.08240<br />
d) 6.032<br />
Solution:<br />
a) In 6729 all are significant figures.<br />
∴ Number of significant figures are Four.</p>
<p>b) In 0.024 the zeros to the left of 1st non-zero digit of a number less than one are not significant.<br />
∴ Number of significant figures are Two.</p>
<p>c) 0.08240 &#8211; Significant figures are Four.</p>
<p>d) In 6.032 the zero between two non-zero digits is significant.<br />
So, number of significant figures in 6.032 are 4.</p>
<p>e) 4.57 × 10<sup>8</sup>&#8211; Significant figures are Three.<br />
[In the representation of powers of Ten our rule is only significant figures must be given].</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
A stick has a length of 12.132 cm and another has a length of 12.4 cm. (a) If the two sticks are placed end to end what is the total length ? (b)If the two sticks are placed side by side, what is the difference in their lengths?<br />
Solution:<br />
a) When placed end to end total length is l = l<sub>1</sub> + l<sub>2</sub><br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19915" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Units-and-Measurements-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-1-2.png" alt="Units and Measurements Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 1-2" width="278" height="66" /><br />
l<sub>1</sub> = 12.132 cm and l<sub>2</sub> = 12.4 cm.<br />
∴ l<sub>1</sub> + l<sub>2</sub> = 12.132 + 12.4 = 24.532 cm.<br />
In addition final answer must have least number of significant numbers in that addition, i.e., one after decimal point. So our answer is 24.5 cm.</p>
<p>b) For difference use, l<sub>1</sub> &#8211; l<sub>2</sub> ⇒ 12.4 &#8211; 12.132 = 0.268 cm.<br />
In subtraction, final answer must be adjusted to least number of significant figures in that operation.<br />
Here least number is one digit after decimal. By applying round off procedure our answer is 0.3 cm.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Each side of a cube is measured to be 7.203 m. What is<br />
(i) the total surface area and<br />
(ii) the volume of the cube, to appropriate significant figures ?<br />
Solution:<br />
Side of cube, a = 7.203 m.<br />
So number of significant figures are Four.<br />
i) Surface area of a cube = 6a<sup>2</sup> = 6 × 7.203 × 7.203 = 311.299<br />
But our final answer must be rounded to least number of significant figures is four digits.<br />
So surface area of a cube = 311.3 m<sup>2</sup></p>
<p>ii) Volume of a cube, .<br />
V = a<sup>3</sup> = (7.203)<sup>3</sup> = 373.147<br />
But the answer must be limited to Four significant figures.<br />
∴ Volume of a cube, V = 373.1 m<sup>3</sup>.</p>
<h3>Units and Measurements Class 11 NCERT Solutions</h3>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Fill in the blanks.<br />
(a) The volume of a cube of side 1 cm is equal to m<sup>3</sup>.<br />
(b) The surface area of a solid cylinder of radius 2.0 cm and height 10.0 cm is equal to ________ (mm)<sup>2</sup>.<br />
(c) A vehicle moving with a speed of 18 km h<sup>-1</sup> covers ______ m in 1 s.<br />
(d) If the relative density of lead is 11.3. Its density is _________ g cm<sup>-3</sup> or _______ kg m<sup>-3</sup>.<br />
Answer:<br />
(a) Volume of a cube = l<sup>3</sup><br />
1 cm = 10<sup>-2</sup> m<br />
Side of a cube, l = 1 cm = 10<sup>-2</sup> m<br />
Volume of a cube of side &#8216;l’ is V = l<sup>3</sup> = (10<sup>-2</sup>)<sup>3</sup> = 10<sup>-6</sup> m<sup>3</sup>.</p>
<p>(b) Surface area of a solid cylinder of radius r and length l is A = 2πrl + 2πr<sup>2</sup><br />
Here, r = 2.0 cm, l = 10 cm ; As 1 cm = 10 mm; r = 2.0 × 10 mm = 20 mm<br />
l = 10.0 × 10 mm = 100 mm<br />
A = 2πrl + 2πr<sup>2</sup> = 2πr (l + r)<br />
= 2 × 3.14 × 20(100 + 20) = 125.6 (120) = 15072 mm<sup>2</sup> = 1.5 x 10<sup>4</sup> mm<sup>2</sup> .</p>
<p>(c) Distance = Velocity × Time ⇒ 1 km/h = \(\frac{1000}{3600}\) m/s = \(\frac{5}{18}\)m/s.<br />
Given velocity of vehicle, v = 18 km/h = 18 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) m/s = 5 m/s.<br />
Distance traversed = velocity × time = 5 × 1 = 5 m.</p>
<p>(d) <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19916" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Units-and-Measurements-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-1-3.png" alt="Units and Measurements Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 1-3" width="302" height="58" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Units-and-Measurements-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-1-3.png 302w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Units-and-Measurements-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Physics-Chapter-1-3-300x58.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 302px) 100vw, 302px" /><br />
Density, (p) = Relative Density × Density of water = 11.3 × 1 g cm<sup>-3</sup> = 11.3 g cm<sup>-3</sup><br />
But 1 g cm<sup>-3</sup> = 1000 kg m<sup>-3</sup>; p = 11.3 × 1000 kg/m<sup>3</sup> = 1.13 × 10<sup>4</sup> kgm<sup>-3</sup>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Units and Measurements Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 1" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Fill in the blanks by suitable conversion of units.<br />
(a) 1 kg m<sup>2</sup> s<sup>-2</sup> = g cm<sup>2</sup> s<sup>-2</sup>.<br />
(b) 1 m = _______ light years.<br />
(c) 3 ms<sup>-2</sup> = _________ km h<sup>-2</sup>.<br />
(d) G = 6.67 × 10<sup>-11</sup> Nm<sup>2</sup>kg<sup>-2</sup> = g<sup>-1</sup> cm<sup>3</sup> s<sup>-2</sup>.<br />
Ans .<br />
(a) 1 kg = 1000 g, 1 m = 100 cm<br />
1 kg m<sup>2</sup> s<sup>-2</sup> = 1000 g (100 cm)<sup>2</sup> s<sup>-2</sup> = 10<sup>7</sup> g cm<sup>2</sup>s<sup>-2</sup><br />
1 kg m<sup>2</sup> s<sup>-2</sup> = 10<sup>7</sup> g cm<sup>2</sup> s<sup>-2</sup></p>
<p>(b) 1 light year = 9.46 × 10<sup>15</sup> m<br />
1m = \(\frac{1}{9.46 \times 10^{15}}\) light year = 1.057 × 10<sup>-16</sup> light year.</p>
<p>(c) 1 km = 1000m ⇒ 1 m = \(\frac{1}{1000}\)km<br />
1 h = 3600s ⇒ 1s = \(\frac{1}{3600}\) h<br />
3 ms<sup>-2</sup> = 3 × \(\left(\frac{1}{1000} \mathrm{~km}\right) \times\left(\frac{1}{3600} \mathrm{~h}\right)^{-2}=3 \times \frac{1}{1000} \times(3600)^2 \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-2}\)<br />
= 3.888 × 10<sup>4</sup> km h<sup>-2</sup>.</p>
<p>(d) 1 N = 1 kg ms<sup>-2</sup><br />
G = 6.67 × 10<sup>-11</sup> Nm<sup>2</sup> kg<sup>-2</sup><br />
= 6.67 × 10<sup>-11</sup>(kg ms<sup>-2</sup>) m<sup>2</sup>kg<sup>-2</sup><br />
= 6.67 × 10<sup>-11</sup>kg<sup>-1</sup> m<sup>3</sup> s<sup>-2</sup><br />
= 6.67 × 10<sup>-11</sup> × \(\frac{1}{1000}\) × (10)<sup>6</sup> g<sup>-1</sup> cm<sup>3</sup>s<sup>-2</sup> = 6.67 × 10<sup>-8</sup> g<sup>-1</sup> cm<sup>3</sup> s<sup>-2</sup></p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
A calorie is a unit of heat (energy in transit) and it equals about 4.2 J, where 1 J = 1 kg m<sup>2</sup> s<sup>-2</sup>. Suppose we employ a system of units in which the unit of mass equals α kg, the unit of length equals β m and the unit of time is γ s. Show that a calorie has a magnitude 4.2 α<sup>-1</sup> β<sup>-2</sup> γ<sup>2</sup> in terms of new units.<br />
Answer:<br />
Dimension of energy are [ML<sup>2</sup>T<sup>-2</sup>]<br />
n<sub>1</sub>[u<sub>1</sub>] = m<sub>2</sub>[u<sub>2</sub>]<br />
n<sub>1</sub>[M<sub>1</sub>L<sub>1</sub><sup>2</sup>T<sub>1</sub><sup>-2</sup>] = n<sub>2</sub>[M<sub>2</sub>L<sub>2</sub><sup>2</sup>T<sub>2</sub><sup>-2</sup>] &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;(i)<br />
In SI system, n<sub>1</sub> = 4.2 J, M<sub>1</sub> = 1 kg, L<sub>1</sub> = 1 m, T<sub>1</sub> = 1 s<br />
In new system, M<sub>2</sub> = α kg, L<sub>2</sub> = β m, T<sub>2</sub> = γ s<br />
So equation (i), gives<br />
n<sub>2</sub> = n<sub>1</sub> \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{M}_1}{\mathrm{M}_2}\right) \cdot\left(\frac{\mathrm{L}_1}{\mathrm{~L}_2}\right)^2 \cdot\left(\frac{\mathrm{~T}_1}{\mathrm{~T}_2}\right)^{-2}\) = 4.2 \(\left(\frac{1 \mathrm{~kg}}{\alpha \mathrm{~kg}}\right) \cdot\left(\frac{1 \mathrm{~m}}{\beta \mathrm{~m}}\right)^2 \cdot\left(\frac{1 \mathrm{~s}}{\gamma \mathrm{~s}}\right)^{-2}\) = 4.2 α<sup>-1</sup> β<sup>-2</sup> γ<sup>2</sup><br />
i.e., 1 calorie = 4.23 J = 4.2 α<sup>-1</sup> β<sup>-2</sup> γ<sup>2</sup>.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Explain this statement clearly :<br />
“To call a dimensional quantity ‘large’ or ‘small’ is meaningless without specifying a standard for comparison”. In view of this, reframe the following statements wherever necessary.<br />
(a) atoms are very small objects.<br />
(b) a jet plane moves with great speed.<br />
(c) the mass of Jupiter is very large.<br />
(d) the air inside this room contains a large number of molecules.<br />
(e) a proton is much more massive than an electron.<br />
(f) the speed of sound is much smaller than the speed of light.<br />
Answer:<br />
The statement is true; it is meaningless to say that Meerut is a big city because it is bigger as compared to Bijnor and smaller as compared to Calcutta. Hence, to call a dimensionless quantity larger or small it is essential to specify a standard for comparison.<br />
(a) Atoms are very small objects as compared to edge of a sharp blade.<br />
(b) The jet plane moves with greater speed than that of a superfast train.<br />
(c) The mass of Jupiter is very large as compared to that of the Earth.<br />
(d) The air inside a room contains more number of molecules than the Avogadro number.</p>
<p>(e) Mass of proton = 1.67 × 10<sup>-27</sup> kg; Mass of electron = 9.1 × 10<sup>-31</sup> kg<br />
\(\frac{\text { Mass of proton }}{\text { Mass of electron }}=\frac{1.67 \times 10^{-27} \mathrm{~kg}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg}} \approx 1836 .\)<br />
Hence, the given statement is correct.</p>
<p>(f) Speed of sound in air, v = 332 m/s; Speed of light, c = 3 × 10<sup>8</sup> m/s<br />
\(\frac{v}{c}=\frac{332}{3 \times 10^8} \approx 10^{-6}\)<br />
Hence, the statement is correct.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
A new unit of length is chosen such that the speed of light in vacuum is unity. What<br />
is the distance between the Sun and the Earth in terms of the new unit of light takes 8 min and 20 s to cover this distance ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Given, c = 1 u<sub>n</sub> s<sup>-1</sup> where u<sub>n</sub> is new unit<br />
Time, t = 8 min 20 s = 8 × 60 + 20 = 500 s<br />
Distance between the Sun and the Earth<br />
x = ct = 1 u<sub>n</sub> s<sup>-1</sup> × 500 u<sub>n</sub> = 500 new unit of length.</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Which of the following is the most precise device for measuring length ?<br />
(a) a vernier callipers with 20 divisions on the sliding scale.<br />
(b) a screw gauge of pitch 1 mm and 100 divisions on the circular scale.<br />
(c) an optical instrument that can measure length to within a wavelength of light ?<br />
Answer:<br />
The most precise measurement is that in which least count of the measuring instrument is minimum.<br />
(a) Least count of Vernier callipers = \(\frac{s}{n}=\frac{\text { Value of one part of main scale }(s)}{\text { Number of divisions on Vernier scale }}\)<br />
= \(\frac{0.1 \mathrm{~cm}}{20}=\frac{1}{200} \mathrm{~cm}\) = 0.005 cm</p>
<p>(b) Least count of screw guage \(=\frac{\text { Pitch }}{\text { Number of divisions on circular scale }}\)<br />
= \(\frac{1 \mathrm{~mm}}{100}\) = 0.01 mm = 0.001 cm</p>
<p>(c) Least count of optical instrument = Wavelength of visible light = 5 × 10<sup>-7</sup> m<br />
Clearly, the least count of optical instrument is minimum, hence optical instrument is more precise device for measuring length.</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
A student measures the thickness of a human hair by looking at it through a microscope magnification 100. He makes 20 observations and finds that the average width of the hair in the field of view of the microscope 3.5 mm. What is the estimate on the thickness of hair?<br />
Answer:<br />
Magnification of microscope, m = \(\frac{\text { Size of image (I) }}{\text { Size of object (O) }}\)<br />
The thickness of hair will contain two significant figures as given in average width<br />
∴ Size of object, O = \(\frac{\text { Size of image (I) }}{\text { Magnification (m) }}\)<br />
Given magnification = 100, size of image = 3.5 mm<br />
∴ Size of object = \(\frac{3.5}{100}\)mm = 0.035 mm = 35 pm (two significant figures)<br />
That is, average thickness of human hair = 35 µm.</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Answer the following.<br />
(a) You are given a thread and a metre scale. How will you estimate the diameter of the thread ?<br />
(b) A screw gauge has a pitch of 1.0 mm and 200 divisions on the circular scale. Do you think it is possible to increase the accuracy of the screw gauge arbitrarily by increasing the number of divisions on the circular scale ?<br />
(c) The mean diameter of a thick brass rod is to be measured by vernier callipers. Why is a set of 100 measurements of the diameter expected to yield a more reliable estimate that a set of 5 measurements only ?<br />
Answer:<br />
(a) The diameter of thread is so small that it cannot be measured directly by a metre scale. For this, we measure the length of the thread by metre scale; fold the thread along its length repeatedly for a known number of times and place all the lengths fold touching one another. The thickness is measured by the metre scale. The diameter of thread will be equal to the fold thickness divided by the number of folds.</p>
<p>(b) Least count of screw gauge = \(=\frac{\text { Pitch }(\mathrm{P})}{\text { Number of divisions on circular scale }(\mathrm{N})}\)<br />
Obviously, by increasing the number of divisions on a circular scale, the least count would decrease and hence, accuracy will increase. But it can be done arbitrarily due to low resolution of the eye. Hence the number of turns on the circular scale may be increased upto a certain limit.</p>
<p>(c) The accuracy of a measurement increases with the increase in number of observations; so a set of 100 measurements will give more accurate results then a set of 5 measurements.<br />
Analytically accuracy ∝ \(\sqrt{N}\)<br />
where N is the number of measurements.</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
The photograph of a house occupies an area of 1.75 cm<sup>2</sup> on a 35 mm slide. The slide is projected onto a screen and the area of house on the screen is 1.55 m2. What is the linear magnification of the projector-screen arrangement ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Significant figures in given areas in an object and image is 3, number of significant figures<br />
in magnifications must be 3.<br />
Area of house on the slide = 1.75 cm<sup>2</sup> = 1.75 × 10<sup>-4</sup> m<sup>2</sup><br />
Area of house projected on the screen = 1.55 m<sup>2</sup><br />
Areal magnification = \(\frac{\text { Area of image (of house) }}{\text { Area of an object (house) }}=\frac{1.55}{1.75 \times 10^{-4}}=0.8857 \times 10^4\)<br />
Linear magnification, m = \(\sqrt{\text { Areal magnification }}=\sqrt{0.8857 \times 10^4}=94.1\)<br />
∴ m = 94.1 (three significant figures).</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
State the number of significant figures in the following.<br />
(a) 0.007 m<sup>2</sup><br />
(b) 2.64 × 10<sup>24</sup> kg<br />
(c) 0.2370 g cm<sup>-3</sup><br />
(d) 6.320 J<br />
(e) 6.032 Nm<sup>-2</sup><br />
(f) 0.0006032 m<sup>2</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
(a) The number of significant figures in the measurement 0.007 m<sup>2</sup> is 1 (zeros on left are not counted).<br />
(b) The number of significant figures in the measurement 2.64 × 10<sup>24</sup> kg is 3 (powers of 10 are not counted).<br />
(c) The number of significant figures in 0.2370 g cm<sup>-3</sup> is 4 (zeros on right having a decimal place are counted).<br />
(d) The number of significant figures in 6.320 J is 4.<br />
(e) The number of significant figures in 6.032 Nm<sup>-2</sup> is 4.<br />
(f) The number of significant figures in 0.0006032 is 4 (zeros on left are not counted).</p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
The length, breadth and thickness of a rectangular metallic sheet are 4.234 m, 1.005m and 2.01 cm respectively, Give the area and volume of the sheet to correct significant figures.<br />
Answer:<br />
Given, length, l = 4.234 (4 significant figures)<br />
breadth, b = 1.005 m (4 significant figures)<br />
thickness, t = 2.01 cm = 2.01 × 10<sup>-2</sup> m (3 significant figures)<br />
A rectangular sheet has six faces, out of which parallel faces have equal areAnswer:<br />
Area of sheet, A = 2 (lb + bt + lt)<br />
= 2(4.234 × 1.005 + 1.005 × 2.01 × 10<sup>-2</sup> + 4.234 × 2.01 × 10<sup>-2</sup>)<br />
= 2(4.25517 + 0.0202005 + 0.0851034)<br />
= 2 (4.3604739) = 8.7209478 m<sup>2</sup><br />
According to an idea of significant figures, there should be three significant figures in area; so Area of sheet, A = 8.72 m<sup>2</sup>.<br />
Volume, V = lbt = 4.234 × 1.005 × 2.01 × 10<sup>-2</sup> = 8.5528917 × 10<sup>-2</sup> m<sup>3</sup><br />
According to idea of significant figures, there should be 3 significant figures in volume.<br />
∴ Volume, V = 8.55 × 10<sup>-2</sup> m<sup>3</sup></p>
<p>Question 12.<br />
The mass of a box measured by a grocer’s balance is 2.30 kg. Two gold pieces of masses 20.15 g and 20.17 g are added to the box, what is<br />
(a) Total mass of the box,<br />
(b) The difference in the masses of the pieces of correct significant figures ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Mass of empty box, m<sub>0</sub> = 2.30 kg (two decimal places)<br />
If m<sub>1</sub> and m<sub>2</sub> are masses of pieces, then<br />
m<sub>1</sub> = 20.15 g = 20.15 × 10<sup>-3</sup> kg = 0.02015 kg (5 decimal places)<br />
m<sub>2</sub> = 20.17 g = 20.17 × 10<sup>-3</sup> kg = 0.02017 kg (5 decimal places)</p>
<p>(a) Total mass, M = m<sub>0</sub> + m<sub>1</sub> + m<sub>2</sub> = 2.30 + 0.02015 + 0.02017 = 2.34032 kg.<br />
In the sum, the result must contain minimum number of decimal places. In the first measurement there are two decimal places, therefore, only two figures after the decimal point is retained.<br />
Total mass, M = 2.34 kg (upto 1 decimal place)</p>
<p>(b) Difference of masses = m<sub>2</sub> &#8211; m<sub>1</sub><br />
= 20.17 g &#8211; 20.15 g (Each has two decimal places)<br />
= 0.02 g (Two decimal places)</p>
<p>Question 13.<br />
A famous relation in physics relates ‘moving mass’ m to the ‘rest mass’ m<sub>0</sub> of a particle terms of its speed v and the speed of light c. (This relation first arose as a consequence special relativity due to Albert Einstein). A boy recalls the relation almost correctly but forgets where to put the constant c. He writes : m = \(\frac{m_0}{\left(1-v^2\right)^{1 / 2}}\)<br />
Guess where to put the missing c.<br />
Answer:<br />
Given relation is m = \(\frac{m_0}{\left(1-v^2\right)^{1 / 2}}\)<br />
From the principle of homogeneity, the dimensions of two sides must be equal. For (1 &#8211; v<sup>2</sup>)<sup>1/2</sup> should be dimensionless. As v and c both are velocities, therefore for (1 &#8211; v<sup>2</sup>)<sup>1/2</sup> to dimensionless, v must be replaced by \(\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{c}}\), i.e.,</p>
<p>Question 14.<br />
The unit of length convenient on the atomic scale is known as an angstrom and is denoted by A<sup>0</sup>. 1 A<sup>0</sup> = 10<sup>-10</sup> m. The size of the hydrogen atom is about 0.5 A0. What is the total atomic volume in m<sup>3</sup> of a mole of the hydrogen atoms ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Volume of a spherical hydrogen atom is \(\frac{4}{3}\)πR<sup>3</sup>. The number of significant figures in volume must be 1 as given in size.<br />
Radius (size) of the hydrogen atom, R = 0.5 A = 0.5 × 10<sup>-10</sup> m,.<br />
Volume of the hydrogen atom = \(\frac{4}{3}\)πR<sup>3</sup><br />
= \(\frac{4}{3}\) × 3.14 × (0.5 × 10<sup>-10</sup> m)<sup>3</sup><br />
= 5.233 × 10<sup>-31</sup> m<sup>3</sup><br />
Number of hydrogen atoms in 1 mole of hydrogen = Avogadro number = 6.023 × 10<sup>23</sup> Volume of atoms in mole of hydrogen = 6.023 × 10<sup>23</sup> × 5.233 × 10<sup>-31</sup> = 3.15 × 10<sup>-7</sup> m<sup>3</sup> As given, size of H &#8211; atom contains 1 significant figure, so volume must contain 1 significant figure; therefore, volume of H &#8211; atom = 3 × 10<sup>-7</sup> m<sup>3</sup>.</p>
<p>Question 15.<br />
One mole of an ideal gas at standard temperature and pressure occupies 22.4 L (molar volume). What is the ratio of molar volume to the atomic volume of a mole of hydrogen ? (Take the size of hydrogen molecule to be about 1Å). Why is this ratio so large ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Molar volume, V = 22.4 litres ⇒ Molar volume, V<sub>molar</sub> = 22.4 × 10<sup>-3</sup> m<sup>3</sup><br />
molar<br />
Size of hydrogen molecule, r = 1 Å = 10<sup>-10</sup> m<br />
Volume of one hydrogen molecule, V = \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr<sup>3</sup><br />
= \(\frac{4}{3}\) × 3.14 × (10<sup>-10</sup>)<sup>3</sup><br />
= 4.2 × 10<sup>-30</sup>m<sup>3</sup><br />
Atomic volume of a mole of hydrogen,<br />
v<sub>atomic</sub> = Volume of one molecule × Avogadro Number<br />
= 4.2 × 10<sup>-30</sup> × 6.02 × 10<sup>23</sup> ≈ 25 × 10<sup>-7</sup> m<sup>3</sup><br />
\(\frac{\text { Molar Volume }}{\text { Atomic Volume }}=\frac{22.4 \times 10^{-3}}{25 \times 10^{-7}}\) ≈ 10<sup>4</sup><br />
This means that the intermolecular separation in hydrogen at S.T.P. is much larger than the size of a molecule.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Units and Measurements Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Physics Chapter 1" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 16.<br />
Explain this common observation clearly : If you look out of the window of a fast moving train, the nearby trees, houses etc. seem to move rapidly in a direction opposite to the train’s motion, but the distant objects (hill tops, Moon, the stars etc.) seem to be stationary. (In fact, since you are aware that you are moving, these distant objects seem to move with you).<br />
Answer:<br />
The line joining the object to the eye is called the line of sight. When a train moves fast, the angular change in line of sight of nearby objects (e.g., tree, house), is large, therefore, the nearby objects appear to move in the opposite direction. On the other hand the angular change in line of sight of distant objects (e.g., hill tops, moon, etc.) is negligibly small, hence, distant objects appear stationary.</p>
<p>Question 17.<br />
The Sun is a hot plasma (ionized matter) with its inner core at a temperature exceeding 10<sup>7</sup> K, and its outer surface at a temperature of about 6000 K. At these high temperatures, no substance remains in a solid or liquid phase. In what range do you expect the mass density of the Sun to be, in the range of densities of solids and liquids or gases ? Check if your guess is correct from the following data : mass of the Sun = 2.0 × 10<sup>30</sup> kg, radius of the Sun = 7.0 × 10<sup>8</sup> m.<br />
Answer:<br />
At high temperatures no substance can remain in solid or liquid phase. Therefore, at a first thought it is expected that the density of sun plasma should be in the range of gases.<br />
Given, mass of Sun, M = 2.0 × 10<sup>30</sup> kg ; Radius of Sun, R = 7.0 × 10<sup>8</sup> m<br />
Density = \(\frac{\text { Mass }}{\text { Volume }}\)<br />
= \(\frac{\mathrm{M}}{\frac{4}{3} \pi \mathrm{R}^3}=\frac{3 \mathrm{M}}{4 \pi \mathrm{R}^3}\)<br />
= \(\frac{3 \times 2.0 \times 10^{30}}{4 \times 3.14 \times\left(7 \times 10^8\right)^3}=1.39 \times 10^3 \mathrm{~kg} / \mathrm{m}^3\)<br />
This is the order of density of solids and liquids and not of gases. The reason is that the ionised particles in the Sun are very close to one another as in the case of solids and liquids due to enormous gravitational attraction.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
		<post-id xmlns="com-wordpress:feed-additions:1">19910</post-id>	</item>
		<item>
		<title>Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3</title>
		<link>https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-chemistry-chapter-3/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Srinivas]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sat, 17 Oct 2026 05:40:43 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[AP Inter 1st Year]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tsboardsolutions.in/?p=19905</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Regular practice with AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3 Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers helps students stay prepared for examinations. AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry 3rd Lesson Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers I. Multiple Choice Questions Question 1. Which of the following ... <a title="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" class="read-more" href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-chemistry-chapter-3/" aria-label="Read more about Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3">Read more</a>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Regular practice with <a href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-chemistry-study-material/">AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Study Material</a> Chapter 3 Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers helps students stay prepared for examinations.</p>
<h2>AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry 3rd Lesson Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers</h2>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">I. Multiple Choice Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Which of the following oxide, when dissolved in water form an acidic solution?<br />
1) Na<sub>2</sub>O<br />
2) CO<br />
3) Al<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub><br />
4) Cl<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
4) Cl<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub><br />
Cl<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub> + H<sub>2</sub>O → 2HClO<sub>4</sub> (Cl<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub> is acidic oxide)</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
The maximum covalency of Be in [BeF<sub>4</sub>]<sup>&#8211;</sup> and Al in [AlF<sub>6</sub>]<sup>3-</sup> are respectively?<br />
1) 4, 6<br />
2) 4, 4<br />
3) 6, 4<br />
4) 6, 6<br />
Answer:<br />
1) 4, 6<br />
Maximum covalency of Be in [BeF<sub>4</sub>]<sup>&#8211;</sup> = 4<br />
Maximum covalency of Al in [AlF<sub>6</sub>]<sup>-3</sup> = 6<br />
No.of Chemical bonds formed by an atom by sharing electrons with other atoms is covalency.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
The increasing order of ionization enthalpy of second period elements is<br />
1) Li &lt; B &lt; Be &lt; C &lt; NO &lt; F &lt; Ne<br />
2) Li &lt; Be &lt; B &lt; C &lt; N &lt; O &lt; F &lt; Ne<br />
3) Li &lt; B &lt; Be &lt; C &lt; O &lt; N &lt; F &lt; Ne<br />
4) Li &lt; Be &lt; B &lt; C &lt; O &lt; N &lt; F &lt; Ne<br />
Answer:<br />
3) Li &lt; B &lt; Be &lt; C &lt; O &lt; N &lt; F &lt; Ne</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
The difference in electronegativities of elements give information regarding<br />
1) bond length<br />
2) nature of bond<br />
3) volume of anion<br />
4) volume of cation<br />
Answer:<br />
2) nature of bond Difference in electronegative values Of elements give information about nature of bond. Electronegativity difference &gt; 1.7 (ionic bond) &lt; 1.7 (covalent bond)<br />
= 1.7 (50% covalent bond and 50% ionic bond)</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
The atomic radius of fluorine is 64 pm. What is the ionic radius of fluoride ion ?<br />
1) 64 pm<br />
2) 136 pm<br />
3) 32 pm<br />
4) 60 pm<br />
Answer:<br />
2) 136 pm<br />
F- has higher radius than F (Parent atom) so 136 pm</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
The atomic number Of the element unnilennium is<br />
1) 102<br />
2) 108<br />
3) 119<br />
4) 109<br />
Answer:<br />
4) 109<br />
Unnilennium<br />
un &#8211; 1<br />
nil &#8211; 0<br />
enn &#8211; 9</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Which one of the following sets of ions represents a collection of iso electronic series?<br />
1) Li<sup>+</sup>, Na<sup>+</sup>, Mg<sup>2+</sup>, Ca<sup>2+</sup><br />
2) Ba<sup>2+</sup>, Sr<sup>2+</sup>, K<sup>+</sup>, Ca<sup>2+</sup><br />
3) N<sup>3-</sup>, O<sup>2-</sup>, F<sup>&#8211;</sup>, S<sup>2-</sup><br />
4) K<sup>+</sup>, Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup>, Ca<sup>2+</sup>, Sc<sup>3+</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
4) K<sup>+</sup>, Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup>, Ca<sup>2+</sup>, Sc<sup>3+</sup><br />
K<sup>+</sup> (18), Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup> (18), Ca<sup>+2</sup> (18) and Sc<sup>+3</sup> (18) have some no.of electrons so they are iso electronic series.</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Three elements X, Y and Z are in the third period of the periodic table. The oxides of X,Y and Z respectively are basic, amphoteric and acidic. The correct order of the atomic numbers of X,Y and Z is [ 3 ]<br />
1) X &lt; Z &lt; Y<br />
2) Z &lt; Y &lt; X<br />
3) X &lt; Y &lt; Z<br />
4) Y&lt;X&lt;Z<br />
Answer:<br />
3) X &lt; Y &lt; Z<br />
X &#8211; basic ; Y &#8211; Amphoteric ; Z &#8211; acidic ; X &lt; Y &lt; Z.</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
In which of the following, elements are arranged in the decreasing order of their metallic nature?<br />
1) Na &gt; Mg &gt; Be &gt; Si &gt; P<br />
2) P &gt; Si &gt; Be &gt; Mg &gt; Na<br />
3) Si &gt; P &gt; Be &gt; Na &gt; Mg<br />
4) Be &gt; Na &gt; Mg &gt; Si &gt; P<br />
Answer:<br />
1) Na &gt; Mg &gt; Be &gt; Si &gt; P<br />
Na &gt; Mg &gt; Be &gt; Si &gt; P is the decreasing order of metallic nature.</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
What is the atomic number of the element present in the 4th period and 17th group of the periodic table?<br />
1) 29<br />
2) 35<br />
3) 37<br />
4) 30<br />
Answer:<br />
2) 35<br />
4<sup>th</sup> period and 17th group element is Bromine. Atomic no is 35.</p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
If the formula of oxide of Eka-aluminium is E<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub>, its chloride can be<br />
1)AlCl<sub>3</sub><br />
2) GaCl<sub>3</sub><br />
3) GeCl<sub>3</sub><br />
4) Ga<sub>2</sub>Cl<sub>3</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
2) GaCl<sub>3</sub><br />
Eka Aluminium is gallium, chloride is Gallium trichloride GaCl<sub>3</sub>.</p>
<p>Question 12.<br />
To which group of an element having atomic number 84.<br />
1) Group-12<br />
2) Group-17<br />
3) Group-16<br />
4) Group-11<br />
Answer:<br />
3) Group-16<br />
Atomic no(Z) = 84 having Element is polonium. Polonium is belongs to group &#8211; 16</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 13.<br />
As we move from left to right across a period, the non-metallic character and as we go down in the group, metallic character<br />
1) Increases, Decreases<br />
2) Decreases, Increases<br />
3) Decreases, Increases<br />
4) Increases, Increases<br />
Answer:<br />
4) Increases, Increases<br />
In periods, non-metallic character from left to right increases.<br />
In groups, metallic character from top to bottom increases.</p>
<p>Question 14.<br />
The IUPAC official name of unnilquadium<br />
1) Seaborgium<br />
2) Lawrencium<br />
3) Dubnium<br />
4) Rutherfordium<br />
Answer:<br />
4) Rutherfordium<br />
Unnilquadium Atomic no = 104<br />
104<sup>th</sup> Element is Rutherfordium (Rf).</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">II. Fill in the Blanks</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Among the alkali metals, the metal with the highest ionization enthalpy is _______.<br />
Answer:<br />
Lithium (From top to bottom I.E. decreases)</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
The examples of neutral oxides are ________.<br />
Answer:<br />
Nitrous oxide (N<sub>2</sub>O), Nitric oxide (NO) and Carbon monoxide (CO) are examples of neutral oxides.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Beryllium more closely resembles with ______.<br />
Answer:<br />
Beryllium more closely resembles with Aluminium (Diagonal relationship)</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
The element with highest electronegativity on Pauling scale is _______.<br />
Answer:<br />
Fluorine (F), According to pauling scale it’s electronegativity = 4.0</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
In an atom the decrease in the attractions between nucleus and outer most electrons by the core electrons is called _____.<br />
Answer:<br />
Screening effect (or) shielding effect</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">III. One Word Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
State Mendeleev&#8217;s periodic law.<br />
Answer:<br />
The physical and chemical properties of elements are periodic functions of their atomic weights.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
State Moseley&#8217;s modern periodic law.<br />
Answer:<br />
The physical and chemical properties of elements are periodic functions of their atomic numbers.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
What are the elements having highest electronegativity and electron gain enthalpy?<br />
Answer:<br />
High electronegative element is fluorine (F).<br />
High electron gain enthalpy (electron affinity) element is chlorine (Cl).</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
What is a diagonal relationship?<br />
Answer:<br />
The first element of a group shows similarities in properties with the second element of the next group. This is called, &#8216;diagonal relationship&#8217;.</p>
<table border="2">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="92"><strong>Group</strong></td>
<td width="53"><strong>I</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>II</strong></td>
<td width="44"><strong>III</strong></td>
<td width="53"><strong>IV</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="92"><strong>2nd period</strong></td>
<td width="53">Li</td>
<td width="48">Be</td>
<td width="44">B</td>
<td width="53">c</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="92"><strong>3rd period</strong></td>
<td width="53">Na</td>
<td width="48">Mg</td>
<td width="44">Al</td>
<td width="53">Si</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>But this relation continues effectively upto to the IV group only.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
What is an amphoteric oxide ?<br />
Answer:<br />
The oxide which contains both acidic as well as basic nature is called an amphoteric oxide.<br />
Eg : Al<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub>, Ga<sub>2</sub>Os<sub>3</sub> etc &#8230;&#8230;</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
What is iso-electronic series.<br />
Answer:<br />
Series of species having same no.of electrons is called iso-electronic series.<br />
Eg : N<sup>-3</sup>, O<sup>-2</sup>, F<sup>&#8211;</sup>, Na<sup>+</sup>, Mg<sup>+2</sup>, Al<sup>+3</sup>, Ne</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
What are transuranic elements ?<br />
Answer:<br />
In actinoids after uranium the elements are synthesized artificially. These are called transuranic elements.</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
What is the starting element of fifth period?<br />
Answer:<br />
Rubidium (Rb) is the starting element of 5<sup>th</sup> period.</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
What are the units of electron gain enthalpy ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Units of electron gain enthalpy are KJ/mol (or) eV/atom</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
For which group, valency and group number has no relation.<br />
Answer:<br />
Group 18 has no relation between valency and group number.</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">IV. Very Short Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
An element &#8216;X&#8217; has atomic number 34. Give it&#8217;s position in the periodic table.<br />
Answer:<br />
Given element’s Atomic number (Z) = 34 and its electronic configuration is [Ar] 4s<sup>2</sup>3d<sup>10</sup>4p<sup>4</sup>.<br />
Total number of shells represents the period and the number of valence electrons represents the group. So it belongs to 4<sup>th</sup> period and VI<sup>th</sup> A group (Z = 34).</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Mg<sup>2+</sup> is smaller than O<sup>2-</sup> in size. Why?<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>Mg<sup>+2</sup> and O<sup>-2</sup> are iso-electronic.</li>
<li>In iso-electronic series nuclear charge (or) positive charge increases size decreases. So Mg<sup>+2</sup> smaller than O<sup>-2</sup> in size.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
How does the nature of oxides change along third period from Na<sub>2</sub>O to Cl<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub> ?<br />
Answer:<br />
The basic nature decreases and the acidic nature increases from Na<sub>2</sub>O to Cl<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub>, as shown below.</p>
<table border="2">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="59"><strong>Element</strong></td>
<td width="65">Na</td>
<td width="46">Mg</td>
<td width="86">Al</td>
<td width="60">Si</td>
<td width="52">P</td>
<td width="66">S</td>
<td width="65">Cl</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="59"><strong>Oxide</strong></td>
<td width="65">Na<sub>2</sub>O</td>
<td width="46">MgO</td>
<td width="86">Al<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub></td>
<td width="60">SiO<sub>2</sub></td>
<td width="52">P<sub>2</sub>O<sub>5</sub></td>
<td width="66">SO<sub>3</sub></td>
<td width="65">Cl<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="59"><strong>Nature</strong></td>
<td width="65">Strongly basic</td>
<td width="46">Basic</td>
<td width="86">Amphoteric</td>
<td width="60">Weakly</p>
<p>acidic</td>
<td width="52">Acidic</td>
<td width="66">Strongly</p>
<p>acidic</td>
<td width="65">Strongly</p>
<p>acidic</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Consider the following species N<sup>3-</sup>, O<sup>2-</sup>, Na<sup>+</sup>, Mg<sup>2+</sup> and Al<sup>3+</sup>.<br />
(a) What is common in them?<br />
(b) Arrange them in an increasing order of their ionic radii.<br />
Answer:<br />
a) All the ions contain same number of electrons (10 electrons).<br />
b) Al<sup>+3</sup> &lt; Mg<sup>2+</sup> &lt; Na<sup>+</sup> &lt; F<sup>&#8211;</sup> &lt; O<sup>-2</sup> &lt; N<sup>-3</sup></p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Name any two bridge elements.<br />
Answer:<br />
2<sup>nd</sup> period elements are bridge elements.<br />
Lithium (Li), Beryllium (Be), Boron (B), Carbon (C) etc&#8230;</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Define metallic radius and covalent radius.<br />
Answer:<br />
Metallic radius The half of the distance between centre of nucleus of two adjacent metal atoms is called metallic radius.<br />
Covalent radius : The half of the distance between centre of nucleus of two atoms bonded covalently is called covalent radius.</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Why cation is smaller and anion is larger in radii than their parent atoms?<br />
Answer:<br />
Cations after losing electron, nuclear attraction increases. Where as in anions after gaining electron, where as electron repulsion increases.<br />
∴ Cation is smaller and anion is larger in radii than parent atom.</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
How are electronegativity and metallic and non-metallic characters related ?<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>As the electronegativity increases metallic character decreases.<br />
Electronegativity ∝ \(\frac{1}{\text { Metallic character }}\)</li>
<li>As the electronegativity increases non-metallic character also increases. Electronegativity oc non-metallic character</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 9.<br />
Ionisation enthalpy (IE<sub>1</sub>) of O is less than that of N. Why?<br />
Answer:<br />
Electronic configuration of N is &#8211; 1s<sup>2</sup>2s<sup>2</sup>2p<sup>3</sup>, lectronic configuration of O is 1s<sup>2</sup> 2s<sup>2</sup> 2p<sup>4</sup>. Nitrogen has stable half filled 2p orbital electronic configuration. So high amount of I.E. required.<br />
So I.E. of ‘O’ is less than ‘N’.</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
What are the oxidation state and covalency of Al in [AlCl (H<sub>2</sub>O)<sub>5</sub>]<sup>2+</sup> ?<br />
Answer:<br />
In the given complex [AlCl (H<sub>2</sub>O)<sub>5</sub>]<sup>+2</sup><br />
Oxidation state of ‘Al’ = +3 and Covalency of ‘Al’ = 6</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">V. Short Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Give any four characteristic properties of transition elements.<br />
Answer:<br />
Characteristic properties of transition elements.</p>
<ul>
<li>They exhibit variable oxidation states.</li>
<li>They exhibit para magnetic property.</li>
<li>They form coloured compounds.</li>
<li>They form alloys.</li>
<li>They form complex compounds.</li>
<li>They form interstitial compounds.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Assign the position of the element having outer electronic configuration<br />
a) ns<sup>2</sup> np<sup>4</sup> for n = 3<br />
b) (n &#8211; 1)d<sup>2</sup> ns<sup>2</sup> for n = 4.<br />
Answer:<br />
a) ns<sup>2</sup>np<sup>4</sup> for n = 3<br />
3s<sup>2</sup> 3p<sup>4</sup> outer electronic configuration element is sulphur 1s<sup>2</sup> 2s<sup>2</sup> 2p<sup>6</sup> 3s<sup>2</sup> 3p<sup>4</sup>.<br />
It belongs to 3rd period and group &#8211; 16 (VI A),<br />
n = 3 refers third period and<br />
3s<sup>2</sup> 3p<sup>4</sup> total six valence electrons refers VIA group.</p>
<p>b) (n &#8211; 1)d<sup>2</sup> ns<sup>2</sup> for n = 4<br />
3d<sup>2</sup> 4s<sup>2</sup> outer electronic configuration element is titanium (Ar) 4s<sup>2</sup> 3d<sup>2</sup>.<br />
It belongs to 4th period and IVB Group.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Which of the following will have the most negative electron gain enthalpy and which is the least electronegative among P, S, Cl, F.<br />
Answer:<br />
The most negative electron gain enthalpy element among P, S, Cl, F is chloride (Cl).<br />
The least electronegative element among P, S, Cl, F is Phosphorus (P).</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Arrange the following an increasing order.<br />
1. EA : O, S and Se<br />
2. Radius : Fe, Fe<sup>2+</sup> and Fe<sup>3+</sup><br />
3. IE : Na, K and Rb.<br />
4. EN : F, Cl, Br and I.<br />
Answer:<br />
1. O &lt; Se &lt; S increasing order of electron affinity<br />
2. Fe<sup>+3</sup> &lt; Fe<sup>+2</sup> &lt; Fe increasing order of radius .<br />
3. Rb &lt; K &lt; Na increasing order of I.E.<br />
4. I &lt; Br &lt; Cl &lt; F increasing order of electronegativity</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Write a note on<br />
1. Atomic radius 2. Metallic radius 3. Covalent radius<br />
Answer:<br />
Atomic radius refer to both metallic radius and covalent radius.<br />
1. Atomic radius : As the atomic radius increases, the distance between the nucleus and the outermost electrons increases. Hence, the effective nuclear charge on the outermost electrons decreases. As a result of which the energy required to remove the electrons decreases. From this it is evident that as atomic radius increases I.P decreases. Similarly as atomic radius decreases I.P increases.</p>
<p>2. Metallic radius (Crystal radius) : It is defined as one &#8211; half of the inter &#8211; nuclear distance between two adjacent atoms of a metal.<br />
Eg: Metallic radius of sodium = \(\frac{3.72}{2}\) = 1.86 Å<br />
Metallic radius of potassium = \(\frac{4.62}{2}\) = 2.31 Å</p>
<p>3. Covalent radius : It is defined as one &#8211; half of the equilibrium distance between the nuclei of two atoms bonded by a covalent bond.<br />
Eg: Covalent radius of hydrogen = 0.37 Å<br />
Covalent radius of chlorine = 0.99 Å<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19906" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Classification-of-Elements-and-Periodicity-in-Properties-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-3-1.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3 1" width="346" height="165" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Classification-of-Elements-and-Periodicity-in-Properties-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-3-1.png 346w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Classification-of-Elements-and-Periodicity-in-Properties-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-3-1-300x143.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 346px) 100vw, 346px" /><br />
AB = covalent radius = 0.99 Å ; CD = van der Waal&#8217;s radius = 1.8 Å<br />
Covalent, van der Waal&#8217;s radii of chlorine :<br />
van der Waal&#8217;s radius : It is defined as one &#8211; half of the inter &#8211; nuclear distance between atoms of two adjacent molecules of an element bonded by van der Waal&#8217;s forces facing each other, in solid state.<br />
Eg: van der Waal&#8217;s radius of hydrogen = 1.2 Å<br />
van der Waal’s radius of chlorine = 1.80 Å<br />
Note : van der Waal&#8217;s radius of an atom is 40% larger than its covalent radius.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">VI. Long Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Discuss the construction of long form of the periodic table.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>The important characteristic property of an element is found to be its &#8216;atomic number&#8217; and not atomic weight.</li>
<li>Accordingly, the periodic law was modified &#8211; &#8220;The physical and chemical properties of the elements are periodic functions of their atomic numbers&#8221;.</li>
<li>Later on it was found that while deciding the properties of an element, its electronic configuration plays a very important role.</li>
<li>So Bohr constructed the long form of the periodic table, based on the electronic configurations of the elements.</li>
<li>The periodic law can be stated as &#8220;The physical and chemical properties of the elements are periodic functions of their electronic configurations&#8221;.</li>
</ul>
<p>Salient features :</p>
<ol>
<li>This table is prepared based on a fundamental property &#8220;atomic number&#8221;.</li>
<li>This table can be easily studied, remembered and reproduced.</li>
<li>Similarities, differences and trends in properties are more clearly reflected in this table.</li>
<li>Vertical columns are known as groups and horizontal rows are called periods.</li>
<li>There are seven periods in this table. The first period consists of two elements only. Second and third periods contain 8 elements each. Fourth and fifth periods contain 18 elements each. Sixth period consists of 32 elements. Seventh period is an incomplete period and consists of 19 elements.</li>
<li>There are eighteen groups in this table. They are designated IA, IIA, IIIB, IVB, VB, VIB, VIIB, VIII, IB, IIB, IIIA, IVA, VA, VIA, VIIA, 0 (American Convention of naming).</li>
<li>The elements in IA, IIA, IIIA, IVA, VA, VIA and VILA are known as representative elements or normal elements.</li>
<li>The elements in IB, IIB, IIIB, IVB, VB, VIB, VIIB and VIII are called Transition elements.</li>
<li>Zero group elements are placed at the extreme right of the table. These are called inert gases or noble gases. They possess stable ns<sup>2</sup>np<sup>6</sup> configuration.</li>
<li>Short periods are broken and long periods are extended to accommodate transition elements.</li>
<li>Lanthanides and actinides are placed separately at the bottom of the periodic table.</li>
<li>Based on the entrance of differentiating electron, the table is divided into four blocks. They are s &#8211; block, p &#8211; block, d &#8211; block and f &#8211; block. In the elements of s &#8211; block, differentiating electron enters into s &#8211; orbital. Similarly in the elements of p &#8211; block, d &#8211; block and f &#8211; block, the differentiating electron enters into s, p, d and f &#8211; orbitals respectively.</li>
<li>Based on complete and incomplete electron shells and chemical properties, the elements are classified into four types. They are
<ol>
<li>Type I &#8211; Inert gas elements),</li>
<li>Type II &#8211; Representative elements),</li>
<li>Type III &#8211; Transition elements,</li>
<li>Type IV &#8211; Inner transition elements.</li>
</ol>
</li>
<li>All the elements in a group possess similar properties, because they possess the same valence electron configuration.</li>
</ol>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Write an essay on s,p,d, and f-block elements.<br />
Answer:<br />
Depending upon the entering of differentiating electron into the atomic orbitals, the elements of long form of periodic table are divided into four blocks. They are s, p, d and f &#8211; blocks. s- Block:<br />
1) The elements, in which the differentiating electron enters the s &#8211; sub-level are called s-block elements.<br />
2) In this block, there are two groups. They are IA and IIA.<br />
3) The valence electron configuration of elements of IA group is ns<sup>1</sup> and that of IIA is ns<sup>2</sup>.<br />
4) The elements of IA are Alkali metals and IIA are Alkaline earth metals.<br />
5) These are metals and are highly reactive.</p>
<p>p &#8211; Block: .</p>
<ol>
<li>The elements in which the differentiating electron enters the p &#8211; sub-level are called p &#8211; block elements.</li>
<li>In this block, there are six groups. They are IIIA, IVA, VA, VIA, VIIA, and &#8216;O&#8217;.</li>
<li>The valence electron configuration of the elements of these groups varies from ns<sup>2</sup> np<sup>1</sup> to ns<sup>2</sup> np<sup>6</sup>.</li>
<li>It includes metals, non-metals, metalloids, noble gases.</li>
</ol>
<p>d- Block:</p>
<ol>
<li>The elements in which the differentiating electron enters into d &#8211; sub-level are called d &#8211; block elements.</li>
<li>In this block, there are ten groups. They are IIIB, IVB, VB, VIB, VIIB, VIII, IB, IIB.</li>
<li>The general outer configuration of d &#8211; block elements is (n &#8211; 1)d<sup>1-10</sup> ns<sup>1-2</sup>.</li>
<li>These elements are also known as Transition elements.</li>
<li>These are all metals having high M.P and B.P<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19907" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Classification-of-Elements-and-Periodicity-in-Properties-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-3-2.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3 2" width="251" height="139" /></li>
</ol>
<p>f &#8211; Block:</p>
<ol>
<li>The elements in which the differentiating electron enters into f &#8211; orbital are called f-block elements.</li>
<li>In this block, there are 14 groups. They have no designation.</li>
<li>Their general outer configuration is, (n &#8211; 2)f<sup>1-14</sup> (n &#8211; 1)d<sup>0-1</sup> ns<sup>2</sup>.</li>
<li>The f &#8211; block elements are arranged separately at the bottom in two rows.</li>
<li>The elements of first row are called lanthanides and in these elements the valence electron enters into 4f orbital.</li>
<li>The elements of second row are called actinides and in these elements the valence electron enters into 5f orbital.</li>
<li>All the f &#8211; block elements are also known as Inner Transition elements.</li>
<li>These are all metals.</li>
</ol>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Relate the electronic configuration of elements and their properties in the classification of elements.<br />
Answer:<br />
All the elements are divided into four types on the basis of their properties and electronic configurations. They are: (i) Noble gas elements (ii) Representative elements (iii) Transition elements and (iv) Inner transition elements.<br />
i) Noble gas elements: Elements in which the outermost and p sub-shells are completely filled are called inert gas elements. &#8220;0&#8221; group elements belong to this type.</p>
<ul>
<li>Due to completely filled shells they show chemical inertness and possess more stability.</li>
<li>The general outer configuration of these elements is ns<sup>2</sup>np<sup>6</sup> (except helium.)</li>
<li>The configura-tion of helium is 1s<sup>2</sup>. They are called noble gases.</li>
</ul>
<p>ii) Representative elements : Elements in which the outermost s and p sub shells are incompletely filled are called representative elements.</p>
<ul>
<li>These elements are so named because they represent most of the chemical reactions known.<br />
Elements of s &#8211; block and p &#8211; block (except &#8216;O&#8217; group) belong to this type.</li>
<li>The general outer electronic configuration of these elements is ns<sup>1</sup>, ns<sup>2</sup>, ns<sup>2</sup>np<sup>6</sup> to ns<sup>2</sup>np<sup>5</sup>.</li>
<li>These elements enter into chemical reactions either by losing or gaining or sharing of electrons.</li>
<li>Many of the non-metals, metalloids and some metals belong to this type.</li>
</ul>
<p>iii) Transition elements : Elements in which the outermost and penultimate shells are partially filled are called transition elements.<br />
They belong to d-block. Their general configuration is (n -1 )d<sup>1-9</sup> ns<sup>1-2</sup>. They are so named because there is a gradation from electro + ve nature to electro &#8211; ve nature. They possess the following characteristic properties.</p>
<ol>
<li>They exhibit variable oxidation states.</li>
<li>They form coloured compounds.</li>
<li>They are all paramagnetic.</li>
<li>They and their oxides act as catalysts.</li>
<li>They form alloys and interstitial compounds.</li>
<li>They form complex compounds.</li>
</ol>
<p>iv) Inner transition elements : Elements in which the outermost, penultimate and antepenultimate shells are partially filled are called Inner transition elements.</p>
<ul>
<li>They belong to f &#8211; block and are placed separately at the bottom of the table.</li>
<li>Their general outer configuration is (n &#8211; 2)f<sup>1-14</sup> (n &#8211; 1)d<sup>0-1</sup>ns<sup>1-2</sup>.</li>
<li>They are so named as they represent a transition of physical and chemical properties among them.</li>
<li>There are two series of inner transition elements corresponding to 4f and 5f series.</li>
<li>4f series are called lanthanides and elements of 5f series are called actinides. Lanthanides are also called rare earths.</li>
<li>Majority of actinides are synthetic.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
What is a periodic property? How the following properties vary in a period and group?<br />
(a) Atomic radius<br />
(b) Ionisation enthalpy<br />
(c) Electronegativity<br />
Answer:<br />
Periodic property : The property of elements which change gradually with change in electronic configuration and repeats in regular intervals are called periodic properties. This repetition is called periodicity.<br />
a) Atomic radius: The distance between centre of nucleus and outer most shell electrons is called atomic radius.<br />
Variation in a group In groups from top to bottom atomic radius increases.<br />
Reason : In a group from top to bottom valance electron enter into new shell. So size increases as a result atomic radius increases.<br />
Variation in a period : In periods from left to right atomic radius decreases.<br />
Reason : In a period from left to right valency electron enters into same orbit. So atomic size decreases as a result atomic radius decreases.</p>
<p>b) Ionisation Enthalpy: The minimum amount of energy required to remove the electron from the outer most shell of isolated neutral gaseous atom is called ionisation enthalpy.</p>
<p>Variation in a group : In groups from top to bottom ionisation enthalpy decreases.<br />
Reason: In a group from top to bottom atomic size increases. This results in the decrease of nuclear attraction on outer most shell electrons.</p>
<p>Variation.in a period : In periods from left to right ionisation enthalpy increases.<br />
Reason: In a period from left to right atomic size decreases. This results in increase of nuclear attraction on outer most shell electrons.</p>
<p>c) Electronegativity : The tendency of an atom to attract the shared pair of electrons toword? it self in a molecule is called electro negativity.</p>
<p>Variation in a group In groups from top to bottom electro-negativity decreases.<br />
Reason In a group top to bottom atomic size increases. This result in the decrease of nuclear attraction on outer most shell electrons.</p>
<p>Variation in a period : In periods from left to right electronegativity increases.<br />
Reason: In a period left to right atomic size decreases. This result in increase of nuclear attraction on outer most shell electrons.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
What is a periodic property ? How the following properties vary in a period and group?<br />
(a) Electron gain enthalpy<br />
(b) Metallic and covalent radius<br />
(c) Nature of oxides<br />
Answer:<br />
a) Electron gain enthalpy (Electron affinity) :<br />
The amount of energy released when an electron is added to outer most shell of isolated neutral gaseous atom is called electron gain enthalpy.</p>
<p>Variation in a period: In periods from left to right electron gain enthalpy increases.<br />
Reason: In a period from left to right atomic size decreases. This results in increase in nuclear attraction on outer most electrons.</p>
<p>Variation in a group : In groups from top to bottom electron gain enthalpy decreases.<br />
Reason : In a group from top to bottom atomic size increases. This results in decrease in nuclear attraction on outer most electrons. .</p>
<p>b) Metallic and covalent radius :<br />
Variation in periods: In periods from left to right metallic and covalent radius decreases.<br />
Reason: In periods the no.of electron shells remains same and nuclear charge increases.</p>
<p>Variation in group: In groups from top to bottom metallic and covalent radius increases.<br />
Reason : In groups the no.of electron shells increases and nuclear charge decreases.</p>
<p>c) Nature of oxides : Generally oxides are three types.<br />
1) Acidic oxides.<br />
2) Basic oxides.<br />
3) Amphoteric oxides<br />
1) Acidic oxides : Oxides which reacts with water to give acids are acidic oxides. Eg : SO<sub>2</sub>, N<sub>2</sub>O<sub>5</sub>, CO<sub>2</sub></p>
<p>2) Basic oxides : Oxides which reacts with water to form bases (Alkalis) are called basic oxides. Eg : Na<sub>2</sub>O, K<sub>2</sub>O</p>
<p>3) Amphoteric oxides : Oxides which contains both acidic as well as basic nature are called amphoteric oxides. Eg : Al<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub>, Ga<sub>2</sub>O<sub>3</sub></p>
<p>Variation in a Period : In periods from left to right basic nature of oxides decreases and acidic nature increases.<br />
Variation in a group : In groups from top to bottom basic nature of oxides increases.</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Define IE<sub>1</sub> and IE<sub>2</sub>. Why IE<sub>2</sub> is always greater than IE<sub>1</sub> for a given atom? Discuss the factors that effect IE of an element.<br />
Answer:<br />
The minimum amount of energy required to remove an electron present in the outermost orbit of a neutral, isolated gaseous atom is called ionisation potential. It is denoted by I<sub>1</sub> and is measured in kilocalories (K. cals) or electron volts (e.v).<br />
M<sub>(g)</sub> + I<sub>1</sub> → \(\mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{+}\) + e<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
The amount of energy required to remove another electron from a uni +ve ion is called second ionisation potential. It is denoted as I<sub>2</sub>.<br />
\(\mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{+}\) I<sub>2</sub> → \(\mathrm{M}_{(\mathrm{g})}^{+2}\) + e<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
Ionisation energy is measured in eV/atom (or) k cal/mole (or) KJ/mole.</p>
<p>The uni +ve ion formed, by the removal of an electron from a neutral atom will have more nuclear attractions over the electron cloud because the number of protons will be more than the number of electrons.</p>
<p>As a result of which more energy is required to remove an electron from this uni +ve ion than a neutral atom. Hence second I.P values are always greater than first I.P values.</p>
<p>Factors affecting Ionisation potential:<br />
1. Atomic radius : As the atomic radius increases, the distance between the nucleus and the outermost electrons increases. Hence, the effective nuclear charge on the outermost electrons decreases.</p>
<ul>
<li>As a result of which the energy required to remove the electrons decreases.</li>
<li>From this it is evident that as atomic radius increases I.P decreases. Similarly as atomic radius decreases I.P increases.</li>
</ul>
<p>2. Nuclear Charge: As nuclear charge increases, the nuclear attractions over the valence electrons increases. So, more amount of energy is required to remove these electrons. From this it is evident that as nuclear charges increases I.P increases. Similarly as nuclear charge decreases I.P. decreases.</p>
<p>3. Screening effect (or) Shielding effect: In multi-electron atoms, the electrons present in the inner shells screen the electron present in the outermost shells from the nuclear attractions. This effect is known as screening effect. Screening effect depends upon the number of screens (no. of inner orbits). As the screening effect increases, ionisation potential decreases. Similarly as the screening effect decreases, I.P. increases.</p>
<p>4. Extent of penetration of orbitals of valence electrons : As the penetration power of orbitals increases, IP also increases. Order of penetration of orbitals is S &gt; P &gt; d &gt; f. Hence, order of IP is also S &gt; P &gt; d &gt; f.</p>
<p>5. Electron configuration: Atoms of elements with half-filled or completely filled electron configuration are more stable. Such atoms have more IP values. Eg : N &gt; O.</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Explain the following.<br />
1) Noble gases<br />
2) Representative elements<br />
3) Transition elements<br />
4) Inner Transition elements<br />
Answer:<br />
All the elements are divided into four types on the basis of their properties and electronic configurations. They are : (1) Noble gas elements (2) Representative elements (3) Transition elements and (4) Inner transition elements.<br />
1) Noble gas elements: Elements in which the outermosts and p sub-shells are completely filled are called inert gas elements. &#8220;0&#8221; group elements belong to this type.</p>
<ul>
<li>Due to completely filled shells they show chemical inertness and possess more stability. The general outer configuration of these elements is ns<sup>2</sup>np<sup>6</sup> (except helium.)</li>
<li>The configuration of helium is 1s<sup>2</sup>. They are called noble gases.</li>
</ul>
<p>2) Representative elements : Elements in which the outermost s and p sub shells are incompletely filled are called representative elements.</p>
<ul>
<li>These elements are so named because they represent most of the chemical reactions known.</li>
<li>Elements of s &#8211; block and p &#8211; block (except &#8216;O&#8217; group) belong to this type. The general outer electronic configuration of these elements is ns<sup>1</sup>, ns<sup>2</sup>, ns<sup>2</sup>np<sup>1</sup> to ns<sup>2</sup>np<sup>5</sup>.</li>
<li>These elements enter into chemical reactions either by losing or gaining or sharing of electrons. .</li>
<li>Many of the non-metals, metalloids and some metals belong to this type.</li>
</ul>
<p>3) Transition elements : Elements in which the outermost and penultimate shells are partially filled are called transition elements.<br />
They belong to d-block. Their general configuration is ( n -1 )d<sup>1-9</sup> ns<sup>1-2</sup>. They are so named because there is a gradation from electro + ve nature to electro &#8211; ve nature. They possess the following characteristic properties.</p>
<ol>
<li>They exhibit variable oxidation states.</li>
<li>They form coloured compounds.</li>
<li>They are all paramagnetic.</li>
<li>They and their oxides acts as catalysts.</li>
<li>They form alloys and interstitial compounds.</li>
<li>They form complex compounds.</li>
</ol>
<p>4) Inner transition elements : Elements in which the outermost, penultimate and antepenultimate shells are partially filled are called Inner transition elements.</p>
<ul>
<li>They belong to f &#8211; block and are placed separately at the bottom of the table. Their general outer configuration is (n &#8211; 2)f<sup>1-14</sup> (n &#8211; 1)d<sup>0-1</sup>ns<sup>1-2</sup>.</li>
<li>They are so named as they represent a transition of physical and chemical properties among them.</li>
<li>There are two series of inner transition elements corresponding to 4f and 5f series. 4f series are called lanthanides and elements of 5f series are called actinides.</li>
<li>Lanthanides are also called rare earths. Majority of actinides are synthetic.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<h3>Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Class 11 NCERT Solutions</h3>
<p>Question 1.<br />
What is the basic theme of organisation in the periodic table ?<br />
Answer:<br />
The basic theme of organisation of elements in the periodic table is to simplify and systematize study of the properties of all the elements and their compounds.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Which important property did Mendeleev use to classify the elements in his periodic table and did he stick to that ?<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>Mendeleev recognised atomic weight as the fundamental property of elements and arranged the elements on the basis of a law called as Mendeleev&#8217;s Periodic law.</li>
<li>He sincerely stuck to this basis as many gaps were left in the periodic table for undiscovered elements and by studying the properties of adjacent elements he predicted the properties of undiscovered elements to be filled in the gaps when discovered in future.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 3.<br />
What is the basic difference in approach between the Mendeleev&#8217;s Periodic Law and the Modern Periodic Law ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Mendeleev&#8217;s Periodic Law states that &#8220;the physical and chemical properties of the elements are periodic function of their atomic weights.&#8221;</p>
<p>Modern Periodic Law : &#8220;The physical and chemical properties of elements are a periodic function of their atomic numbers.&#8221; The difference between Mendeleev&#8217;s Periodic Law and Modem Periodic Law classification of elements from atomic weight to atomic number.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
On the basis of quantum numbers, justify that the sixth period of the periodic table should have 32 elements.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>The 6(h period begins with the filling of principal quantum number, n = 6. But on the basis of Aufbau principle, the electrons in the 6th period can be filled in 6s, 4f, 5d and 6p subshells whose energies increases in the order 6s &lt; 4f &lt; 5d &lt; 6p.</li>
<li>Therefore, there will be 16 (1 + 7 + 5 + 3) orbitals that can be filled in this period.</li>
<li>Thus, these orbitals can accommodate maximum of 32 electrons in accordance with Pauli&#8217;s exclusion principle.</li>
<li>Thus, this period contains 32 elements.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 5.<br />
In terms of period and group where would you locate the element with Z = 114 ?<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>The electronic configuration of Z = 114 is [Rn]<sub>86</sub> 7s<sup>2</sup> 5f<sup>14</sup> 6d<sup>10</sup> 7p<sup>2</sup></li>
<li>Now, period number is equal to the principal quantum number of the valence electrons of the respective elements and group number for p-block elements is equal to the (10 + number of ns and np electrons).</li>
<li>Therefore, Z = 114 belongs to 7<sup>th</sup> period and group 14.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Write the atomic number of the element present in the third period and seventeenth group of the periodic table.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>In the third period, the filling up of only 3s and 3p orbitals occurs. Moreover, the general electronic configuration for 17<sup>th</sup> group element is ns<sup>2</sup> np<sup>5</sup>.</li>
<li>Thus, the given element has electronic configuration of valence shell as 3s<sup>2</sup> 3p<sup>5</sup>.</li>
<li>Since third period starts with Z = 11 and ends at Z = 18, therefore, elements with Z = 11 and Z = 12 are s-block elements.</li>
<li>The next six elements with Z = 13 to 18 are p-block elements and belong to groups 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18.</li>
<li>Therefore, the element which will lie in the third period and seventeenth group will have atomic number (Z) = 10 + 7 = 17.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Which element do you think would have been named by (i) Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory (ii) Seaborg&#8217;s group ?<br />
Answer:</p>
<ol>
<li>Lawrencium (Z = 103) and Berkelium (Z = 97)</li>
<li>Seaborgium (Z = 106)</li>
</ol>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Why do elements in the same group have similar physical and chemical properties ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Elements in the same group have similar electronic configuration of valence shell and hence have similar physical and chemical properties.</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
What does atomic radius and ionic radius really mean to you ?<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>Atomic radius is defined as the distance from the centre of the nucleus to the outermost shell containing electrons.</li>
<li>It is measured indirectly by measuring the distance between the two bonded atoms, i.e., bond length.</li>
<li>Ionic radius is defined as the distance from the nucleus of an ion upto which it has influence on its electron cloud.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 10.<br />
How do atomic radius vary in a period and in a group ? How do you explain the variation?<br />
Answer:<br />
i) In a period, atomic radius of elements decreases from left to right. This is because on moving left to right, incoming electron is added to the same valence shell,</p>
<p>ii) In a group, the atomic radius increases from top to bottom. This is because as we descend a group, the principal quantum number increases and the distance between valence electrons and the nucleus increases.</p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
What do you understand by isoelectronic species ? Name a species that will be isoelectronic with each of the following atoms or ions.<br />
(i) F<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
(ii) Ar<br />
(iii) Mg<sup>2+</sup><br />
(iv) Rb<sup>+</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
Isoelectronic species are those atoms or ions which have the same number of electrons but different magnitude of the nuclear charge.<br />
i) F<sup>&#8211;</sup> has 10(9 + 1) electrons. Therefore, the species nitride ion has N<sup>3-</sup> (7 + 3), oxide ion has O<sup>2-</sup> (8 + 2), neon has Ne(10 + 0), sodium ion has Na<sup>+</sup>(11 &#8211; 1), Magnesium ion has Mg<sup>2+</sup> (12 &#8211; 2), Aluminium ion has Al<sup>3+</sup>(13 &#8211; 3), etc. Each one of which contains 10 electrons are isoelectronic with it.</p>
<p>ii) Ar has 18 electrons. Therefore, the species phosphide ion, P<sup>3-</sup>(15 + 3); sulphate ion, S<sup>2-</sup>(16 + 2); chloride ion, Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup>(17 + 1); potassium ion, K<sup>+</sup>(19 &#8211; 1); calcium ion, Ca<sup>2+</sup>(20 &#8211; 2), etc. Each one of which contains 18 electrons are isoelectronic with it.</p>
<p>iii) Mg<sup>2+</sup> has 10(12 &#8211; 2) electrons, therefore, the species N<sup>3-</sup>, O<sup>2-</sup>, F<sup>&#8211;</sup>, Ne, Na<sup>+</sup>, Al<sup>3+</sup>, etc. Each one of which contains 10 electrons are isoelectronic with it.</p>
<p>iv) Rb<sup>+</sup> has 36(37 &#8211; 1) electrons. Therefore the species, bromide ion Br<sup>&#8211;</sup>(35 + 1), krypton, Kr (36 + 0) and Strontium ion Sr<sup>2+</sup>(38 &#8211; 2) each one of which has 36 electrons are isoelectronic with it.</p>
<p>Question 12.<br />
Consider the following species : N<sup>3-</sup>, O<sup>2-</sup>, F<sup>&#8211;</sup>, Na<sup>+</sup>, Mg<sup>2+</sup> and Al<sup>3+</sup>.<br />
a) What is common in them ?<br />
b) Arrange them in the order of increasing ionic radii.<br />
Answer:<br />
a) Each one of these species contain 10 electrons and hence all are isoelectronic species, b) The ionic radii of isoelectronic species decreases with the increase in the magnitude of the nuclear charge. For example, consider the isoelectronic ions N<sup>3-</sup>, O<sup>2-</sup>, F<sup>&#8211;</sup>, Na<sup>+</sup>, Mg<sup>2+</sup> and Al<sup>3+</sup>.</p>
<ul>
<li>All these ions have 10 electrons but their nuclear charges increases in the order : N<sup>3-</sup> (+7), O<sup>2-</sup> (+8), F<sup>&#8211;</sup> (+9), Na<sup>+</sup> (+11), Mg<sup>2+</sup> (+12) and Al<sup>3+</sup> (+13).</li>
<li>Hence their ionic radii decreases in the order,<br />
Al<sup>3+</sup> &lt; Mg<sup>2+</sup> &lt; Na<sup>+</sup> &lt; F<sup>&#8211;</sup> &lt; O<sup>2-</sup> &lt; N<sup>3-</sup></li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 13.<br />
Explain why cations are smaller and anions larger in radii than their parent atoms ?<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>The ionic radius of a cation is always smaller than the parent atom because the loss of<br />
one or more electrons increases the effective nuclear charge.</li>
<li>As a result, the force of attraction of nucleus for the electrons increases and hence the ionic radii decreases. Moreover, number of shells also decreases.</li>
<li>Whereas, the ionic radius of an anion is always larger than its parent atom because the<br />
addition of one or more electrons decreases the effective nuclear charge.</li>
<li>As a result the force of attraction of the nucleus for the electrons decreases and therefore the ionic radii increases.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 14.<br />
What is the significance of the terms &#8211; &#8216;isolated gaseous atom&#8217; and &#8216;ground state&#8217; while defining the ionization enthalpy and electron gain enthalpy ?<br />
Hint: Requirements for comparison purposes.<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Ionization enthalpy is the minimum amount of energy required to remove the most loosely bound electron from an isolated atom in a gaseous state resulting in the formation of a cation. .</p>
<ul>
<li>The force by which an electron is attracted by the nucleus of an atom is appreciably affected by presence of other atoms within its molecule or in the neighbourhood.</li>
<li>Therefore, for the purpose of determination of ionization enthalpy, it is essential that these interatomic forces of attraction should be minimum.</li>
<li>Since in the gaseous state, the atoms are widely separated, therefore, their interatomic forces are minimum.</li>
<li>Moreover, since it is not possible to isolate a single atom for the purpose of determination of its ionization enthalpy, therefore, the interatomic distances are further reduced by carrying out the measurement at a low pressure of the gaseous atom.</li>
<li>It is because of these reasons, that the term isolated gaseous atom in the ground state has been included in the definition of ionization enthalpy.</li>
</ul>
<p>ii) Electron gain enthalpy is the energy released when an extra electron is added to an isolated gaseous atom in the ground state to form the gaseous negative ion.</p>
<ul>
<li>The term isolated gaseous atom has already been explained above. The term ground state here means that the atom must be present in the most stable state, i.e., the ground state.</li>
<li>If the isolated gaseous atom is in the excited state, lesser amount of energy will be released when it gets converted into gaseous anion after accepting an electron.</li>
<li>Hence, for comparison purposes, the electron gain enthalpies of gaseous atom must be determined in their respective more stable state, i.e., ground state.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 15.<br />
Energy of an electron in the ground state of the hydrogen atom is -2.18 × 10<sup>-18</sup>J. Calculate the ionisation enthalpy of atomic hydrojgen in terms of J mol<sup>-1</sup>.<br />
Hint: Apply the idea of mole concept to derive the answer.<br />
Answer:<br />
Ionization energy is the amount of energy required to remove the electron from the ground state to infinity.<br />
Energy of the electron in the ground state (E<sub>1</sub>) = -2.18 × 10<sup>-18</sup> J (Given)<br />
Energy of the electron at infinity (E<sub>∞</sub>) = 0</p>
<p>The energy required to remove an electron in the ground state of hydrogen atom<br />
(∆E) = E<sub>∞</sub> &#8211; E<sub>1</sub> = 0 &#8211; E<sub>1</sub> = 0 &#8211; (-2.18 × 10<sup>-18</sup> J) = 2.18 × 10<sup>-18</sup> J<br />
∴ Ionisation enthalpy per mole of hydrogen atoms = 2.18 × 10<sup>-18</sup> × 6.02 × 10<sup>23</sup> J/mol<br />
= 13.12 × 10<sup>5</sup> J/mol</p>
<p>Question 16.<br />
Among the second period elements the actual ionization enthalpies are in the order.<br />
Li &lt; B &lt; Be &lt; C &lt; 0 &lt; N &lt; F &lt; Ne<br />
Explain why i) Be has higher AH than B<br />
ii) O has lower ∆<sub>i</sub>H than N and F ?<br />
Answer:<br />
i)</p>
<ul>
<li>The electronic configuration of <sub>4</sub>Be is 1s<sup>2</sup> 2s<sup>2</sup> and that of <sub>5</sub>B is 1s<sup>2</sup> 2s<sup>2</sup> 2p<sup>1</sup>.</li>
<li>Since fully filled 2s-orbital in Be is more stable than partially filled 2p-orbital of B and hence would require more energy to pull off the 2s electrons.</li>
<li>Thus, ionisation energy of Be is higher than that of B.</li>
</ul>
<p>ii)</p>
<ul>
<li>The electronic configuration of N (1s<sup>2</sup> 2s<sup>2</sup> \(2 p_x^1 2 p_y^1 2 p_z^1\)) in which 2p-orbitals are half filled and the electronic configuration of O (1s<sup>2</sup> 2s<sup>2</sup> \(2 p_x^2 2 p_y^1 2 p_z^1\)) in which 2p-orbitals are neither exactly half-filled nor completely filled.</li>
<li>Therefore, it is difficult to remove an electron from N than from O. As a result, ∆<sub>i</sub>H of N is higher than that of O.</li>
<li>Further, the electronic configuration of F is 1s<sup>2</sup> 2s<sup>2</sup> \(2 p_x^2 2 p_y^2 2 p_z^1\)).</li>
<li>Because of higher nuclear charge (+9), the first ionisation enthalpy of F is higher than that of O.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 17.<br />
How would you explain the fact that the first ionization enthalpy of sodium is lower than that of magnesium but its second ionization enthalpy is higher than that of magnesium?<br />
Answer:</p>
<ol>
<li>The electronic configuration of Na is 1s<sup>2</sup> 2s<sup>2</sup> 2p<sup>6</sup> 3s<sup>1</sup> and electronic configuration of Mg is 1s<sup>2</sup> 2s<sup>2</sup> 2p<sup>6</sup> 3s<sup>2</sup>.</li>
<li>In both the cases, first electron is to be removed from the 3s orbital but nuclear charge of Mg (+12) is higher than that of Na (+11).</li>
<li>Moreover, 3s-orbital in Mg is completely filled (more stable) while in Na it is incompletely filled (less stable).</li>
<li>Therefore, ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>i</sub> of Na is lower than that of Mg.</li>
<li>Now, after the removal of the first electron, Na<sup>+</sup> acquires the more stable neon gas configuration.</li>
<li>Thus, the second electron from Na is to be removed from the more stable noble gas configuration.</li>
<li>Thus, ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>2</sub> of Na is more than ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>2</sub> of Mg.</li>
</ol>
<p>Question 18.<br />
What are the various factors due to which the ionization enthalpy of the main group elements tends to decrease down a group ?<br />
Answer:<br />
On moving down a group, the ionisation energy of elements gradually decreases. It is due to the following three factors.<br />
i) The atomic size of elements increases gradually down a group due to addition of new shells. So the distance between nucleus and valence electron increases and less amount of energy is required to remove electron from the valence shell. Therefore, I.E. should decrease.</p>
<p>ii) The screening effect on the valence electrons of element gradually increases due to increase in number of inner shells. So the valence electrons experience less nuclear attraction. Hence the I.E should decrease.</p>
<p>iii) The nuclear charge increases with increase in atomic number of elements down a group, which results in increased force of attraction between nucleus and valence electrons. Hence I.E should increase.</p>
<p>The combining effect of increase in atomic size and screening effect compensates the increase in nuclear charge. As a result, the valence electrons are weakly held by the nucleus.<br />
Hence the I.E decreases down the group.</p>
<p>Question 19.<br />
The first ionization enthalpy values (in kJ mol<sup>-1</sup>) of group 13 elements are.</p>
<table border="2">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="55">B</td>
<td width="79">A1</td>
<td width="73">Ga</td>
<td width="73">In</td>
<td width="75">11</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="55">801</td>
<td width="79">577</td>
<td width="73">579</td>
<td width="73">558</td>
<td width="75">589</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>How would you explain this deviation from the general trend ?<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>On moving down the group 13 from B to Al, the ionization enthalpy decreases due to an increase in atomic size and screening effect (of s- and p-electrons of the 2nd shell) as expected.</li>
<li>However, IE<sub>1</sub> of Ga is only slightly higher than that of Al while that of Tl is much higher than those of Al, Ga and In. This is due to the following reasons.</li>
<li>As we move from Al to Ga, due to ineffective shielding of the valence electrons by 3d- electrons, the effective nuclear charge on Ga is slightly more than that on Pd. As a result, IE<sub>1</sub> of Ga is slightly higher than that of Al.</li>
<li>Further, on moving down the group from Ga to In, the nuclear charge increases.</li>
<li>Here, the shielding effect of all the inner electrons overweighs the effect of the increased nuclear charge and hence IE<sub>1</sub> of In is lower than that of Ga.</li>
<li>On further moving from In to Tl, the nuclear charge further increases. This increased nuclear charge over weighs the shielding effect of all the electrons present in the inner shells including those of 4f- and 5d-electrons and hence IE<sub>1</sub> of Tl is higher than that of In.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 20.<br />
Which of the following pairs of elements would have a more negative electron gain enthalpy?<br />
i) O or F<br />
ii) F or Cl<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Both O and F belongs to 2nd period, as we move from O to F, the atomic size decreases and the nuclear charge increases.</p>
<ul>
<li>Both these factors tend to increase the attraction of the nucleus for the incoming electron and thus electron gain enthalpy becomes more negative.</li>
<li>Further, gain of one electron by F gives F<sup>&#8211;</sup> ion which has stable inert gas configuration while gain of one electron by O gives O<sup>&#8211;</sup> ion which does not have stable inert gas configuration.</li>
<li>Consequently, electron gain enthalpy of F is much more negative (-328 kJ mol<sup>-1</sup>) than that of oxygen (-141 kJ mol<sup>-1</sup>).</li>
</ul>
<p>ii) In general, the electron gain enthalpy becomes less negative on moving down the group.<br />
But the electron gain enthalpy of chlorine (-349 kJ mol<sup>-1</sup>) is more negative than that of fluorine (-328 kJ mol<sup>-1</sup>). This is because of the small size of F atom.</p>
<ul>
<li>Due to its small size, the electron-electron repulsions in the relatively compact 2p- subshell are comparatively large and hence the incoming electron is not accepted with the same ease as in the case with the larger Cl atom.</li>
<li>Therefore, electron gain enthalpy of Cl is more negative than that of F.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 21.<br />
Would you expect the second electron gain enthalpy of O as positive, more negative or less negative than the first ? Justify your answer.<br />
Answer:<br />
When an electron is added to O atom to form O<sup>&#8211;</sup> ion, energy is released. Thus, first electron gain enthalpy of oxygen is negative.<br />
O(g) + e<sup>&#8211;</sup>(g) → O<sup>&#8211;</sup>(g) ; ∆<sub>eg</sub>H = -141 kJ mol<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>But when another electron is added to O<sup>&#8211;</sup> ion, energy is absorbed to overcome the strong electrostatic repulsion between the negatively charged O<sup>&#8211;</sup> and the second electron been added. Hence, the second electron gain enthalpy of oxygen is positive.<br />
O<sup>&#8211;</sup>(g) + e<sup>&#8211;</sup>(g) → O<sup>2-</sup>(g) ; ∆<sub>eg</sub>H = +780 kJ mol<sup>-1</sup></p>
<p>Question 22.<br />
What is the basic difference between the terms electron gain enthalpy and electronegativity?<br />
Answer:<br />
The basic difference between the terms electron gain enthalpy and electronegativity is that the electron gain enthalpy is related to the isolated atom in a gaseous state but electronegativity is the property of atom in the bonded state.</p>
<p>The electron gain enthalpy of an element has a constant value but electronegativity does not have a constant value.</p>
<p>Question 23.<br />
How would you react to the statement that the electronegativity of N on Pauling scale is 3.0 in all the nitrogen compounds ?<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>The statement that the electronegativity of N on Pauling scale is 3.0 in all nitrogen compound is incorrect. This is because the value of electronegativity does not remain constant for any given element.</li>
<li>In actual, electronegativity varies with the state of hybridization and the oxidation state of the element.</li>
<li>The electronegativity increases as the percentage of s-character of a hybrid orbital increases or the oxidation state of the element increases.</li>
<li>For example, the electronegativity of &#8216;N&#8217; decreases as we move from sp-sp<sup>2</sup>-sp<sup>3</sup> hybrid orbital. Similarly, the electronegativity of N in NO where oxidation state of N is +4 is higher than that in NO where the oxygen state of N is +2.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 24.<br />
Describe the theory associated with the radius of an atom as it<br />
i) gains an electron<br />
ii) loses an electron<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Gain of electrons : The addition of electron is not compensated by the nuclear charge.</p>
<ul>
<li>As a result of which there is increased repulsion among the electrons and a decrease in effective nuclear charge.</li>
<li>In other words, the electron cloud in the anion expands. As a result of which the size of the anion increases.</li>
<li>Hence, the ionic radius of an anion is larger than the atomic radius of that element.</li>
<li>For example, the ionic radius of fluoride ion (F ) is 1.36 A whereas the atomic radius of fluorine is 0.72 Å.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19908" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Classification-of-Elements-and-Periodicity-in-Properties-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-3-3.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3 3" width="294" height="136" /></li>
</ul>
<p>ii) Loss of electrons: When a neutral atom loses one electron to form a cation, its atomic radius decreases.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19909" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Classification-of-Elements-and-Periodicity-in-Properties-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-3-4.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3 4" width="287" height="154" /></p>
<ul>
<li>This is because the number of electrons in the cation decreases while its nuclear charge remains the same as the parent atom.</li>
<li>Since the same nuclear charge now attracts lesser number of electrons, therefore, the force of attraction of the nucleus on the electrons of all the shells increases (i.e., effective nuclear charge increases) and hence the radius of cation decreases.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 25.<br />
Would you expect the first ionization enthalpies for two isotopes of the same element to be the same or different ? Justify your answer.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>Ionization enthalpy depends upon the electronic configuration (number of electrons) and effective nuclear charge (number of protons).</li>
<li>Since the isotopes of an element have the same electronic configuration and same nuclear charge, therefore, they are expected to have same ionization enthalpy.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 26.<br />
What are the major differences between metals and non-metals ?<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>Elements which have a strong tendency to loose electrons to form cations are called metals while those which have a strong tendency to accept electrons to form anions are called non-metals.</li>
<li>Thus, metals are strong reducing agents, they have low ionization enthalpies, less negative electron gain enthalpies, low electronegativity, good conductors of heat and electricity.</li>
<li>Non-metals, on the other hand, are strong oxidising agents, they have high ionization enthalpies, high negative electron gain enthalpies, high electronegativity, poor conductors of heat and electricity (except graphite and diamond).</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 27.<br />
Use the periodic table to answer the following questions.<br />
i) Identify an element with five electrons in the outer subshell.<br />
ii) Identify an element that would tend to lose two electrons.<br />
iii) Identify an element that would tend to gain two electrons.<br />
iv) Identify the group having metal, non-metal, liquid as well as gas at the room temperature.<br />
Answer:<br />
i) The general electronic configuration of the elements having five electrons in the outer subshell is ns<sup>2</sup> np<sup>5</sup>. This electronic configuration is characteristic of elements of group 17 (halogens), i.e., F, Cl; Br, I, Ar, etc.</p>
<p>ii) The elements which have a tendency to lose two electrons must have two electrons in the valence shell. Therefore, their general electronic configuration should be ns<sup>2</sup>. This electronic configuration is the characteristic of group 2 elements (alkaline earth metals), for example, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, etc.</p>
<p>iii) The elements which have a tendency to accept two electrons must have six electrons in the valence shell. Therefore, their general electronic configuration is ns<sup>2</sup>np<sup>4</sup>. This electronic configuration is characteristic of group 16 elements such as O, S, Se, etc.</p>
<p>iv) Group 1 and 17 contains metal, non-metal in liquid as well as gaseous state at the room temperature. For example, hydrogen is a non-metal and is present in the gaseous state. And the other elements of this group are metals. Further, Cesium (Cs) is a liquid metal. Similarly, Bromine is a liquid non-metal in group 17 while other elements of this group exists as gaseous non-metals.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 28.<br />
The increasing order of reactivity among group I elements is Li &lt; Na &lt; K &lt; Rb &lt; Cs whereas that among group 17 elements is F &gt; Cl &gt; Br &gt; I. Explain.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>The elements of group 1 have only one electron in their respective valence shells and thus have a strong tendency to loose this electron.</li>
<li>Since the ionization enthalpy decreases down the group, therefore, the reactivity of group 1 elements increases in the same order : Li &lt; Na &lt; K &lt; Rb &lt; Cs.</li>
<li>In contrast, the elements of group 17 has seven electrons in their respective valence shells and thus have a strong tendency to accept one more electron. Since, the electrode potential of group in the same order : F &gt; Cl &gt; Br &gt; I.</li>
<li>Moreover, electron gain enthalpy becomes less and less negative as we move from Cl to I, therefore, reactivity increases from Cl to I.</li>
<li>Fluorine is most reactive due to its low bond dissociation energy.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 29.<br />
Write the general outer electronic configuration of s-, p-, d- and f-block elements.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ol>
<li>s-Block element: ns<sup>1-2</sup> (where n = 1,2, )</li>
<li>p-Block element: ns<sup>2</sup> np<sup>1-6</sup> (where n = 1, 2 )</li>
<li>d-Block element: (n &#8211; 1)d<sup>1-10</sup> ns<sup>1-2</sup> (where n = 4, 5, 6, 7)</li>
<li>f-Block element: (n &#8211; 2)f<sup>1-14</sup> (n &#8211; 1)d<sup>0-2</sup> ns<sup>2</sup> (where n = 6 and 7)</li>
</ol>
<p>Question 30.<br />
Assign the position of the element having outer electronic configuration<br />
i) ns<sup>2</sup> np<sup>4</sup> for n = 3<br />
ii) (n &#8211; 1)d<sup>2</sup> ns<sup>2</sup> for n = 4 and<br />
iii) (n &#8211; 2)f<sup>7</sup> (n &#8211; 1)d<sup>1</sup> ns<sup>2</sup> for n = 6, in the periodic table.<br />
Answer:<br />
i)</p>
<ul>
<li>n = 3 suggest that the element belongs to third period. Since the last electron<br />
enters the p-orbital, therefore, the given element is a p-block element.</li>
<li>Further, since the valence shell contain 6(2 + 4) electrons.</li>
<li>Therefore, group number of element = 10 + number of electrons in the valence shell = 10 + 6 = 16.</li>
<li>The complete electronic configuration of the element is 1s<sup>2</sup> 2s<sup>2</sup> 2p<sup>6</sup> 3s<sup>2</sup> 3p<sup>4</sup> and the element is S (sulphur).</li>
</ul>
<p>ii)</p>
<ul>
<li>n = 4 suggest that the element belongs to the fourth period.<br />
Since the d-orbital is incomplete, therefore, it is a d-block element. The group number of the element = Number of electrons in (n &#8211; l)d subshell + number of ns-electrons = 2 + 2 = 4. Thus, the element lies in group 4 and 4th period.</li>
<li>The complete electronic configuration of the element is 1s<sup>2</sup> 2s<sup>2</sup> 2p<sup>6</sup> 3s<sup>2</sup> 3p<sup>6</sup> 3d<sup>2</sup> 4s<sup>2</sup> and the element is Ti (titanium).</li>
</ul>
<p>iii) n = 6 means that the element belongs to the sixth period. Since the last electron goes to the f-orbital, therefore, the element is a f-block element.</p>
<ul>
<li>All f-block elements lie in group 3. The complete electronic configuration of the element is [Xe] 4f<sup>7</sup> 5d<sup>1</sup> 6s<sup>2</sup>.</li>
<li>The atomic number of the element = 54 + 7+1+2 = 64 and the element is Gd (gadolinium).</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 31.<br />
The first (∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>1</sub>) and the second (∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>2</sub>) ionization enthalpies (in kJ mol1) and the (∆<sub>eg</sub>H) electron gain enthalpy (in kJ mol<sup>-1</sup>) of a few elements are given below.</p>
<table border="2">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="112"><strong>Elements</strong></td>
<td width="70"><strong>ΔH<sub>1</sub></strong></td>
<td width="80"><strong>ΔH<sub>2</sub></strong></td>
<td width="81"><strong>∆<sub>eg</sub>H</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112">I</td>
<td width="70">520</td>
<td width="80">7300</td>
<td width="81">-60</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112">II</td>
<td width="70">419</td>
<td width="80">3051</td>
<td width="81">-48</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112">III</td>
<td width="70">1681</td>
<td width="80">3374</td>
<td width="81">-328</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112">IV</td>
<td width="70">1008</td>
<td width="80">1846</td>
<td width="81">-295</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112">V</td>
<td width="70">2372</td>
<td width="80">5251</td>
<td width="81">+48</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112">VI</td>
<td width="70">738</td>
<td width="80">1451</td>
<td width="81">-40</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Which of the above elements is likely to be<br />
i) the least reactive element.<br />
ii) the most reactive metal.<br />
iii) the most reactive non-metal.<br />
iv) the least reactive non-metal.<br />
v) the metal which can form a stable binary halide of the formula MX<sub>2</sub> (X = halogen).<br />
vi) the metal which can form a predominantly stable covalent halide of the formula MX (X = halogen) ?<br />
Answer:<br />
i) The element V which has highest first ionization enthalpy (∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>1</sub>) and positive electron gain enthalpy (∆<sub>eg</sub>H) and therefore it is the least reactive element.</p>
<ul>
<li>Since, inert gases have positive ∆<sub>eg</sub>H<sub>1</sub> thus, the element V must be an inert gas.</li>
<li>The values of ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>1</sub>, ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>2</sub> and ∆<sub>eg</sub>H match with that of He (helium).</li>
</ul>
<p>ii) The element which has the least first ionization enthalpy (∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>1</sub>) and small negative electron gain enthalpy (∆<sub>eg</sub>H) is the most reactive metal (element II).</p>
<ul>
<li>The values of ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>1</sub>, ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>2</sub>, and ∆<sub>eg</sub>H match with that of K (potassium).</li>
</ul>
<p>iii) The element which has high first ionization enthalpy (∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>1</sub>) and second ionization enthalpy (∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>2</sub>) and a very high negative electron gain enthalpy (∆<sub>eg</sub>H) is the most reactive non-metal (element III).</p>
<ul>
<li>The values of ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>1</sub>, ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>2</sub> and ∆<sub>eg</sub>H match with that of F (fluorine).</li>
</ul>
<p>iv) The element IV has a high negative electron gain enthalpy (∆<sub>eg</sub>H) but not so high first ionization enthalpy (∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>1</sub>).</p>
<ul>
<li>Therefore, it is the least reactive non-metal.</li>
<li>The values of ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>1</sub>, ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>2</sub> and ∆<sub>eg</sub>H match with that of I (iodine).</li>
</ul>
<p>v) The element VI has low first ionization enthalpy (∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>1</sub>) but higher than that of alkali metals.</p>
<ul>
<li>Thus, it appears that the element is an alkaline earth metal and hence will form binary halide of the formula MX<sub>2</sub> where X = halogen.</li>
<li>The values of ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>1</sub>, ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>2</sub> and ∆<sub>eg</sub>H match with that of Mg (magnesium).</li>
</ul>
<p>vi) The element I has low first ionization (∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>1</sub>) but a very high second ionization enthalpy (∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>2</sub>).<br />
Therefore, it must be an alkali metal.</p>
<ul>
<li>Since the metal forms a predominantly stable covalent halide of the formula MX (X = hydrogen).</li>
<li>The values of ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>1</sub>, ∆<sub>i</sub>H<sub>2</sub> and ∆<sub>eg</sub>H match with that of Li (lithium).</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 32.<br />
Predict the formulas of the stable binary compounds that would be formed by the combination of the following pairs of elements.<br />
i) Lithium and oxygen<br />
ii) Magnesium and nitrogen<br />
iii) Aluminium and iodine<br />
iv) Silicon and oxygen<br />
v) Phosphorus and fluorine<br />
v) Element 71 and fluorine<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Lithium is an alkali metal (Group 1).</p>
<ul>
<li>It has only one electron in the valence shell, therefore, its valency is 1.</li>
<li>Oxygen is group 16 element with valency of 2.</li>
<li>Therefore, formula of the compound formed would be Li<sub>2</sub>O (lithium oxide).</li>
</ul>
<p>ii) Magnesium is an alkaline earth metal (Group 2) and hence has 2 valence electrons. Nitrogen is a group 15 element with valency of 8 &#8211; 5 = 3.</p>
<ul>
<li>Thus, the formula of the compound formed would be Mg<sub>3</sub>N<sub>2</sub> (magnesium nitride).</li>
</ul>
<p>iii) Aluminium is a group 13 element with a valency of 3 while iodine is a halogen (group 17) with valency of 1.</p>
<ul>
<li>Therefore, the formula of the compound formed would be AlI<sub>3</sub> (aluminium hydride).</li>
</ul>
<p>iv) Silicon is a group 14 element with valency of 4 while oxygen is group 16 element with valency of 2. Hence, the formula of the compound formed would be SiO<sub>2</sub> (silicon dioxide).</p>
<p>v) Phosphorus is a group 15 element with valency of 3 or 5 while fluorine is a group 17 element with valency of 1. Hence, the formula of the compound formed would be PF<sub>3</sub> or PF<sub>5</sub>.</p>
<p>vi) Element with atomic number 71 is a lanthanide called lutetium (Lu). Its common valency is 3. Fluorine is a group 17 (halogen) element with valency of 1.<br />
Therefore the formula of the compound formed would be LuF<sub>3</sub> (lutetium fluoride).</p>
<p>Question 33.<br />
In the modern periodic table, the period indicates the value of<br />
a) atomic number<br />
c) principal quantum number<br />
b) atomic mass<br />
d) azimuthal quantum number.<br />
Answer:<br />
In the modem periodic table, each period begins with the filling of a new shell. Therefore each period represents the principal quantum number of the valence electrons of the represent elements. Thus, option (c) is correct.</p>
<p>Question 34.<br />
Which of the following statements related to the modern periodic table is incorrect ?<br />
a) The p-block has 6 columns, because a maximum of 6 electrons can occupy all the orbitals in a p-shell.<br />
b) The d-block has 8 columns, because a maximum of 8 electrons can occupy all the orbital in a d-subshell.<br />
c) Each block contains a number of columns equal to the number of electrons that can occupy that subshell.<br />
d) The block indicates value of azimuthal quantum number (l) for the last subshell the received electrons in building up the electronic configuration.<br />
Answer:<br />
Statement (b) is incorrect, while the other statements are correct.<br />
The correct statement is the d-block has 10 columns, because a maximum of 10 electrons can occupy all the orbitals in a d-subshell.</p>
<p>Question 35.<br />
Anything that influences the valence electrons will affect the chemistry of the element. Which one of the following factors does not affect the valence shell ?<br />
a) Valence principal quantum number (n)<br />
b) Nuclear charge (Z)<br />
c) Nuclear mass<br />
d) Number of core electrons<br />
Answer:<br />
Nuclear mass does not affect the valence shell because it consists of protons and neutrons, when proton, i.e., nuclear charge affects the valence shell but neutrons do not. Thus, option (c) is correct.</p>
<p>Question 36.<br />
The size of isoelectronic species &#8211; F<sup>&#8211;</sup>, Ne and Na<sup>+</sup> is affected by<br />
a) nuclear charge (Z)<br />
b) valence principal quantum number (n)<br />
c) electron-electron interaction in the outer orbitals<br />
d) none of the factors because their size is the same.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>The size of isoelectronic ions depends upon the nuclear charge (Z).</li>
<li>As the nuclear charge increases, the size decreases.</li>
<li>For example, F<sup>&#8211;</sup> (+9) &gt; Ne (+10) &gt; Na<sup>+</sup> (+11). Thus, option (a) is correct.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 37.<br />
Which one of the following statements is incorrect in relation to ionization enthalpy ?<br />
a) Ionization enthalpy increases for each successive electron<br />
b) The greatest increase in ionization enthalpy is experienced on removal of electron from core noble gas configuration.<br />
c) End of valence electrons is marked by a big jump in ionization enthalpy.<br />
d) Removal of electron from orbitals bearing lower n value is easier than from orbital having higher n value.<br />
Answer:<br />
Statement (d) is incorrect. Its correct form is removal of electron from orbitals bearing lower n value is difficult than from orbital having higher n value.</p>
<p>Question 38.<br />
Considering the elements B, Al, Mg and K, the correct order of their metallic character is<br />
a) B &gt; Al &gt; Mg &gt; K<br />
b) Al &gt; Mg &gt; B &gt; K<br />
c) Mg &gt; Al &gt; K &gt; B<br />
d) K &gt; Mg &gt; Al &gt; B<br />
Answer:<br />
d) K &gt; Mg &gt; Al &gt; B</p>
<ul>
<li>In a period, electronegativity increases and hence the metallic character decreases as we move from left to right.</li>
<li>Therefore, metallic character of K, Mg and Al decreases in the order: K &gt; Mg &gt; Al. Further, within a group, the electronegativity decreases and hence the metallic character increases from top to bottom.</li>
<li>Therefore, Al is more metallic than B. Hence, the correct order of decreasing metallic character will be K &gt; Mg &gt; Al &gt; B.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 39.<br />
Considering the element B, C, N, F and Si, the correct order of their non-metallic character is:<br />
a) B &gt; C &gt; Si &gt; N &gt; F<br />
b) Si &gt; C &gt; B &gt; Sl &gt; F<br />
c) F &gt; N &gt; C &gt; B &gt; Si<br />
d) F &gt; N &gt; C &gt; Si &gt; B<br />
Answer:<br />
c) F &gt; N &gt; C &gt; B &gt; Si</p>
<ul>
<li>In a period, the non-metallic character increases from left to right.</li>
<li>Thus, among B, C, N and F, non-metallic character decreases in order: F &gt; N &gt; C &gt; B. Further, within a group, non-metallic character decreases from the top to bottom.</li>
<li>Therefore, C is more non-metallic than Si.</li>
<li>Hence, the correct sequence of decreasing non-metallic character will be F &gt; N &gt; C &gt; B &gt; Si.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 3" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 40.<br />
Considering the elements F, Cl, O and N, the correct order of their chemical reactivity in terms of oxidizing property is<br />
a) F &gt; Cl &gt; O &gt; N<br />
b) F &gt; O &gt; Cl &gt; N<br />
c) Cl &gt; F &gt; O &gt; N<br />
d) O &gt; F &gt; N &gt; Cl<br />
Answer:<br />
b) F &gt; O &gt; Cl &gt; N</p>
<ul>
<li>Within a period, the oxidising character increases from left to right. Therefore, among F, O and N, oxidising power decreases in the order : F &gt; O &gt; N.</li>
<li>Further, within a group, oxidising power decreases from top to bottom.</li>
<li>Thus, F is a stronger bxidising agent than Cl. Moreover, because O is more electronegative than Cl, therefore, O is a stronger oxidising agent than Cl.</li>
<li>Hence, overall decreasing order of oxidising power will be F &gt; O &gt; Cl &gt; N.</li>
</ul>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
		<post-id xmlns="com-wordpress:feed-additions:1">19905</post-id>	</item>
		<item>
		<title>Binomial Theorem MCQ AP Inter 1st Year Maths Chapter 7</title>
		<link>https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-maths-chapter-7-mcq/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Mahesh]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sat, 17 Oct 2026 05:27:58 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[AP Inter 1st Year]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tsboardsolutions.in/?p=19911</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Practice AP Inter 1st Year Maths Study Material Chapter 7 Binomial Theorem MCQ to identify your strengths and weak areas. AP Inter 1st Year Maths Binomial Theorem MCQ Question 1. The 3rd term of (3x &#8211; )4 1) 2) 3) 4) Answer: 1) Explanation: Given (3x &#8211; )4, Here a = 3x, b = , ... <a title="Binomial Theorem MCQ AP Inter 1st Year Maths Chapter 7" class="read-more" href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-maths-chapter-7-mcq/" aria-label="Read more about Binomial Theorem MCQ AP Inter 1st Year Maths Chapter 7">Read more</a>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Practice <a href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-maths-textbook-solutions/">AP Inter 1st Year Maths Study Material</a> Chapter 7 Binomial Theorem MCQ to identify your strengths and weak areas.</p>
<h2>AP Inter 1st Year Maths Binomial Theorem MCQ</h2>
<p>Question 1.<br />
The 3rd term of (3x &#8211; \(\frac{y^3}{6}\))<sup>4</sup><br />
1) \({ }^4 C_2(3 x)^2\left(\frac{-y^3}{6}\right)^2\)<br />
2) \({ }^4 C_2(3 x)^2\left(\frac{-y^2}{6}\right)^2\)<br />
3) \({ }^4 C_2(3 x)^3\left(\frac{-y^3}{6}\right)^2\)<br />
4) \({ }^4 C_2(3 x)^3\left(\frac{-y^2}{6}\right)^2\)<br />
Answer:<br />
1) \({ }^4 C_2(3 x)^2\left(\frac{-y^3}{6}\right)^2\)</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
Given (3x &#8211; \(\frac{y^3}{6}\))<sup>4</sup>, Here a = 3x, b = \(\frac{-y^3}{6}\), n = 4, T<sub>r+1</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r</sub> a<sup>n-r</sup>.b<sup>r</sup></p>
<p>T<sub>3</sub> = T<sub>2+1</sub> = <sup>4</sup>C<sub>2</sub> (3x)<sup>4-2</sup>\(\left(\frac{-y^3}{6}\right)^2\)<br />
= <sup>4</sup>C<sub>2</sub> (3x)<sup>2</sup>\(</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
C<sub>0</sub> + 3.C<sub>1</sub> + 3<sup>2</sup>.C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230;&#8230;&#8230;&#8230;. + 3<sup>n</sup>.C<sub>n</sub> =<br />
1) 2<sup>n</sup><br />
2) 3<sup>n</sup><br />
3) 4<sup>n</sup><br />
4) 5<sup>n</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
3) 4<sup>n</sup></p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
We know that (1 + x)<sup>n</sup> = C<sub>0</sub> + C<sub>1</sub>x + C<sub>1</sub>x<sup>2</sup> + C<sub>3</sub>x<sup>3</sup> + &#8230; + C<sub>n</sub>x<sup>n</sup> &#8230; (1)<br />
Put x = 3 in eq (1) we get C<sub>0</sub> + C<sub>1</sub>3 + C<sub>2</sub>3<sup>2</sup> + &#8230; + C<sub>n</sub>3<sup>n</sup> = (1 + 3)<sup>n</sup><br />
C<sub>0</sub> + 3.C<sub>1</sub> + 3<sup>2</sup>.C<sub>2</sub> + &#8230;&#8230; + 3<sup>n</sup>.C<sub>n</sub> = 4<sup>n</sup></p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
The middle term in the expansion of (4 + 2x)<sup>6</sup> is<br />
1) 11240 x<sup>2</sup><br />
2) 10240 x<sup>3</sup><br />
3) 12240 x<sup>4</sup><br />
4) 10340 x<sup>4</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
2) 10240 x<sup>3</sup></p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
Given (4 + 2x)<sup>6</sup> contains 7 terms<br />
The middle term T<sub>4</sub> = T<sub>3+1</sub> = <sup>6</sup>C<sub>3</sub> (4)<sup>6-3</sup>. (2x)<sup>3</sup> = 20 × 64 × 8 × x<sup>3</sup> = 10240 x<sup>3</sup></p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
The coefficient of x<sup>2</sup>y<sup>2</sup> in the expansion of (x + 1)<sup>2</sup> (y + 1)<sup>3</sup> is<br />
1) 3<br />
2) 5<br />
3) 2<br />
4) 10<br />
Answer:<br />
1) 3</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
(x + 1)<sup>2</sup> (y + 1)<sup>3</sup> = (x<sup>2</sup> + 2x + 1) (y<sup>3</sup> + 3y<sup>2</sup> + 3y + 1)<br />
Coefficient of x<sup>2</sup>y<sup>2</sup> is “3”</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Binomial Theorem MCQ AP Inter 1st Year Maths Chapter 7" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
In the expansion of (1 + x)<sup>20</sup>, if the coefficients of rth and (r + 4)<sup>th</sup> terms are equal, then r is<br />
1) 7<br />
2) 8<br />
3) 9<br />
4) 10<br />
Answer:<br />
3) 9</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
Given expansion is (1 + x)<sup>20</sup><br />
Given condition is coefficient of r* term = coeff of (r + 4)<sup>th</sup> term<br />
⇒ <sup>20</sup>C<sub>r-1</sub> = <sup>20</sup>C<sub>r+3</sub><br />
⇒ r &#8211; 1 + r + 3 = 20 [∵ <sup>n</sup>C<sub>r</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>s</sub> ⇒ r + s = n]<br />
⇒ 2r = 18<br />
⇒ r = 9</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
The remainder when 848 is divided by 63 is<br />
1) 4<br />
2) 2<br />
3) 1<br />
4) 7<br />
Answer:<br />
3) 1</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
848 = (64)<sup>24</sup> = (63 + 1)<sup>24</sup> = 63q + 1 [∵ q is some Integer]<br />
∴ Remainder = 1.</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
The expansion of (x + y)<sup>1000</sup> is<br />
1) [latex]\sum_{\mathrm{r}=0}^{1000} 1000 \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}} \mathrm{x}^{\mathrm{r}-1000} \mathrm{y}^{\mathrm{r}}\)<br />
2) \(\sum_{\mathrm{r}=0}^{1000} 1000 \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}} \mathrm{x}^{1000-\mathrm{r}^2} \mathrm{y}^{\mathrm{r}}\)<br />
3) \(\sum_{r=0}^{999}{ }^{1000} C_r x^{r-1000} y^r\)<br />
4) \(\sum_{r=0}^{999}{ }^{1000} C_r x^{1000-r} y^r\)<br />
Answer:<br />
2) \(\sum_{\mathrm{r}=0}^{1000} 1000 \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}} \mathrm{x}^{1000-\mathrm{r}^2} \mathrm{y}^{\mathrm{r}}\)</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
Given expansion = (x + y)<sup>1000</sup> = \(\sum_{\mathrm{r}=0}^{1000} 1000 \mathrm{C}_{\mathrm{r}} \mathrm{x}^{1000-\mathrm{r}} \cdot \mathrm{y}^{\mathrm{r}}\)</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
The coefficients of the first and the last terms of the expansion (x + y)<sup>1000</sup> are<br />
1) 2<br />
2) 3<br />
3) 1<br />
4) 7<br />
Answer:<br />
2) 3</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
Given expansion is (x + y)<sup>n</sup><br />
(x + y)<sup>n</sup> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>0</sub>x<sup>n</sup> + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>1</sub>x<sup>n-1</sup>y + &#8230; + <sup>n</sup>C<sub>n</sub>. y<sup>n</sup><br />
Coefficient of first and last terms are <sup>n</sup>C<sub>0</sub> and <sup>n</sup>C<sub>n</sub><br />
<sup>n</sup>C<sub>0</sub> = <sup>n</sup>C<sub>n</sub> = 1.</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
The expansion of (xy + 2)<sup>2</sup> is<br />
1) x<sup>2</sup> + y<sup>2</sup> + 4<br />
2) x<sup>2</sup> y<sup>2</sup> + 4xy + 4<br />
3) xy<sup>2</sup> + 4 + 2xy<br />
4) x<sup>2</sup>y<sup>2</sup> + 2xy + 4<br />
Answer:<br />
2) x<sup>2</sup> y<sup>2</sup> + 4xy + 4</p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
(xy + 2)<sup>2</sup> = (xy)<sup>2</sup> + 2(xy) . 2 + 2<sup>2</sup> = x<sup>2</sup>y<sup>2</sup> + 4xy + 4</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
The term <sup>91</sup>C<sub>2</sub>x<sup>89</sup> belongs to<br />
1) x<sup>89</sup><br />
2) (x &#8211; 2)<sup>90</sup><br />
3) (x &#8211; 1)<sup>91</sup><br />
4) (x + 1)<sup>90</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
3) (x &#8211; 1)<sup>91</sup></p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
Term <sup>91</sup>C<sub>2</sub>x<sup>89</sup> is belongs to (x &#8211; 1)<sup>91</sup><br />
T<sub>3</sub> of (x &#8211; 1)<sup>91</sup> = <sup>91</sup>C<sub>2</sub>x<sup>91-2</sup>.(-1)<sup>2</sup><br />
= <sup>91</sup>C<sub>2</sub>x<sup>89</sup></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Binomial Theorem MCQ AP Inter 1st Year Maths Chapter 7" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
The cofficient of x<sup>8</sup>y<sup>10</sup> in the expansion f (x + y)<sup>18</sup> is<br />
1) <sup>18</sup>C<sub>8</sub><br />
2) <sup>18</sup>P<sub>10</sub><br />
3) 2<sup>18</sup><br />
4) None of these<br />
Answer:<br />
1) <sup>18</sup>C<sub>8</sub></p>
<p>Explanation:<br />
Given expansion is (x + y)<sup>18</sup><br />
The coefficient of x<sup>18</sup>y<sup>18</sup> = <sup>18</sup>C<sub>10</sub><br />
= <sup>18</sup>C<sub>18-10</sub><br />
= <sup>18</sup>C<sub>8</sub></p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
		<post-id xmlns="com-wordpress:feed-additions:1">19911</post-id>	</item>
		<item>
		<title>Organic Chemistry &#8211; Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8</title>
		<link>https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-chemistry-chapter-8/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Srinivas]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Fri, 16 Oct 2026 12:07:06 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[AP Inter 1st Year]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://tsboardsolutions.in/?p=19767</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Regular practice with AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 8 Organic Chemistry &#8211; Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers helps students stay prepared for examinations. AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry 8th Lesson Organic Chemistry &#8211; Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers I. Multiple Choice Questions Question 1. Alicyclic compounds ... <a title="Organic Chemistry &#8211; Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8" class="read-more" href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-chemistry-chapter-8/" aria-label="Read more about Organic Chemistry &#8211; Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8">Read more</a>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Regular practice with <a href="https://tsboardsolutions.in/ap-inter-1st-year-chemistry-study-material/">AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Study Material</a> Chapter 8 Organic Chemistry &#8211; Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers helps students stay prepared for examinations.</p>
<h2>AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry 8th Lesson Organic Chemistry &#8211; Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers</h2>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">I. Multiple Choice Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Alicyclic compounds are<br />
1) Aromatic compounds<br />
2) Aliphatic cyclic compounds<br />
3) Heterocyclic compounds Aliphatic cyclic compounds.<br />
4) Alkanes<br />
Answer:<br />
2) Aliphatic cyclic compounds</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
What is the formula of Anisole?<br />
1) C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>OCH<sub>3</sub><br />
2) C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>NH<sub>2</sub><br />
3) C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COCH<sub>5</sub><br />
4) C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>OH<br />
Answer:<br />
The IUPAC name of Anisole is methoxybenzene.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19780" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-1.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 1" width="356" height="110" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-1.png 356w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-1-300x93.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 356px) 100vw, 356px" /></p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Which of the following is an example for heterocyclic aromatic compound?<br />
1) Aniline<br />
2) Benzene<br />
3) Furan<br />
4) Naphthalene<br />
Answer:<br />
3) Furan<br />
Furan is an example for heterocyclic aromatic compound.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19882" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-92.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 92" width="70" height="73" /></p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
In which of the following functional groups are arranged as per the priority order of the functional groups?<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19781" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-2.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 2" width="286" height="147" /><br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19782" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-3.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 3" width="292" height="35" /></p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
The IUPAC name of Neopentane is<br />
1) 2-methyl propane<br />
2) 2,2-dimethyl butane<br />
3) 2-methyl butane<br />
4) 2,2-dimethyl propane<br />
Answer:<br />
4) 2,2-dimethyl propane<br />
The IUPAC name of Neopentane is 2, 2 &#8211; Dimethyl Propane</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Hybridisation of carbon in \(\stackrel{+}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_3\) is<br />
1) sp<sup>3</sup><br />
2) sp<sup>3</sup><br />
3) sp<br />
4) sp<sup>3</sup>d<br />
Answer:<br />
2) sp<sup>3</sup></p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Which of the following involves the displacement effect of sigma bonded electrons ?<br />
1) Mesomeric effect<br />
2) Inductive effect<br />
3) Resonance<br />
4) Elficirovnerk efiecf-<br />
Answer:<br />
2) Inductive effect</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Kjeldahl method is not applicable to compounds containing nitrogen in<br />
1) Nitro group<br />
2) Az0 group<br />
3) Nitrogen present in the ring<br />
4) All<br />
Answer:<br />
4) All<br />
Answer:<br />
In all cases Kjeldahls method is not applicable to compounds containing nitrogen</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
Crude oil in petroleum industry is separated by<br />
1) Distillation<br />
2) Fractional distillation<br />
3) Crystallisation<br />
4) Solvent extraction<br />
Answer:<br />
By Fractional distillation</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
Chloroform and aniline are easily separated by the technique<br />
1) Distillation<br />
2) Fractional Distillation<br />
3) Sublimation<br />
4) Chromatography<br />
Answer:<br />
1) Distillation<br />
Chloroform and Anilin. are separatd by distillation</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">II. Fill in the Blanks</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Ethyl alcohol and methyl alcohol can be separated by ___<br />
Answer:<br />
Fractional distillation.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Steam distillation is applied to separate substances which are ___<br />
Answer:<br />
Steam volatile</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Nitrogen, sulphur and halogens present in an organic compound are detected by ___.<br />
Answer:<br />
Lassaigne’s Test (or) Sodium fusion extract test.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Methoxy propane and Ethoxy ethane are examples of ____.<br />
Answer:<br />
metamers (difference in attachment of alkyl group.</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Propanone and propanal are ____ isomers.<br />
Propanone (ketone)<br />
Propanal (aldehyde)<br />
both are functional group isomers.</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">III. One Word Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Define catenation.<br />
Answer:<br />
Self linkage of atoms among themselves to form long chains and rings is called catenation.</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
What is the hybridisation of carbon in Ethane ?<br />
Answer:<br />
In ethane (CH<sub>3</sub> &#8211; CH<sub>3</sub>) each carbon undergo sp<sup>3</sup> hybridization.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
What is the hybridization of carbon in CH<sub>3</sub>F ?<br />
Answer:<br />
In CH<sub>3</sub>F carbon undergoes sp<sup>3</sup> hybridization.</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Define functional group.<br />
Answer:<br />
A group of atoms in a molecule that are responsible for the chemical reactivity and properties of that molecule is called functional group. Eg : Aldehyde (-CHO)</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
What is homologous series ?<br />
Answer:<br />
A series of organic compounds containing a characteristic functional group represented by same general formula and successive members differ by -CH<sub>2</sub> is called homologous series. Eg : Alkanes &#8211; CH<sub>4</sub>, C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>6</sub>, C<sub>3</sub>H<sub>8</sub> etc &#8230;&#8230;.</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
How many chain isomers are possible for alkane having molecular formula C<sub>5</sub>H<sub>12</sub> ?<br />
Answer:<br />
For C<sub>5</sub>H<sub>12</sub> possible chain isomers are three<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19783" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-4.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 4" width="446" height="220" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-4.png 446w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-4-300x148.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 446px) 100vw, 446px" /></p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
What is an electrophile ?<br />
Answer:<br />
An electrophile is a reagent that takes away an electron pair from reactive site.<br />
Eg: \(\mathrm{NO}_2^{+}\), \(\mathrm{CH}_3^{+}\).</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
What is an electromeric effect ?<br />
Answer:<br />
The complete transfer of a shared pair of π &#8211; electrons to one of the atoms joined by a multiple bond on the demand of attacking reagent is called electromeric effect.</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
What is differential extraction ?<br />
Answer:<br />
When an organic compound is present in an aqueous solution. It is separated by shaking it with an organic solvent in which it is more soluble than in water.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
What is distillation ?<br />
Answer:<br />
The method used to separate volatile liquids from non-volatile impurities and the liquids having sufficient difference in their boiling points.</p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
What is retardation factor ?<br />
Answer:<br />
In chromatography the relative adsorption of each component of the mixture is expressed in terms of it&#8217;s retardation factor (R<sub>f</sub>).<br />
R<sub>f</sub> = \(\frac{\text { Distance travelled by component }}{\text { Distance travelled by solvent }}\)</p>
<p>Question 12.<br />
Write the principle involved in paper chromatography.<br />
Answer:<br />
The principle involved in paper chromatography is partition. Here differential partitioning between stationary phase and mobile phase.</p>
<p>Question 13.<br />
Give two examples for alicyclic compounds.<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19784" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-5.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 5" width="356" height="56" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-5.png 356w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-5-300x47.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 356px) 100vw, 356px" /></p>
<p>Question 14.<br />
Give examples for benzenoid aromatic compounds.<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19785" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-6.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 6" width="411" height="100" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-6.png 411w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-6-300x73.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 411px) 100vw, 411px" /></p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">IV. Very Short Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
How many n and a bonds are present in each of the following molecules ?<br />
a) HC ≡ CCH = CHCH<sub>3</sub><br />
b) CH<sub>2</sub> = C = CHCH<sub>3</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
a) CH ≡ C &#8211; CH = CH &#8211; CH<sub>3</sub><br />
10σ bonds 3π-bonds<br />
b) CH<sub>2</sub> = C = CH &#8211; CH<sub>3</sub><br />
9σ bonds 2π-bonds</p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
What is the type of hybridisation of each carbon in the following compound? CH<sub>3</sub>CH=CHCN<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19786" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-7.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 7" width="334" height="71" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-7.png 334w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-7-300x64.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 334px) 100vw, 334px" /></p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
What is carbocation? Give example.<br />
Answer:<br />
A molecule with a positively charged carbon atom is called carbocation, Eg : \(\mathrm{CH}_3^{+}\).</p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
What is metamerism? Give example.<br />
Answer:<br />
Organic compounds having same molecular formula but differ in attachment of alkyle groups is called metamerism. These are called metamers.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19787" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-8.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 8" width="431" height="75" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-8.png 431w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-8-300x52.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 431px) 100vw, 431px" /></p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Write the IUPAC names of<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19788" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-9.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 9" width="163" height="208" /><br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19789" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-10.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 10" width="258" height="251" /></p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Write the IUPAC names of<br />
a) CH<sub>3</sub>CH(OH)CH<sub>3</sub><br />
b)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19790" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-11.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 11" width="104" height="83" /><br />
Answer:<br />
a)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19791" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-12.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 12" width="179" height="111" /></p>
<p>b)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19792" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-13.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 13" width="240" height="113" /></p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Write the structures of<br />
(a) 4-ethyl 2-methyl aniline and<br />
(b) Neopentane.<br />
Answer:<br />
a) 4-Ethyl 2-methyl Aniline<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19793" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-14.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 14" width="204" height="125" /><br />
b) Neopentane<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19794" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-15.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 15" width="240" height="115" /></p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Explain the principle of Adsorption chromatography.<br />
Answer:<br />
Principle of Adsorption chromatography This is based on the fact 15 at different compounds are adsorbed on an adsorbent to different degrees.</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Explain the term &#8220;Crystallisation&#8221;.<br />
Answer:<br />
Crystallisation :This technique is used for the purification of solid organic compounds. It is based on the difference in the solubilities of the compound and the impurities in a suitable solvent.</p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
What are electrophiles and nucleophiles? Give examples.<br />
Answer:.<br />
1) Electrophiles : (Electron loving) :A reagent that takes away an electron pair from reactive site is called electrophile (E<sup>+</sup>). Eg : \(\mathrm{NO}_2^{+}\), \(\mathrm{CH}_3^{+} .\)</p>
<p>2) Nucleophiles: (Nucleus loving) :A reagent that brings an electron pair to the reactive site is called a nucleophile \(\left(\mathrm{Nu}^{\Theta}\right)\). Eg : CN<sup>&#8211;</sup> and OH<sup>&#8211;</sup> etc.</p>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">V. Short Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
What is the position isomerism and functional isomerism? Give one example for each.<br />
Answer:<br />
Position isomerism : Compounds having same molecular formula but differ in position of substituent / functional, group/ multiple bond are called position isomers.<br />
This is called position isomerism.<br />
Ex:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19795" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-16.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 16" width="373" height="102" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-16.png 373w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-16-300x82.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 373px) 100vw, 373px" /><br />
Functional group isomerism : Compounds having same molecular formula but differ in nature of functional group are called functional group isomers.<br />
Eg:<br />
1)Alcohols, Ethens are functional group isomers<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19796" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-17.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 17" width="338" height="81" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-17.png 338w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-17-300x72.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 338px) 100vw, 338px" /><br />
2) Aldehydes, factors are functional group isomers<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19797" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-18.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 18" width="354" height="86" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-18.png 354w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-18-300x73.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 354px) 100vw, 354px" /></p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Explain the difference between structural isomers and stereoisomers.<br />
Answer:</p>
<table border="2">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Structural Isomers</td>
<td>Stereo Isomers</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1. The compounds having same molecular formula but differ in their structural arrangements of atoms or group of atoms.</td>
<td>1. The compounds having same molecular formula but differ in their spatial arrangement of atoms or group of atoms.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2. Spatial arrangement is not considered.</td>
<td>2. Structure of the compound is not changed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3. Structural isomers possess different physical properties.<br />
Ex : With increase in number of branches in alkanes with same molecular formula, boiling points are decreased.</td>
<td>3. Stereo isomers may or may not differ in their physical properties.<br />
Ex :a) Diastereomers and cis-trans isomers differ in their boiling and melting points.<br />
b) Enantiomers have same physical properties.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4. Chain isomers, positional isomers, functional isomers, metamers, ketoenol tautomers and ring isomers are called structural isomers.</td>
<td>4. Configurational and conformational isomers are called stereo isomers.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Write about hyper conjugation?<br />
Answer:<br />
Hyperconjugation :The delocalisation of σ &#8211; electrons of C-H bond of an alkyl group directly attached to an atom of unsaturated system (or) to an atom with unshared P-orbital is called hyperconjugation.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19798" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-19.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 19" width="461" height="64" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-19.png 461w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-19-300x42.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 461px) 100vw, 461px" /></p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Write a note on<br />
a) Distillation,<br />
b) Distillation under reduced pressure.<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19799" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-20.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 20" width="256" height="236" /><br />
a) Distillation:</p>
<ul>
<li>This process is useful for the purification of liquids contaminated with non-volatile impurities.</li>
<li>The impure liquid is boiled in a distillation flask and the vapours are condensed and collected in a receiver.</li>
<li>This method can also be used to separate liquids which differ in their boiling points by about 40°C.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19800" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-21.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 21" width="356" height="230" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-21.png 356w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-21-300x194.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 356px) 100vw, 356px" /></p>
<p>b) Distillation under reduced pressure :</p>
<ul>
<li>This method is useful to purify liquids that have very high BPs and those which decompose at or below their boiling points.</li>
<li>If the external pressure is reduced the liquid boils at lower temperature than its normal BP without decomposition.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 5.<br />
What are the different types of organic reactions?<br />
Answer:<br />
Common types of organic reactions are<br />
(1) Substitution reactions<br />
(2) Addition reactions<br />
(3) Elimination reactions<br />
(4) Rearrangement reactions.</p>
<p>1) Substitution (Displacement) reactions : The replacement of an atom or group from a molecule by a different atom or group is known as &#8216;substitution reaction&#8217;.<br />
Ex :<br />
i) <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19801" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-22.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 22" width="247" height="31" /><br />
ii) CH<sub>3</sub>OH + HBr → CH<sub>3</sub> Br + H<sub>2</sub>O</p>
<p>2) Addition reactions : Reactions in which atoms or groups of atoms are added to a molecule are known as addition reactions.<br />
Ex :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19802" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-23.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 23" width="408" height="45" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-23.png 408w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-23-300x33.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 408px) 100vw, 408px" /><br />
The multiple bond breaks and then the addition takes place.</p>
<p>3) Elimination reactions : The molecule loses atoms or group of atoms and a multiple bond is formed. (These are actually the reverse of addition reactions)<br />
Ex :<br />
i) Dehydration :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19803" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-24.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 24" width="360" height="61" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-24.png 360w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-24-300x51.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 360px) 100vw, 360px" /></p>
<p>ii) Dehalogenation:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19804" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-25.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 25" width="338" height="55" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-25.png 338w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-25-300x49.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 338px) 100vw, 338px" /></p>
<p>4) Molecular rearrangement reactions: In these reactions, an atom or a group migrates from one atom to another atom, within the same molecule.<br />
Ex :<br />
i) n &#8211; Butane to Isobutane :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19805" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-26.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 26" width="398" height="84" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-26.png 398w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-26-300x63.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 398px) 100vw, 398px" /></p>
<p>ii) Benzophenone oxime to Benzanilide :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19806" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-27.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 27" width="379" height="133" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-27.png 379w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-27-300x105.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 379px) 100vw, 379px" /></p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Write the equations involved in the detection of Nitrogen, Halogens and Sulphur in organic compounds.<br />
Answer:<br />
Lassaigne&#8217;s Test: In Lassaigne&#8217;s test, the organic compound is mixed with sodium metal and fused strongly.</p>
<ul>
<li>The fused mass is extracted with water by plunging the red hot ignition tube in distilled water and the contents are boiled for 5 minutes and filtered.</li>
<li>The filtrate is called Sodium extract or Lassaigne&#8217;s extract.</li>
<li>If nitrogen is present in the organic compound, it reacts with sodium and carbon forming sodium cyanide.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19807" style="font-size: inherit;" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-28.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 28" width="356" height="53" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-28.png 356w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-28-300x45.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 356px) 100vw, 356px" /></li>
</ul>
<ul>
<li>If sulphur is present in the organic compound, it reacts with sodium forming sodium sulphide.<br />
2 Na + S → Na<sub>2</sub>S</li>
<li>If halogens are present in the organic compound, they form sodium halides.<br />
2 Na + X → 2 NaX (X = Cl, Br or I)</li>
</ul>
<p>Test for Nitrogen : A little of the Lassaigne&#8217;s extract is made alkaline with NaOH solution and then freshly prepared FeSO<sub>4</sub> solution is added.</p>
<ul>
<li>To it 2 &#8211; 3 drops of FeCl<sub>3</sub> solution is added, cooled and acidified with cone. HCl.</li>
<li>A prussian blue or green ppt. or colouration is observed.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19808" style="font-size: inherit;" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-29.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 29" width="535" height="108" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-29.png 535w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-29-300x61.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 535px) 100vw, 535px" /></li>
</ul>
<p>Test for Halogens A little of the Lassaigne&#8217;s extract is acidified with nitric acid and treated with AgNO<sub>3</sub> solution.</p>
<ul>
<li>If white ppt. soluble, in NH<sub>4</sub>OH is formed, the halide is Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup>. Hence, chlorine is present.</li>
<li>If pale yellow ppt. partially soluble in NH<sub>4</sub>OH is formed, the halide is Br<sup>&#8211;</sup>. Hence, bromine is present.</li>
<li>If yellow ppt. insoluble in NH<sub>4</sub>OH is formed, the halide is I<sup>&#8211;</sup>. Hence, iodine is present.<br />
Test for Sulphur: To a little of the Lassaigne’s extract freshly prepared sodium nitroprusside solution is added.</li>
<li>Deep purple colouration is observed.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19809" style="font-size: inherit;" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-30.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 30" width="532" height="50" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-30.png 532w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-30-300x28.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 532px) 100vw, 532px" /></li>
</ul>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Write a note on Resonance effect.<br />
Answer:<br />
Resonance Effect : The polarity produced in the molecules by the interaction of two π bonds or between a π bond and long pair of electrons present on adjacent atom is called resonance effect (or) mesomeric effect.<br />
Two types of Effects</p>
<p>1) +R Effect (Positive resonance effect) (+M effect) The transfer of electrons is away from an atom (or) substituent attached to the conjugated system is called +R effect. Eg : NH<sub>2</sub> group</p>
<p>2) &#8211; R Effect (Negative resonance effect) (-M Effect): The transfer of electrons towards the atom (or)substituent attached to the conjugated system is called -R effect. Eg : CO, NO<sub>2</sub> group.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Explain inductive effect with a suitable example.<br />
Answer:<br />
Inductive Effect The polarisation of σ-bond caused by the polarisation of adjacent σ-bond is called inductive effect<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19810" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-31.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 31" width="391" height="46" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-31.png 391w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-31-300x35.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 391px) 100vw, 391px" /><br />
This effect is passed on to the subsequent bonds but the effect decreases after three bonds. This is a permanent effect operating in the molecule.</p>
<p>Types of Inductive Effect:</p>
<ol>
<li>Positive inductive Effect (+I) : Electron donating groups causes positive inductive Effet (+I). Eg : Alkyl groups R-, (Ethyl C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>5</sub> &#8211; Methyl CH<sub>3</sub>)</li>
<li>Negative inductive Effect (-I) Electron with drawing groups causes negative inductive effect (-I). Eg : CN<sup>&#8211;</sup>, -COOH etc&#8230;&#8230;.
<ul>
<li>Presence of +I effect groups, in a molecule increases the basic nature of that molecule.</li>
<li>Presence of -I effect groups in a molecule increases the acidic nature of that molecule.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ol>
<p>Question 9.<br />
Write about homolytic fission and heterolytic fission.<br />
Answer:<br />
Heterolytic cleavage- Bond breaking takes place by unequal sharing of electrons of bond, i.e, shared pair of electrons remains with one of the fragment.</p>
<p>• Ions are formed in heterolytic cleavage.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19811" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-32.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 32" width="193" height="39" /><br />
Homolytic cleavage : Bond breaking takes place by equal sharing of electrons of bond, i.e, one of the electrons of the shared pair in a covalent bond goes with each of the bonded atoms.</p>
<p>• In homolytic cleavage free radicals are formed<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19812" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-33.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 33" width="168" height="68" /></p>
<p>Question 10.<br />
Discuss the chemistry of Lassaigne&#8217;s test.<br />
Answer:<br />
Lassaigne&#8217;s Test: In Lassaigne&#8217;s test, the organic compound is mixed with sodium metal and fused strongly.</p>
<ul>
<li>The fused mass is extracted with water by plunging the red hot ignition tube in distilled water and the contents are boiled for 5 minutes and filtered.</li>
<li>The filtrate is called sodium extract or Lassaigne&#8217;s extract.</li>
<li>If nitrogen is present in the organic compound, it reacts with sodium and carbon forming sodium cyanide.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19813" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-34.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 34" width="209" height="61" /></li>
<li>If sulphur is present in the organic compound, it reacts with sodium forming sodium sulphide.<br />
2 Na + S → Na<sub>2</sub>S</li>
<li>If halogens are present in the organic compound, they form sodium halides.<br />
2 Na + X → 2 NaX (X = Cl, Br or I)<br />
Test for Nitrogen : A little of the Lassaigne&#8217;s extract is made alkaline with NaOH solution and then freshly prepared FeSO<sub>4</sub> solution is added.</li>
<li>To it 2 &#8211; 3 drops of FeCl<sub>3</sub> solution is added, cooled and acidified with cone. HCl.</li>
<li>A prussian blue or green ppt. or colouration is observed.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19814" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-35.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 35" width="427" height="110" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-35.png 427w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-35-300x77.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 427px) 100vw, 427px" /></li>
</ul>
<p>Test for Halogens: A little of the Lassaigne&#8217;s extract is acidified with nitric acid and treated with AgNO solution.</p>
<ul>
<li>If white ppt. soluble in NH<sub>4</sub>OH is formed, the halide is Cl. Hence, chlorine is present.</li>
<li>If pale yellow ppt. partially soluble in NH<sub>4</sub>OH is formed, the halide is Br<sup>&#8211;</sup>. Hence, bromine is present.</li>
<li>If yellow ppt. insoluble in NH<sub>4</sub>OH is formed, the halide is I<sup>&#8211;</sup>. Hence, iodine is present. Test for Sulphur: To a little of the l.assaigne’s extract freshly prepared sodium nitroprusside solution is added.</li>
<li>Deep purple colouration is observed.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19815" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-36.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 36" width="436" height="49" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-36.png 436w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-36-300x34.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 436px) 100vw, 436px" /></li>
</ul>
<p><span style="color: #0000ff;">VI. Long Answer Questions</span></p>
<p>Question 1.<br />
Write a note on:<br />
a. Distillation<br />
b. Fractional distillation<br />
c. Distillation under reduced pressure<br />
d. Steam distillation<br />
Answer:<br />
a) Distillation:</p>
<ul>
<li>This process is useful for the purification of liquids contaminated with non-volatile impurities.</li>
<li>The impure liquid is boiled in a distillation flask and the vapours are condensed and collected in a receiver.</li>
<li>This method can also be used to separate liquids which differ in their boiling points by about 40 ’C.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19816" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-37.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 37" width="255" height="234" /></p>
<p>b) Fractional Distillation:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19817" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-38.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 38" width="311" height="230" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-38.png 311w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-38-300x222.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 311px) 100vw, 311px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>In this process loop tubes having different shapes and designs to fit for a particular requirement are used.</li>
<li>These are called fractionating columns. The liquid mixture is taken in a distillation flask, fitted with a fractionating column at its mouth.</li>
<li>At the upper end of the column, it is connected to a water condenser.</li>
<li>Then vapours of that liquid with lower BP condense and collect in the receiver.</li>
</ul>
<p>c) Distillation under reduced pressure :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19818" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-39.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 39" width="311" height="207" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-39.png 311w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-39-300x200.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 311px) 100vw, 311px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>This method is useful to purify liquids that have very high BPs and those which decompose at or below their boiling points.</li>
<li>If the external pressure is reduced the liquid boils at lower temperature than its normal BP without decomposition.</li>
</ul>
<p>d) Steam distillation :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19819" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-40.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 40" width="338" height="235" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-40.png 338w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-40-300x209.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 338px) 100vw, 338px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>Liquids immiscible with water and possessing high BP can be purified by steam distillation. In this method, steam is passed into the hot impure liquid.</li>
<li>Steam mixed with volatile organic compound comes out. It passes through the condenser and collects in the receiver.</li>
<li>The water layer and the organic layer are separated using a separating funnel.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Write a brief note on chromatography.<br />
Answer:<br />
Chromatography is a method of separation of components of a mixture between the stationary phase and a mobile phase.</p>
<p>Chromatography involves the following three steps :</p>
<ol>
<li>Adsorption and retention of a mixture of substances on the stationary phase and separation of adsorbed substances by the mobile phase to different distances on the stationary phase.</li>
<li>Recovery of the substances separated by a continuous flow of the mobile phase (known as elution) and</li>
<li>Qualitative and quantitative analysis of the eluted substances.</li>
</ol>
<p>* Based on the physical states of the stationary phase and mobile phase and also on the basis of the principle of adsorption of substances on the stationary phase chromatography processes are classified into several types as given below.</p>
<table border="2">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Chromatography processes</td>
<td>Stationary phase</td>
<td>Mobile phase</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1) Column chromatography</td>
<td>solid</td>
<td>liquid</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2) Liquid- liquid partition chromatography</td>
<td>liquid</td>
<td>liquid</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3) Paper chromatography</td>
<td>liquid</td>
<td>liquid</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4) Thin layer chromatography (TLC)</td>
<td>liquid or solid</td>
<td>liquid</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5) Gas</td>
<td>liquid chromatography (GLC)</td>
<td>liquid gas</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6) Gas &#8211; solid chromatography (GSC)</td>
<td>solid</td>
<td>gas</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7) Ion exchange chromatography</td>
<td>solid</td>
<td>liquid</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>There are two chromatography techniques<br />
(1) Adsorption chromatography<br />
(2) Partition chromatography.</p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Explain the following:<br />
a. Column chromatography<br />
b. Thin layer chromatography<br />
c. Partition chromatography<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19820" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-41.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 41" width="360" height="317" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-41.png 360w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-41-300x264.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 360px) 100vw, 360px" /><br />
Answer:<br />
a) Column chromatography:</p>
<ul>
<li>In this type of chromatography the components of a mixture are separated by a column of adsorbent (stationary phase) packed in a glass tube. The column is fitted with a stopcock at its lower end.</li>
<li>The mixture to be adsorbed on the adsorbent is placed at the top of the stationary phase. cotton</li>
<li>A suitable eluant (solvent) is allowed to flow down the column slowly.</li>
<li>Depending on the degree to which the compounds are adsorbed, the components are separated.</li>
<li>The most readily adsorbed substances are retained near the top and others come down accordingly to various distances.</li>
</ul>
<p>b) Thin layer chromatography:</p>
<ul>
<li>This type of chromatography also involves adsorption differences. Here the adsorbent silica gel or alumina is coated over a glass plate of suitable size.</li>
<li>The plate is called TLC plate or chromoplate.</li>
<li>The solution of the mixture to be separated by a small spot at about 2 cm from the bottom of the plate. The plate is then kept in a closed jar containing the eluant (solvent).</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19821" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-42.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 42" width="342" height="183" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-42.png 342w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-42-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 342px) 100vw, 342px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>As the eluant rises up the plate, the components of the mixture move up along with the eluant to various distances depending on their degree of adsorption.</li>
<li>The relative adsorption of a component of the mixture is expressed in terms of its retardation factor (R<sub>t</sub>) value.<br />
R<sub>t</sub> \(=\frac{\text { Distance moved by the substance from base line }(\mathrm{X})}{\text { Distance moved by the solvent from the base line }(\mathrm{Y})}\)</li>
</ul>
<p>c) Partition chromatography:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19822" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-43.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 43" width="280" height="251" /></p>
<ul>
<li>This is based on continuous differential partitioning of components of a mixture between the stationary phase and the mobile phase.</li>
<li>In this type of chromatography, a special paper called chromatography paper contains water trapped in it which acts as the stationary phase.</li>
<li>The chromatography paper spotted with the solution of the mixture at the base is suspended in a suitable solvent or a mixture of solvents. This solvent acts as the mobile phase.</li>
<li>The solvent rises up the paper by capillary action and moves over the spot.</li>
<li>The paper selectively retains different components as per their differing partition in mobile and stationary phases.</li>
<li>The paper strip so developed is known as chromatogram. The spots of the separated coloured compounds are detected.</li>
<li>For colourless compounds, other methods like spraying a suitable reagent are used.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Explain the estimation of nitrogen of an organic compound by-<br />
a. Dumas method<br />
b. Kjeldahl&#8217;s method<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19823" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-44.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 44" width="371" height="258" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-44.png 371w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-44-300x209.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 371px) 100vw, 371px" /><br />
a) Estimation of nitrogen by Duma&#8217;s method:</p>
<ul>
<li>In this methodm, a known weight of organic compound is heated strongly with coarse cupric oxide.</li>
<li>Then carbon and hydrogen get oxidised to CO<sub>2</sub> and H<sub>2</sub>O vapour respectively. Nitrogen is converted to N<sub>2</sub> gas.</li>
<li>Some nitrogen converted into its oxides, gets reduced by copper gauze to nitrogen.</li>
<li>The liberated gases are passed over a solution of KOH. Then CO<sub>2</sub> gets absorbed.</li>
<li>Nitrogen is collected over KOH solution and its volume is found out.</li>
</ul>
<p>Calculation :<br />
Suppose &#8216;a&#8217; g of organic compound gives V ml of N<sub>2</sub> gas at room temp. T K.<br />
Vol. of N<sub>2</sub> gas at STP is calculated as follows.<br />
Expt. conditions<br />
P<sub>1</sub> = (P &#8211; p) mm where<br />
p = aqueous tension<br />
T<sub>2</sub> = 273<br />
V<sub>2</sub> = ?</p>
<p>STP conditions<br />
P<sub>2</sub> = 760 mm<br />
T<sub>1</sub> = T K<br />
V<sub>1</sub> = V</p>
<p>From, \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_1 \mathrm{~V}_1}{\mathrm{~T}_1}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_2 \mathrm{~V}_2}{\mathrm{~T}_2}\) ⇒ V<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_1 \mathrm{~V}_1 \mathrm{~T}_2}{\mathrm{P}_2 \mathrm{~T}_1}\) = \(\frac{(\mathrm{P}-\mathrm{p}) \times \mathrm{V} \times 273}{760 \times \mathrm{T}}\) = x ml.<br />
22,400 ml. of N<sub>2</sub> at STP weighs 28 g<br />
∴ x ml. of N<sub>2</sub> at STP weighs &#8230;&#8230; ?<br />
= \(\frac{x \times 28}{22,400}\)g<br />
‘a’ g of organic compound contains \(\frac{28 \times x}{22400}\) g of N<sub>2</sub><br />
∴ 100 g of organic compound contains ?<br />
= \(\frac{100}{\mathrm{a}}\) × \(\frac{28 \times x}{22400}\) g of N<sub>2</sub></p>
<p>b) Estimation of N<sub>2</sub> by Kjeldahl&#8217;s method :</p>
<ul>
<li>In this method, the organic compound is heated with conc. H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> in presence of a small amount of CuSO<sub>4</sub>.</li>
<li>Then N<sub>2</sub> is quantitatively converted into ammonium sulphate.</li>
<li>The contents of the flask are transferred into another flask and heated with excess of NaOH solution to liberate ammonia gas.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19824" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-45.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 45" width="292" height="270" /></p>
<ul>
<li>The gas so liberated is passed and absorbed in a known vol. of known conc. H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> (excess).</li>
<li>Now the excess of acid remained after the neutralisation by NH<sub>3</sub> is titrated against a standard solution of alkali.</li>
<li>From this, the amount of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> used to neutralise NH<sub>3</sub> is calculated.</li>
</ul>
<p>From this the mass of ammonia formed is calculated and from that the % of N<sub>2</sub> gas is calculated.</p>
<p>Kjeldahls method for the estimation of nitrogen:<br />
Organic compound + H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> → (NH<sub>4</sub>)<sub>2</sub> SO<sub>4</sub><br />
(NH<sub>4</sub>)<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> + 2 NaOH → NaSO<sub>4</sub> + 2 H<sub>2</sub>O + 2NH<sub>3</sub><br />
2 NH<sub>3</sub> + H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> → (NH<sub>4</sub>)<sub>2</sub> SO<sub>4</sub></p>
<p>Calculations :<br />
Mass of organic compound = a g<br />
Vol. of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> initially taken = Vml.<br />
Molarity of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> = M<br />
Vol. of NaOH consumed after complete neutralisation = V<sub>1</sub> ml.<br />
Molarity of NaOH = M<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19825" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-46.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 46" width="467" height="468" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-46.png 467w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-46-300x300.png 300w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-46-150x150.png 150w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 467px) 100vw, 467px" /></p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Explain Inductive effect with a suitable example.<br />
Answer:<br />
Inductive Effect : The polarisation of o-bond caused by the polarisation of adjacent o-bond is called inductive effect.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19893" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-93.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 93" width="263" height="44" /></p>
<ul>
<li>This effect is passed on to the subsequent bonds but the effect decreases after three bonds.</li>
<li>This is a permanent effect operating in the molecule.</li>
</ul>
<p>Types of Inductive Effect:</p>
<p>1) Positive inductive effect (+I) : Electron donating groups causes positive inductive effect (+I).<br />
Eg : Alkyl groups R-, (Ethyl C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>5</sub> &#8211; Methyl CH<sub>3</sub>)</p>
<p>2) Negative inductive effect (-I) : Electron withdrawing groups causes negative inductive effect (-I). Eg : CN<sup>&#8211;</sup>, -COOH etc&#8230;.<br />
Presence of +I effect groups in a molecule increases the basic nature of that molecule. Presence of -I effect groups in a molecule increases the acidic nature of that molecule.<br />
Eg:<br />
1) Acidic nature of trichloro acetic acid (CCl<sub>3</sub>COOH) &gt; dichloro acetic acid (CHCl<sub>2</sub>COO) &gt; Mono chloroacetic acid (ClCH<sub>2</sub>COOH) &gt; (Acetic acid (CH<sub>3</sub>COOH)<br />
This is due to the presence of -I. effecting group &#8211; CH<sub>3</sub>.</p>
<p>Eg : 2) Basic nature of dimethyl amine (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>2</sub>NH &gt; Methyl amine (CH<sub>3</sub>NH<sub>2</sub>) &gt; Ammonia (NH<sub>3</sub>).<br />
This is due to the presence of + I. effecting group CH<sub>3</sub>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Write a note on Mesomeric effect.<br />
Answer:<br />
Mesomeric Effect : The polarity produced in the molecules by the interaction of two π bonds or between a π bond and long pair of electrons present on adjacent atom is called resonance effect (or) mespmeric effect.</p>
<p>Two types of Effects</p>
<p>1) +R Effect (Positive resonance effect) (+M effect) : The transfer of electrons is away from an atom (or) substituent attached to the conjugated system is called +R effect.<br />
Eg : NH<sub>2</sub> group</p>
<p>2) &#8211; R Effect (Negative resonance Effect) (-M Effect): The transfer of electrons towards the atom (or) substituent attached to the conjugated system is called -R effect.<br />
Eg : CO, NO<sub>2</sub> group.</p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Describe Resonance effect with one example.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>It is not possible to explain the properties of a molecule by giving a single structure to it. Then several possible structures are to be proposed.</li>
<li>Each structure will explain some properties of the molecule.</li>
<li>All structures put together explain all the properties. This phenomenon is known as resonance.</li>
<li>All the structures thus proposed are called resonance or canonical structures.</li>
</ul>
<p>Eg : Urea CO(NH<sub>2</sub>)<sub>2</sub> has the following resonance (or canonical) structures.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19827" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-48.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 48" width="590" height="84" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-48.png 590w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-48-300x43.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 590px) 100vw, 590px" /></p>
<p>Salient features of resonance :</p>
<ol>
<li>Resonance structures are interconvertible.</li>
<li>Resonance involves only displacement of electrons without disturbing the positions of atoms.</li>
<li>All atoms in the molecule should lie in the same plane.</li>
<li>The no. of paired and unpaired electrons should be the same in all the structures.</li>
<li>The canonical structures should have nearly equal energy.</li>
<li>More stable resonance structure contributes more to the actual structure of the molecule.</li>
<li>More the delocalisation of electrons, more is the stability.</li>
<li>More the covalent bonds, more is the stability and charge separation gives less stability.</li>
</ol>
<p>Resonance effect : It is the polarity produced in a molecule by the interactions of two p bonds or between a p bond and a lone pair of electrons present on adjacent atoms. This effect is transmitted throughout the chain.</p>
<ul>
<li>If the transfer of electrons is away from the atoms of substituent groups attached to the conjugated system, then the molecule gets high electron density in some of its positions as in aniline and it is given (+R).</li>
<li>If the shift of electrons is towards the atom or substituent groups, it is (-R) as in nitrobenzene.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19828" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-49.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 49" width="511" height="320" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-49.png 511w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-49-300x188.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 511px) 100vw, 511px" /></li>
</ul>
<p>Resonance Energy : The energy difference between the real structure and the most stable resonance structure is called resonance stabilisation energy or resonance energy.</p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Explain different types of organic reactions with suitable examples.<br />
Answer:<br />
Common types of organic reactions are<br />
(1) Substitution reactions<br />
(2) Addition reactions<br />
(3) Elimination reactions<br />
(4) Rearrangement reactions.</p>
<p>1) Substitution (Displacement) reactions : The replacement of an atom or group from a molecule by a different atom or group is known as &#8216;substitution reaction&#8217;.<br />
Eg :<br />
i)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19829" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-50.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 50" width="250" height="32" /><br />
ii) CH<sub>3</sub>OH + HBr → CH<sub>3</sub> Br + H<sub>2</sub>O</p>
<p>2) Addition reactions : Reactions in which atoms or groups of atoms are added to a molecule are known as addition reactions.<br />
Eg :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19830" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-51.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 51" width="254" height="46" /><br />
The multiple bond breaks and then the addition takes place.</p>
<p>3) Elimination reactions : The molecule loses atoms or group of atoms and a multiple bond is formed. (These are actually the reverse of addition reactions.)<br />
Eg :<br />
i) Dehydration :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19831" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-52.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 52" width="360" height="56" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-52.png 360w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-52-300x47.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 360px) 100vw, 360px" /></p>
<p>ii) Dehalogenation:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19832" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-53.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 53" width="349" height="51" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-53.png 349w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-53-300x44.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 349px) 100vw, 349px" /></p>
<p>4) Molecular rearrangement reactions : In these reactions, an atom or a group migrates from one atom to another atom, within the same molecule.<br />
Eg :<br />
i) n &#8211; Butane to Isobutane :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19833" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-54.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 54" width="397" height="85" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-54.png 397w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-54-300x64.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 397px) 100vw, 397px" /></p>
<p>ii) Benzophenone oxime to Benzanilide :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19834" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-55.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 55" width="376" height="130" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-55.png 376w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-55-300x104.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 376px) 100vw, 376px" /></p>
<h3>Organic Chemistry &#8211; Some Basic Principles and Techniques Class 11 NCERT Solutions</h3>
<p>Question 1.<br />
What are hybridisation states of each carbon atom in the following compounds ?<br />
CH<sub>2</sub> = C = O, CH<sub>3</sub>CH = CH<sub>2</sub>, (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>2</sub>CO, CH<sub>2</sub> = CHCN, C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>6</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19835" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-56.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 56" width="267" height="231" /></p>
<p>Question 2.<br />
Indicate the σ and π bonds in the following molecules :<br />
C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>6</sub>, C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>12</sub>, CH<sub>2</sub>Cl<sub>2</sub>, CH<sub>2</sub> = C = CH<sub>2</sub>, CH<sub>3</sub>NO<sub>2</sub>, hconhch<sub>3</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
i)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19836" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-57.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 57" width="279" height="223" /></p>
<p>ii)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19837" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-58.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 58" width="186" height="226" /></p>
<p>iii)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19841" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-62.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 62" width="174" height="140" /></p>
<p>iv)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19842" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-63.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 63" width="165" height="123" /></p>
<p>v)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19843" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-64.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 64" width="173" height="188" /></p>
<p>vi)<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19844" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-65.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 65" width="182" height="209" /></p>
<p>Question 3.<br />
Write bond line formulas for : Isopropyl alcohol, 2, 3-dimethyl butanal, Heptan-4-one.<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19845" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-66.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 66" width="183" height="256" /></p>
<p>Question 4.<br />
Give the IUPAC names of the following compounds.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19846" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-67.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 67" width="195" height="363" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-67.png 195w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-67-161x300.png 161w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 195px) 100vw, 195px" /><br />
Answer:<br />
i) Propyl benzene<br />
ii) 3-methylpentane-1-nitrile<br />
iii) 2, 5-dimethyl heptane<br />
iv) 3-bromo-3-chloro heptane<br />
v) 3-chloro propanal<br />
vi) 2, 2-dichloro ethanol</p>
<p>Question 5.<br />
Which of the following represents the correct IUPAC name for the wipounds concerned?<br />
i) 2, 2-dimethylpentane or 2-dimethylpentane<br />
ii) 2, 4, 7-trimethyloctane or 2, 5, 7-trimethyloctane<br />
iii) 2-chloro-4-methylpentane or 4-chloro-2-methylpe ntane<br />
iv) But-3-yn-1-ol-or But-4-ol-1-yne<br />
Answer:<br />
i) 2, 2-dimethylpentane is correct. 2-dimethylpentane is wrong because locant 2 is mentioned only once for two methyl groups.<br />
ii) 2, 4, 7-trimethyloctane is correct. This is because the sum 2 + 4 + 7 = 13 is lower than the sum 2 + 5 + 7 = 14<br />
iii) 2-chloro-4-methylpentane is correct. This is because in 4-chloro-2-methylpentane, the numbering is not done from the end from which Cl is nearer.<br />
iv) But-3-yn-l-ol is correct. In But-4-ol-l-yne, the locant for the principal group (-OH), is greater.</p>
<p>Question 6.<br />
Draw formulas for the first five members of each homologous series beginning with the following compounds.<br />
i) H &#8211; COOH<br />
ii) CH<sub>3</sub>COCH<sub>3</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
i) HCOOH, CH<sub>3</sub>COOH, CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>COOH<br />
CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>COOH, CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>COCH<br />
ii) CH<sub>3</sub>COCH<sub>3</sub>, CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>COCH<sub>3</sub>, CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>COCH<sub>3</sub><br />
CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>COCH<sub>3</sub>, CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>COCH<sub>3</sub><br />
iii) CH<sub>2</sub> = CH<sub>2</sub>, CH<sub>3</sub> &#8211; CH = CH<sub>2</sub>, CH<sub>3</sub> &#8211; CH<sub>2</sub> &#8211; CH = CH<sub>2</sub><br />
CH<sub>3</sub> &#8211; CH<sub>2</sub> &#8211; CH<sub>2</sub> &#8211; CH = CH<sub>2</sub>, CH<sub>3</sub> &#8211; CH<sub>2</sub> &#8211; CH<sub>2</sub> &#8211; CH<sub>2</sub> &#8211; CH = CH<sub>2</sub></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 7.<br />
Give condensed and bond line structural formulas and identify the functional group(s) present, if any for<br />
i) 2, 2, 4-trimethylpentane<br />
ii) 2-hydroxy-l, 2, 3-propanetricarboxylic acid<br />
iii) Hexanedial<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Condensed formula : (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>3</sub>CCH<sub>2</sub>CH(CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>2</sub><br />
Bond-line formula:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19847" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-68.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 68" width="103" height="48" /><br />
Functional group(s) present: Nil</p>
<p>ii) Condensed formula : HOOCCH<sub>2</sub>C (OH)<br />
Bond-line formula:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19848" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-69.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 69" width="207" height="99" /><br />
Functional group(s) present:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19849" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-70.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 70" width="171" height="80" /><br />
iii) Condensed formula : OHC(CH<sub>2</sub>)<sub>4</sub>CHO<br />
Bond-line formula:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19850" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-71.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 71" width="191" height="93" /><br />
Functional group(s) present:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19851" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-72.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 72" width="172" height="65" /></p>
<p>Question 8.<br />
Identify the functional groups in the following compounds<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19852" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-73.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 73" width="186" height="315" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-73.png 186w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-73-177x300.png 177w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 186px) 100vw, 186px" /><br />
Answer:<br />
i) -CHO (aldehyde), -OH (alcohol), and -OMe i.e., -OCH<sub>3</sub> (ether)<br />
ii) -NH<sub>2</sub> (1° amine, aromatic),<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19853" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-74.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 74" width="72" height="54" /> -(ester), -N(C<sub>2</sub>H<sub>5</sub>)<sub>2</sub> (3° amine)<br />
iii) -CH = CH- (ethylenic double bond), -NO<sub>2</sub> (nitro)</p>
<p>Question 9.<br />
Which of the two : O<sub>2</sub>NCH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>O<sup>&#8211;</sup> or CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>O<sup>&#8211;</sup>. is expected to be more stable and why?<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>O<sub>2</sub>NCH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>O is more stable than CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>O<sup>&#8211;</sup>. This is because -NO<sub>2</sub> group is electron attracting and exerts -1-effect.</li>
<li>Therefore, negative charge present on —O— is dispersed and molecule is stabilised. On the other hand, -CH<sub>3</sub> &#8211; CH<sub>2</sub>&#8211; group in CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>O &#8211; exerts + 1-effect and increases electron density at -O<sup>&#8211;</sup>. This de-estabilises the CH<sub>3</sub> &#8211; CH<sub>2</sub>O<sup>&#8211;</sup> species.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19854" style="font-size: inherit;" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-75.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 75" width="331" height="102" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-75.png 331w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-75-300x92.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 331px) 100vw, 331px" /></li>
</ul>
<p>Question 10.<br />
Explain, why alkyl groups act as electron donors when attached to a π system.<br />
Answer:<br />
Due to&#8217; hyperconjugation, alkyl groups act as electron donors when attached to a π-system. For example, let us consider hyperconjugation in propene.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19855" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-76.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 76" width="541" height="228" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-76.png 541w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-76-300x126.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 541px) 100vw, 541px" /></p>
<p>Question 11.<br />
Draw the resonance structures for the following compounds. Show the electron shift using curved-arrow notation.<br />
i) C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>6</sub>OH<br />
ii) C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>NO<sub>2</sub><br />
iii) CH<sub>3</sub>CH = CHCHO<br />
iv) C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub> &#8211; CHO<br />
v) C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub> &#8211; \(\stackrel{+}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_2\)<br />
vi) CH<sub>3</sub> -CH = CH\(\stackrel{+}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_2\)<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19856" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-77.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 77" width="618" height="711" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-77.png 618w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-77-261x300.png 261w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 618px) 100vw, 618px" /></p>
<p>Question 12.<br />
What are electrophiles and nucleophiles ? Explain with examples.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ol>
<li>Electrophiles are electron loving reagents. They are electron deficient and so, act as Lewis acid and seek electrons.<br />
Ex : H<sup>+</sup>, H<sub>3</sub>O<sup>+</sup>, \(\mathrm{O}_2^{+}\) (from HNO<sub>3</sub>), SO<sub>3</sub>H<sup>+</sup>, NO<sup>+</sup>, Br<sup>+</sup>, AlCl<sub>3</sub>, BF<sub>3</sub> are neutral species which act as electrophiles.</li>
<li>Nucleophiles are nucleus loving reagents. They are electron rich and so, act as a Lewis base and donate electrons.<br />
Ex : Cl<sup>&#8211;</sup>, Br<sup>&#8211;</sup>, I<sup>&#8211;</sup>, OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>, CN<sup>&#8211;</sup>, RO<sup>&#8211;</sup> (alkoxide ion), RCOO<sup>&#8211;</sup>.</li>
</ol>
<p>Question 13.<br />
Identify the reagents shown in bold in the following equations as nucleophiles or electrophiles.<br />
i) CH<sub>3</sub>COOH + HO<sup>&#8211;</sup> → CH<sub>3</sub>COO<sup>&#8211;</sup> + H<sub>2</sub>O<br />
ii) CH<sub>3</sub>COCH<sub>3</sub> + CN<sup>&#8211;</sup> → (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>2</sub>C(CN)(OH)<br />
iii) C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub> + \(\stackrel{+}{\mathbf{C}} \mathbf{O}\) → C<sub>6</sub>H<sub>5</sub>COCH<sub>3</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
i) OH<sup>&#8211;</sup> is nucleophile.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19857" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-78.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 78" width="307" height="43" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-78.png 307w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-78-300x42.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 307px) 100vw, 307px" /><br />
ii) CN<sup>&#8211;</sup> is also a nucleophile.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19858" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-79.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 79" width="318" height="43" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-79.png 318w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-79-300x41.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 318px) 100vw, 318px" /><br />
iii) CH<sub>3</sub>\(\mathrm{C}^{+} \mathrm{O}\) is electrophile<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19859" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-80.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 80" width="254" height="48" /></p>
<p>Question 14.<br />
Classify the following reactions in one of the reaction type studied in this unit.<br />
i) CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>Br + HS<sup>&#8211;</sup> → CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>SH + Br<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
ii) (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>2</sub>C = CH<sub>2</sub> + HCl → (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>2</sub>ClC &#8211; CH<sub>3</sub><br />
iii) CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>Br + HO<sup>&#8211;</sup> → CH<sub>2</sub> + H<sub>2</sub>O + Br<sup>&#8211;</sup><br />
iv) (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>3</sub>C &#8211; CH<sub>2</sub>OH + HBr → (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>2</sub> CBrCH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>3</sub> + H<sub>2</sub>O<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Nucleophilic substitution reaction<br />
ii) Electrophilic addition<br />
iii) Bimolecular elimination<br />
iv) Nucleophilic substitution with rearrangement.</p>
<p>Question 15.<br />
What is the relationship between the members of following pairs of structures ? Are the structural or geometrical isomers or resonance contributors ?<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19860" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-81.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 81" width="318" height="220" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-81.png 318w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-81-300x208.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 318px) 100vw, 318px" /><br />
Answer:<br />
i) Structural isomers (position isomers as well as metamers)<br />
ii) Geometrical isomers.<br />
iii) Resonance contributors</p>
<p>Question 16.<br />
For the following bond cleavages, use curved-arrows to show the electron flow and classify each as homolysis or heterolysis. Identify reactive intermediate produced as free radical carbocation and carbanion.<br />
Answer:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19861" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-82.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 82" width="339" height="293" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-82.png 339w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-82-300x259.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 339px) 100vw, 339px" /></p>
<p>Question 17.<br />
Explain the terms inductive and electromeric effects. Which electron displacement effect explains the following correct orders of acidity of the carboxylic acids ?<br />
i) Cl<sub>3</sub>CCOOCH &gt; Cl<sub>2</sub>CHCOOH &gt; ClCH<sub>2</sub>COOH<br />
ii) CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>COOH &gt; (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>2</sub>CHCOOH &gt; (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>3</sub>C.COOH<br />
Answer:<br />
Inductive effect:</p>
<ul>
<li>Polar covalent bond in organic compounds cause inductive effect.</li>
<li>For example, in chloroethane (<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>3</sub> <sub>1</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>&#8211; Cl), C &#8211; Cl bond is a polar covalent bond.</li>
<li>This is because Cl is more electronegative than C.</li>
<li>It is polarised in such a way that the carbon-1 gains some -ve charge (δ<sup>+</sup>), the chlorine gains some -ve charge (δ<sup>&#8211;</sup>) and may be represented as,<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19862" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-83.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 83" width="371" height="50" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-83.png 371w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-83-300x40.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 371px) 100vw, 371px" /></li>
<li>The polar C &#8211; Cl bond induces polarity in the adjacent bonds. Such polarisation of one σ-bond caused by the polarisation of adjacent σ-bond is referred to as the inductive effect.</li>
<li>The inductive effect is related to the ability of substituents (s) to either withdraw or donate electron density to the attached carbon atom. Electron withdrawing groups like halogens, nitro (-NO<sub>2</sub>), cyano (-CN), carboxy (-COOH), ester (-COOR), aryloxy (-OAr), produce, I-effect, whereas electron donating groups like methyl (-CH<sub>3</sub>), ethyl (-CH<sub>2</sub> &#8211; CH<sub>3</sub>) etc. produce + I-effect.</li>
</ul>
<p>Electromeric effect:</p>
<p>• It involves the complete transfer of electrons of a multiple bond e.g., double or triple bond to one of the bonded atoms (usually more electronegative) in presence of attacking reagent.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19863" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-84.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 84" width="411" height="46" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-84.png 411w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-84-300x34.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 411px) 100vw, 411px" /><br />
This effect is temporary and occurs only in the presence of a reagent.</p>
<p>• When the electrons of a π-bond are transferred to that atom of the double bond to which the reagent get finally attached the effect is called + E-effect.<br />
Example :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19864" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-85.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 85" width="411" height="82" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-85.png 411w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-85-300x60.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 411px) 100vw, 411px" /><br />
On the other hand, when the electrons of the double bond are transferred to an atom of the double bond, other than the one to which the reagent gets finally attached, the effect is called -E-effect.<br />
Example :<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19865" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-86.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 86" width="420" height="83" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-86.png 420w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-86-300x59.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 420px) 100vw, 420px" /><br />
i) Example of -I-effect:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19866" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-87.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 87" width="549" height="83" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-87.png 549w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-87-300x45.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 549px) 100vw, 549px" /></p>
<p>ii) Example of +I-effect:<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19867" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-88.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 88" width="543" height="96" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-88.png 543w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-88-300x53.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 543px) 100vw, 543px" /></p>
<p>Question 18.<br />
Give a brief description of the principles of the following techniques taking an example in each case :<br />
i) Crystallisation<br />
ii) Distillation<br />
iii) Chromatography<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Crystallisation:</p>
<ul>
<li>This is one of the most commonly used techniques for the purification of solid organic compounds. It is based on the difference in the solubilities of the compound and the impurities in a suitable solvent.</li>
<li>The impure compound is dissolved in a solvent in which it is sparingly soluble at room temperature but appreciably soluble at higher temperature.</li>
<li>The solution is concentrated to get a nearly saturated solution.</li>
<li>On cooling the solution, pure compound crystallises out and is removed by filtration. Freezing of water into ice is an example of crystallisation.</li>
</ul>
<p>ii) Distillation :</p>
<ul>
<li>A separation process in which a liquid is converted to vapour and the vapour is then condensed to a liquid is called distillation.</li>
<li>Distillation is thus a process of evaporation and condensation.</li>
<li>For example, the process can be used in the purification of a mixture of chloroform (bp 334 K) and aniline (bp 457 K) having a large difference in their boiling points.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19868" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-89.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 89" width="483" height="309" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-89.png 483w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-89-300x192.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 483px) 100vw, 483px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>A pure solvent, a mixture of solvents, or a gas is allowed to move slowly over the stationary phase.</li>
<li>The components of the mixture get gradually is an extremely valuable method for the separation of amino-acid, geometrical and optical isomers.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 19.<br />
Describe the method, which can be used to separate two compounds with different solubilities in a solvent S.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>Two compounds having different solubilities in a solvent S, can be separated by a technique called fractional crystallisation.</li>
<li>When a hot saturated solution of two compounds is allowed to cool, the less soluble compound crystallizes out first, leaving more soluble compound in the solution.</li>
<li>The crystals of the first compound are separated from the mother liquor.</li>
<li>Now mother liquor is further concentrated and the hot solution is again allowed to cool, when the crystals of the second i.e., more soluble compound separate out.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 20.<br />
What is the difference between distillation, distillation under reduced presure and steam distillation ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Distillation is used to separate :</p>
<ol>
<li>volatile liquids from non-volatile impurities, and</li>
<li> liquids having sufficient difference in boiling point.
<ul>
<li>Distillation under reduced pressure is used to separate compounds which decompose at or below their boiling points.</li>
<li>Steam distillation is applied to those substances which have high boiling point are steam volatile and immiscible with water.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 21.<br />
Discuss the chemistry of Lassaigne&#8217;s test.<br />
Answer:<br />
Lassaigne&#8217;s test: For this test a &#8220;Sodium extract&#8221; is prepared for the substance. This is done by heating a pea-sized piece of sodium metal in a combustion tube (5 cm in length and 0.3 cm in diameter) and melted over bunsen burner flame.</p>
<ul>
<li>Organic substance is added to the molten sodium pinch by pinch or drop by drop.</li>
<li>After some substance has reacted, the heating of the combustion tube is gradually increased to redness.</li>
<li>The red hot tube is broken into about 10 mL of distilled water kept in a dish.</li>
<li>The solution is then heated to boiling for a few minutes. Any of the sodium metal, left unreacted, reacts with water as follows :<br />
2Na + 2HOH → 2NaOH + H<sub>2</sub></li>
<li>The solution is filtered. The filtered solution is called sodium extract or Lassaigne&#8217;s extract.</li>
<li>In this process, the nitrogen of the organic substance is converted to sodium cyanide, sulphur to sodium sulphide or sulpho cyanide and the halogens to the respective halides.</li>
<li>All these are soluble in water.<br />
Na + C + N → NaCN (cyanide)<br />
2Na + S → Na<sub>2</sub>S (sulphide)<br />
Na + S + C + N → NaSCN (sulpho cyanide)<br />
Na + X → NaX (halide) (X = Cl, Br or I)</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 22.<br />
Differentiate between the principle of estimation of nitrogen in an organic compound by<br />
i) Dumas method<br />
ii) Kjeldahl&#8217;s method<br />
Answer:<br />
i) In Dumas method, a known weight of organic compound containing nitrogen is heated in presence of CuO, such that the nitrogen present in organic compound is changed to dinitrogen.</p>
<ul>
<li>The evolved dinitrogen is collected in a nitrometer.</li>
<li>The volume thus obtained is converted to NTP and the percentage of nitrogen is calculated by using the equation.<br />
%N = \(\frac{28}{22400}\) × \(\frac{\text { Volume of } \mathrm{N}_2 \text { at NTP } \times 100}{\text { Mass of organic compound taken }}\)</li>
</ul>
<p>ii) In Kjeldahl&#8217;s method, a known weight of organic compound containing nitrogen is heated with cone. H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub>. in presence of K<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> and little Hg in a long necked flask called Kjeldahl&#8217;s flask.</p>
<ul>
<li>When nitrogen present in organic compound is converted into (NH<sub>4</sub>)<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> that is boiled with excess of NaOH solution to liberate NH<sub>3</sub> gas which is further absorbed in a known excess of standard H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub>.</li>
<li>The volume of acid unused is determined by titration against a standard alkali solution.</li>
<li>From the volume of the acid used the percentage of nitrogen is determined by using the equation.<br />
%N \(=\frac{1.4 \times \text { Molarity of acid × basicity of acid } \text { × } \text { volume of acid used }}{\text { Mass of the substance taken }}\)</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 23.<br />
Discuss the principle of estimation of halogens, sulphur and phosphorus present in an organic compound.<br />
Answer:<br />
i) Estimation of halogen by the Carius method:</p>
<ul>
<li>A small quantity of the substance is weighed in a small ignition tube (3 mm in diameter × 50 mm in length) and is placed in Carius tube (a thick-walled Jena glass tube about 45 cm long and 2.5 cm in diameter) having enough of concentrated HNO<sub>3</sub> and AgNO<sub>3</sub> crystals [in Fig. (a)].</li>
<li>The Carius tube is sealed by using an oxygas flame.</li>
<li>The sealed tube is placed in an iron socket tube heated in a special furnace.</li>
<li>The furnace temperature is maintained near 475 K [in Fig. (b)] for six to seven hours and then the furnace is allowed to cool down to room temperature.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19869" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-90.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 90" width="265" height="346" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-90.png 265w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-90-230x300.png 230w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 265px) 100vw, 265px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>The halogen part of the substance is converted into the corresponding silver halide. After breaking the seal, contents of the Carius tube are collected.</li>
<li>Silver halide is filtered, washed, dried and weighed. Percentage of the halogen is then calculated from the mass of silver halide formed.<br />
Percentage of halogen \(=\frac{\text { Mass of silver halide } \text { × } \text { Atomic mass of halide } \times 100}{\text { Molecular mass of silver halide } \text { × } \text { Mass of organic compound }}\)</li>
</ul>
<p>ii) Estimation of sulphur : This is also done by the Carius method.</p>
<ul>
<li>Instead of adding crystals of AgNO<sub>3</sub> as done for halogens, crystals of BaCl<sub>2</sub> are added.</li>
<li>The sulphur part is oxidised to sulphuric acid.</li>
<li>This gives a precipitate of BaSO<sub>4</sub> which is collected, washed, dried and weighed. 233.34 g of BaSO<sub>4</sub> contains 32 g of sulphur.<br />
Percentage of sulphur \(=\frac{\text { Weight of } \mathrm{BaSO}_4 \times \text { Atomic mass of sulphur } \times 100}{\text { Molecular mass of } \mathrm{BaSO}_4 \times \text { Mass of organic compound }}\)</li>
</ul>
<p>iii) Estimation of Phosphorus : Non-volatile orthophosphoric acid H<sub>3</sub>PO<sub>4</sub>, which is precipitated as MgNH<sub>4</sub>PO<sub>4</sub> with magnesia mixture.</p>
<p>• On heating the precipitate Mg<sub>2</sub>P<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub> is obtained as a stable residue.</p>
<p>•Calculation of percentage of phosphorus can be done as follows.<br />
(P) → H<sub>3</sub>PO<sub>4</sub><br />
H<sub>3</sub>PO<sub>4</sub> + Magnesia mixture → MgNH<sub>4</sub>PO<sub>4</sub><br />
2MgNH<sub>4</sub>PO<sub>4</sub> → Mg<sub>2</sub>P<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub> + 2NH<sub>3</sub> + H<sub>2</sub>O<br />
Molecular mass of Mg<sub>2</sub>P<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub> = 2 × 24 + 2 × 31 + 7 × 16 = 222 units<br />
222 g of Mg<sub>2</sub>P<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub> contain 62 g of phosphorus<br />
Let mass of substance be w gram and of Mg<sub>2</sub>P<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub> residue x grams.<br />
Mass of phosphorus in x gram of Mg<sub>2</sub>P<sub>2</sub>O<sub>7</sub> = \(\frac{62 x}{222} \mathrm{~g}\)<br />
Percentage of phosphorus in the compound = \(\frac{62 x}{222} \times \frac{100}{w}\)</p>
<p>Question 24.<br />
Explain the principle of paper chromatography.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>Paper chromatography is also known as partition chromatography. It is based on the principle of continuous partitioning of component of a mixture between stationary and mobile phases.</li>
<li>In paper chromatography, a special quality paper known as chromatography paper is used and the water trapped in it act as the stationary phase.</li>
<li>A rectangular chromatography paper (of about 22 cm length and 5 cm width) is taken. It is spotted with the mixture of the solution (say blue and red ink) at the centre of its one end.</li>
<li>The chromatography paper is fixed vertically between two halves of the cork and suspended in suitable solvent or a mixture of solvent (in the present case in a mixture of 1 volume methanol and 9 volume water) taken in a boiling tube in such a way that the ink spot is just above the solvent level, (figure (a))</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-full wp-image-19870" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-91.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8 91" width="517" height="233" srcset="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-91.png 517w, https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2026/10/Organic-Chemistry-Some-Basic-Principles-and-Techniques-Questions-and-Answers-AP-Inter-1st-Year-Chemistry-Chapter-8-91-300x135.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 517px) 100vw, 517px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>The solvent rises up the paper by capillary action and flows over the spot (in the present case mixture of ink). As a result, the coloured components (in the present case ink) get dissolved in the solvent mixture and rises up the paper by capillary action.</li>
<li>The paper selectively retains different components (red and blue ink) are visible at different heights from the position of the initial spot on the chromatogram. (figure (b)).</li>
<li>In case the spots separated are colourless, they may be observed by the use of an appropriate spray reagent.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 25.<br />
Why is nitric acid added to sodium extract before adding silver nitrate for testing halogens?<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>Nitric acid is added to sodium extract before adding silver nitrate for testing halogens, because if sodium extract contains Na<sub>2</sub>S or NaCN along with NaX, silver nitrate will give Ag<sub>2</sub>S and AgCN etc., and will interfere in the test.</li>
<li>To remove sulphide and cyanide as H<sub>2</sub>S, and HCN dil. HNO<sub>3</sub> is added.<br />
NaCN + HNO<sub>3</sub> → NaNO<sub>3</sub> + HCN↑<br />
Na<sub>2</sub>S + 2HNO<sub>3</sub> → 2NaNO<sub>3</sub> + H<sub>2</sub>S↑</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 26.<br />
Explain the reason for the fusion of an organic compound with metallic sodium for testing nitrogen, sulphur and halogens.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>Nitrogen, sulphur and halogens are present in organic compound in covalent form, which cannot be analysed.</li>
<li>On fusion with sodium these are converted in ionic form in the form of sodium cyanide, sodium halide, sodium sulphide etc.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 27.<br />
Name a suitable technique of separation of the components from a mixture of calcium sulphate and camphor.<br />
Answer:<br />
By sublimation, the two can be separated. Camphor sublimates whereas CaSO<sub>4</sub> is left behind.</p>
<p>Question 28.<br />
Explain why an organic liquid vaporises at a temperature below its boiling point in its steam distillation.<br />
Answer:</p>
<ul>
<li>In steam distillation, the mixture of organic liquid and water boils at a temperature at which the sum of vapour pressure of the liquid (p<sub>1</sub>) and that of water (p<sub>2</sub>) is equal to that of the atmospheric pressure (p) i.e., p = p<sub>1</sub> + p<sub>2</sub></li>
<li>This is attained at a temperature much below the boiling point of the liquid. In other words, the organic liquid vaporises at a temperature much lower than its normal boiling point.</li>
</ul>
<p>Question 29.<br />
Will CCl<sub>4</sub> give white precipitate of AgCl on heating it with silver nitrate ? Give reason for your answer.<br />
Answer:<br />
CCl<sub>4</sub> will not give any white precipitate of AgCl on heating it with silver nitrate solution. Carbon tetrachloride contains chlorine, but it is bonded to carbon atom by a covalent bond; hence it does not give any precipitate of silver chloride.</p>
<p>Question 30.<br />
Why is a solution of potassium hydroxide used to absorb carbon dioxide evolved during the estimation of carbon present in an organic compound ?<br />
Answer:<br />
2KOH + CO<sub>2</sub> → K<sub>2</sub>CO<sub>3</sub> + H<sub>2</sub>O<br />
Total CO<sub>2</sub> formed by organic compound is absorbed by potassium hydroxide solution. And then the percentage of C present in organic compound can be calculated using,<br />
C% \(=\frac{12}{44}\) \(\times \frac{\text { Mass of } \mathrm{CO}_2}{\text { Mass of the organic compound }}\) × 100</p>
<p>Question 31.<br />
Why is it necessary to use acetic acid and not sulphuric acid for acidification of sodium extract for testing sulphur by lead acetate test ?<br />
Answer:<br />
Sulphuric acid is a powerful oxidising agent; it may oxidise Na<sub>2</sub>S present in sodium extract to sodium sulphate and then we will not be able to get the nitroprusside test of sulphur while if acidification done by using acetic acid the formed product lead acetate is soluble and do not interfere with the test.</p>
<p>Question 32.<br />
An organic compound contains 69% carbon and 4.8% hydrogen, the remainder being oxygen. Calculate the masses of carbon dioxide and water produced when 0.20 g of this substance is subjected to complete combustion.<br />
Answer:<br />
100 g of organic compound contains 69 g of carbon<br />
∴ 0.2 g of organic compound contains \(\frac{69}{100}\) × 0.2 g carbon = 0.138 g of carbon<br />
Now we know that:<br />
12 g of carbon gives = 44 g of CO<sub>2</sub><br />
∴ 0.138 g of carbon gives = \(\frac{44}{12}\) × 0.138g of CO<sub>2</sub> = \(\frac{6.072}{12}\) g = 0.506 g<br />
Also, 100 g of organic compound contains = 4.8 g of hydrogen<br />
∴ 0.2 g of organic compound contains = \(\frac{4.8}{100}\) × 0.2 g of hydrogen = 0.0096 g of hydrogen<br />
2 g of hydrogen gives = 18 g of H<sub>2</sub>O<br />
∴ 0.0096 g of hydrogen gives = \(\frac{18}{2}\) × 0.0096 g of H<sub>2</sub>O = 0.0864 g</p>
<p>Question 33.<br />
A sample of 0.50 g of an organic compound was treated according to Kjeldahl’s method. The ammonia evolved was absorbed in 50 mL of 0.5 M H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub>. The residual acid required 60 mL of 0.5 M solution NaOH for neutralisation. Find the percentage composition of nitrogen in the compound.<br />
Answer:<br />
Mass of organic compound taken = 0. 50 g<br />
Volume of 0.5 M of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> solution = 50 mL<br />
Volume of NaOH of 0.5 M required for neutralisation of residual acid<br />
= 60 mL = 30 mL of 0.5 M of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub><br />
Volume of 0.5 M of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> used for absorbing NH<sub>3</sub> = (50 &#8211; 30) mL or 20 mL of 0.5 M of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub><br />
Now, 20 mL of 0.5 M of H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub> = 40 mL of 0.5 M of NH<sub>3</sub> or 20 mL of 1 M of NH<sub>3</sub><br />
1000 mL of 1 M of NH<sub>3</sub> contains 17 g ammonia or 14 g of Nitrogen<br />
20 mL of 1 M NH<sub>3</sub> contains = \(\frac{20}{1000}\) × 14 = 0.28 g of nitrogen<br />
∴ Nitrogen in 0.5 g of organic substance = 0.28 g<br />
or Percentage of Nitrogen = \(\frac{0.28}{0.5}\) × 100 = 56</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" src="https://tsboardsolutions.in/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/TS-Board-Solutions.png" alt="Organic Chemistry - Some Basic Principles and Techniques Questions and Answers AP Inter 1st Year Chemistry Chapter 8" width="161" height="15" /></p>
<p>Question 34.<br />
0.3780 g of an organic chloro compound gave 0.5740 g of silver chloride in Carius estimation. Calculate the percentage of chlorine present in the compound.<br />
Answer:<br />
Using the relation :<br />
Percentage of chlorine = \(\frac{35.5}{01435}\) × \(\frac{\text { Mass of } \mathrm{AgCl} \text { formed }}{\text { Mass of the substance taken }}\) × 100<br />
Given, Mass of AgCl formed = 0.5740 g<br />
Mass of organic chioro compound taken = 0.3780 g<br />
Substituting the values in the equation above, we get<br />
= \(\frac{35.5}{143.5} \) × \(\frac{0.5740}{0.3780}\) = 37.566%</p>
<p>Question 35.<br />
In the estimation of sulphur by Carius method, 0.468 g of an organic sulphur compound afforded 0.668 g of barium sulphate. Find out the percentage of sulphur in the given compound.<br />
Answer:<br />
Percentage of sulphur in an organic compound is given by<br />
%S = \(\frac{32}{233}\) × \(\frac{\text { Mass of } \mathrm{BaSO}_4 \text { formed }}{\text { Mass of compound taken }}\) × 100<br />
%S = \(\frac{32}{233}\) × \(\frac{0.668}{0.468}\) × 100 = 19.60</p>
<p>Question 36.<br />
In the organic compound CH<sub>2</sub> = CH &#8211; CH<sub>2</sub> &#8211; CH<sub>2</sub> &#8211; C ≡ CH, the pair of hydridised orbitals involved in the formation of C<sub>2</sub> &#8211; C<sub>3</sub> bond is :<br />
a) sp-sp<sup>2</sup><br />
b) sp-sp<sup>3</sup><br />
c) sp<sup>2</sup>-sp<sup>3</sup><br />
d) sp<sup>3</sup> = sp<sup>3</sup><br />
Answer:<br />
(c) sp<sup>2</sup>-sp<sup>3</sup></p>
<p>Question 37.<br />
In the Lassaigne&#8217;s test for nitrogen in an organic compound, the Prussian blue colour is obtained due to the formation of<br />
a) Na<sub>4</sub>[Fe(CN)<sub>6</sub>]<br />
b) Fe<sub>4</sub>[Fe(CN)<sub>6</sub>]<sub>3</sub><br />
c) Fe<sub>2</sub>[Fe(CN)<sub>6</sub>]<br />
d) Fe<sub>3</sub>[Fe(CN)<sub>6</sub>]<sub>4</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
b) Fe<sub>4</sub>[Fe(CN)<sub>6</sub>]<sub>3</sub></p>
<p>Question 38.<br />
Which of the following carbocation is most stable ?<br />
a) (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>3</sub>C.\(\stackrel{ \pm}{\mathbf{C}}\)H<sub>2</sub><br />
b) (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>3</sub>\(\stackrel{+}{\mathrm{C}}\)<br />
c) CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>\(\stackrel{+}{\mathbf{C}}\)H<sub>2</sub><br />
d) CH<sub>3</sub>\(\stackrel{+}{\mathrm{C}}\)HCH<sub>2</sub>CH<sub>3</sub><br />
Answer:<br />
b) (CH<sub>3</sub>)<sub>3</sub>\(\stackrel{+}{\mathrm{C}}\). This is because order of stability of carbocations is 3° &gt; 2° &gt; 1°.</p>
<p>Question 39.<br />
The best and latest technique for isolation, purification and separation of organic compounds is<br />
a) Crystallisation<br />
b) Distillation<br />
c) Sublimation<br />
d) Chromatography<br />
Answer:<br />
(d) Chromatography</p>
<p>Question 40.<br />
The reaction : CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>I + KOH(aq) → CH<sub>3</sub>CH<sub>2</sub>OH + KI is classified as,<br />
a) electrophilic substitution<br />
b) nucleophilic substitution<br />
c) elimination<br />
d) addition<br />
Answer:<br />
(b) Nucleophilic substitution. In this reaction the nucleophile I<sup>&#8211;</sup> is replaced by the nucleophile OH<sup>&#8211;</sup>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
		<post-id xmlns="com-wordpress:feed-additions:1">19767</post-id>	</item>
	</channel>
</rss>

<!--
Performance optimized by W3 Total Cache. Learn more: https://www.boldgrid.com/w3-total-cache/?utm_source=w3tc&utm_medium=footer_comment&utm_campaign=free_plugin

Page Caching using Disk: Enhanced 

Served from: tsboardsolutions.in @ 2026-10-20 03:22:58 by W3 Total Cache
-->